BS-430 Service Manual V1.0 en

BS-430
Chemistry Analyzer
Service Manual
I
Intellectual Property Statement
©2020 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issue date is 2020-02.
Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)
owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual
may refer to information protected by copyright or patents and does not convey any license
under the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.
Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written
permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other
derivative work of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.
, , , , BeneView, WATO,
BeneHeart, are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in China and other
countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for informational or
editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable
for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product,
only if:
 all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this
product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
 the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national
and local requirements; and
 the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
BA43 Service Manual 1

Warranty
Warning
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a reasonable
service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or personal injury.
Note
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or
other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from
the improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved
by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.
 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.
 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or
unauthorized service people.
 Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.
 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.
Customer service department

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, High-tech
industrial park, Nanshan, Shenzhen 518057,P.R.China
Website: www.mindray.com
E-mail Address: [email protected]
Tel: +86 755 81888998
Fax: +86 755 26582680
EC - Representative
EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)
Address: Eiffestraβe 80, 20537 Hamburg, Germany
Tel: 0049-40-2513175
Fax: 0049-40-255726
2 BA43 Service Manual

Preface
Preface
This manual contains the instructions necessary to operate the product safely and in
accordance with its function and intended use. Please read this manual thoroughly before
using the product. Observance of this manual is a prerequisite for proper performance and
correct operation, and it ensures patient and operator safety. All graphics including screens
and printouts in this manual are for illustration purpose only and must not be used for any
other purposes. The screens and printouts on the actual product should prevail.
Product introduction
This equipment is a computer-controlled fully-automated chemistry analyzer, intended for
quantitative determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine, cerebrospinal fluid
(CSF), and other human body fluids. It can fulfill auto dispensing, reaction, colorimetric
measurement, process monitoring, and result calculation. It provides measurement of multiple
biochemistries and ISE (ion-selective electrode) tests (Na+, K+ and Cl-), with maximum
throughput up to 620 tests per hour. It is one of the necessary tools for laboratory automation.
Conventions
Graphical symbols, formats and abbreviations are used to get better visual effects and
readability. To help you understand this manual correctly, this section provides statements of
pictures, terms and applicable models used in this manual.
Symbols and formats
The following symbols and formats are used:
Symbol and Meaning

format
A safety symbol, for alerting you to warnings about safety and
system operations.
Alerts you to biohazards.
 Item list.
 Reference content or cross reference.
Bold Headings or important information.
Italic Key points.
 Start of operating procedure.
Picture
All pictures in this manual are for illustration purpose only and must not be used for any other
purposes. The pictures of the actual product should prevail.

Safety information
Safety information
This chapter provides you with safety symbols used in this manual and their meanings,
summarizes the safety hazards and operating precautions that should be considered seriously
when the instrument is being operated, and lists the labels and silkscreens that have been
applied to the instrument and their indications.
Safety symbols
Safety symbols are used in this manual in order to remind you of the instructions necessary to
operate the product safely and in accordance with its function and intended use. A safety
symbol and text constitutes a warning as shown in the table below:
Symbol Text Description

WARNING Read the statement following the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause personal
injury.
BIOHAZARD Read the statement following the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.
CAUTION Read the statement following the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to a possibility of system damage or unreliable
results.
NOTE Read the statement following the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to information that requires your attention.
Summary of hazards
This section lists hazards of the instrument itself. The hazards of specific operation are
included in the warning information of each operation task.
Observe the following safety precautions when using the product. Ignoring any of them may
lead to personal injury or equipment damage.
WARNING
If the product is used in a manner not specified by our company, the protection provided by the product may be
impaired.
Electric shock hazards

Safety information
WARNING
 When the MAIN POWER is turned on, users other than the servicing personnel authorized by
our company must not open the rear cover or side cover.
 Spillage of reagent or sample on the product may cause equipment failure and even electric
shock. Do not place sample and reagent on the product. In case of spillage, switch off the
power immediately, remove the spillage and contact our Customer Service Department or
your local distributor.
Moving Parts Hazards
WARNING
 Do not touch such moving parts as sample carousel, reagent carousel, reaction carousel,
sample probe, reagent probe, mixer, and cuvette wash station, when the system is in
operation.
 Exercise caution while using the ISE module. Prevent your hair, legs or other parts of your
body from being hurt by the driving parts.
 Do not put your fingers or hands into any open part when the system is in operation.
Photometer lamp hazards
WARNING
 Eye injury could occur from light emission from the photometer lamp. Do not stare into the
lamp when the system is in operation.
 If you want to replace the photometer lamp, first switch off the MAIN POWER and then wait
at least 5 minutes for the lamp to cool down before touching it. Do not touch the lamp
before it cools down, or you may get burned.
Laser beam hazards
WARNING
Light emitted by the bar code reader may cause eye injury. Do not stare into the laser beam radiated from the
bar code reader when the system is in operation.
Sample, calibrator and control hazards
BIOHAZARD
 Inappropriately handling samples, controls and calibrators may lead to biohazardous
infection. Do not touch samples, controls, calibrators, mixtures, or waste with your bare
hands. Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
 In case your skin contacts the sample, control or calibrator, follow the standard laboratory
safety procedure and consult a doctor.
 The serum samples remaining in the electrodes may contain a great number of viruses. Wear
gloves to prevent infection while operating around the electrodes.
Reagent and wash solution hazards

Safety information
WARNING
Reagents and concentrated wash solution are corrosive to human skins. Exercise caution when using reagents
and concentrated wash solution. In case your skin or clothes contact them, wash them off with soap and clean
water. If reagents or wash solution spills into your eyes, rinse them with much water and consult an oculist.
Waste hazards
BIOHAZARD
 Some substances contained in reagent, control, calibrator, concentrated wash solution, and
waste are subject to regulations of contamination and disposal. Dispose of the waste in
accordance with your local or national rule for biohazard waste disposal and consult the
manufacturer or distributor of the reagents for details.
 Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
System disposal hazards
WARNING
Materials of the analyzer are subject to contamination regulations. Dispose of the waste analyzer in accordance
with your local or national rule for waste disposal.
Fire and explosion hazards
WARNING
Ethanol is flammable substance. Please exercise caution while using ethanol around the instrument in order to
prevent fire and explosion.
Removal of analyzer from use for repair or disposal
WARNING
When the analyzer is not in use, for example, in repair, transportation or disposal process, please clean and
sterilize the parts (sample probe, reagent probe, etc.) or surfaces that may cause biohazdards and remind
the person who handles the device of the related hazards.
Cleaning and Decontamination
CAUTION
Appropriate decontamination should be carried out in accordance with laboratory safety regulations if reagent,
sample or other liquids are spilled onto the equipment. In case of large-amount liquid ingression, please contact
our customer service department or the local distributor.
No decontamination or cleaning agents can be used which could cause a HAZARD as a result of a reaction
with parts of the equipment or with material contained in it. Strong acid or alkaline solutions are forbidden to
clean the equipment.
If there is any doubt about the compatibility of the decontamination or cleaning agents with parts of the
equipment or with material contained in it, please contact our customer service department or the local
distributor.

Safety information
Summary of precautions
This section lists precautions to be understood during instrument operation. The precautions
of specific operation are included in the warning information of each operation task.
To use the product safely and efficiently, pay attention to the following operating precautions.
Intended use
WARNING
The instrument is an automated chemistry analyzer for in vitro diagnostic use in clinical laboratories and
designed for in vitro quantitative determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine and cerebrospinal
fluid samples.
Please consult us before you use the instrument for other purposes.
When drawing a clinical conclusion, please also refer to patients' clinical symptoms and other test results.
Environment precautions
CAUTION
Please install and operate the system in an environment specified by this manual. Installing and operating the
system in other environment may lead to unreliable results and even equipment damage.
To relocate the system, please contact our Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Installation Precautions
NOTE
The safety of any system incorporating the equipment is the responsibility of the assembler of the system.
Electromagnetic noise precautions
CAUTION
Electromagnetic noise may interfere with operations of the system. Do not install devices generating excessive
electromagnetic noise around the system. Do not use such devices as radio transmitters in the room housing
the system. Do not use other display monitors around the system.
Do not use other medical instruments around the system that may generate electromagnetic noise to interfere
with their operations.
Do not use this device in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation (e.g. unshielded
intentional RF sources), as these may interfere with the proper operation.
The electromagnetic environment should be evaluated prior to operation of the device.
This device has been designed and tested to CISPR 11 Class A, and in a domestic environment may cause
radio interference, in which case, you may need to take measures to mitigate the interference.
CAUTION
It is the manufacturer's responsibility to provide equipment electromagnetic compatibility information to the
customer or user.
It is the user's responsibility to ensure that a compatible electromagnetic environment for the equipment can be
maintained in order that it will perform as intended.
Operating precautions

Safety information
CAUTION
 Take the clinical symptoms or other test results of the patient into considerations when
making diagnosis based on the measuring results produced by the system.
 Operate the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate use of the system
may lead to unreliable test results or even equipment damage or personal injury.
 When using the system for the first time, run calibrations and QC tests to make sure the
system is in proper state.
 Be sure to run QC tests every time when you use the system, otherwise the result may be
unreliable.
 Do not uncover the reagent carousel when the system is in operation. Keep the reagent
carousel cover closed.
 The RS-232 port on the analyzing unit is used for connection with the operation unit only. Do
not use it for other connections. Use the cables provided by our company or your local
distributor for the connection.
 The operation unit is a personal computer with the operating software installed. Installing
other software or hardware on the computer may interfere with the system operation. Do
not run other software when the system is working.
 Computer virus may destroy the operating software or test data. Do not use the computer
for other purposes or connect it to the Internet. If the computer is infected by virus, please
install anti-virus software to check for and clear virus.
 Do not touch the display, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands with chemicals.
 Do not place the MAIN POWER to ON again within 10 seconds after placing it to OFF;
otherwise the system may enter the protection status. If it does so, place the MAIN POWER
to OFF and place it to ON again.
Chemistry parameter configuration precautions
CAUTION
To define such parameters as sample volume, reagent volume and wavelength, follow the instructions in this
manual and the instructions of reagents.

Safety information
ISE module precautions
CAUTION
To prevent ISE electrodes from being damaged due to water scarcity, if the system, when equipped with an ISE
module, will be powered off for a long time, perform the electrode storage maintenance.
Sample precautions
CAUTION
 Use samples that are completely free of insoluble substances like fibrin or suspended
matter; otherwise the sample probe may be clogged.
 Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to unreliable results.
 Hemolysis, icterus or lipemia in the samples may lead to unreliable test results; running a
serum index test therefore, is recommended.
 Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the compositions of samples and
lead to unreliable results.
 Sample volatilization may lead to unreliable results. Do not leave the sample open for a
long period.
 The system has a specific requirement on the sample volume. Refer to this manual for
proper sample volume.
 Load samples to correct positions on the sample carousel before the analysis begins;
otherwise reliable results may not be obtained.
Reagent, calibrator and control precautions
CAUTION
 Use proper reagents, calibrators and controls on the system.
 Select appropriate reagents according to the performance characteristics of the system.
Consult the reagent suppliers, our company or our authorized distributor for details, if you
are not sure about your reagent choice.
 Store and use the reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as instructed by the suppliers;
otherwise, reliable results or best performance of the system may not be obtained.
Improper storage of reagents, calibrators and controls may lead to unreliable results and
bad performance of the system even in validity period.
 Perform calibration after changing the reagents, otherwise reliable results may not be
obtained.
 Contamination caused by carryover among reagents may lead to unreliable test results.
Consult the reagent suppliers for details.
ISE calibration precautions
BIOHAZARD
The calibrators contain preservatives. In case your skin contacts calibrators, wash them off with soap and water.
In case the calibrators spill into your eyes, rinse them with water and consult an oculist. If you swallow them by
mistake, see a doctor.

Safety information
CAUTION
Use the calibrators specified by our company. Use of other reagents or calibrators may result in unreliable
results, or damage the Hydropneumatic system, or even shorten the electrodes life span.
Prior to using the calibrators, check if they are within the expiration date.
Place them correctly; otherwise, it may cause unreliable results, or leak, or module damage.
ISE wash solution biohazards
BIOHAZARD
The ISE wash solution is sodium hypochlorite. Use the ISE wash solution carefully to prevent it from contacting
your skins or eyes. If your skins or eyes contact the ISE wash solution, rinse them off with fresh water and
consult a doctor.
Data archiving precautions
NOTE
The system automatically stores the data to the built-in hard disk. Data loss, however, is still possible due to
mis-deletion or physical damage of the hard disk. You are recommended to regularly archive the data to such
medium as CDs.
To avoid the data loss caused by unexpected power failure, UPS (uninterrupted power supply) is
recommended.
External equipment precautions
WARNING
For operating instructions and precautions of the computer and printer, please refer to their operation manuals.
External equipment connected to the analogue and digital interfaces must be authorized and complied with
relevant safety and EMC standards (e.g., IEC 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Standard and
CISPR 22 EMC of Information Technology Equipment Standard (CLASS B)). Any person, who connects
additional equipment to the signal input or output ports and configures an IVD system, is responsible for
ensuring that the system works normally and complies with the safety and EMC requirements. If you have any
questions, consult the technical services department of your local representative.
Tube and liquid container precautions
WARNING
When the tube or the part that contain liquid become aged or damaged, please stop its use immediately and
contact our customer service department or your local distributor to check and replace it.
Maintenance and Servicing Precautions

Safety information
CAUTION
Maintain the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate maintenance may lead to unreliable
results, equipment damage or personal injury.
When the instrument is stored for a long time, dust may accumulate on the surface. To wipe off dust from the
system surface, use a soft, clean and wet (not too wet) cloth soaked with soap water if necessary. Do not use
such organic solvents as ethanol for cleaning. After cleaning, wipe the surface dry with dry cloth.
Switch off all the powers and disconnect the power plug before cleaning and servicing the instrument. Take
necessary measures to prevent water ingression, otherwise equipment damage or personal injury may be
caused.
Replacement of such major parts as sample probe, reagent probe and syringe assembly must be followed by a
calibration.
The system may need to be stopped or transported during servicing, which will probably cause biohazards,
electric shock hazards and moving part hazards. Exercise caution when prepare the system for servicing.
To avoid biohazards and chemical risks, wear gloves, lab coat and goggles.
NOTE
Check the safe state of the equipment after repair. Make sure the equipment is safe and then offer it to the
customer.

Safety information
Labels and silkscreen

The following non-warning and warning labels and silkscreen are used on the product for
system identification and operating instruction.
For the label marked with , please consult the related documentations in order to find
out the nature of the potential HAZARDS and any actions which have to be taken to avoid them.
Check the labels regularly for cleanliness and integrity. If any of the labels becomes vague or
peels off, contact our Customer Service Department or your local distributor for replacement.
Non-warning labels and silkscreen

Serial number
This symbol, contained in the product label which is attached to the rear cover of the system,
indicates the production serial number of the product.
Date of manufacture
indicates the manufacture date of the product.
In vitro diagnostic equipment

indicates that the product is in vitro diagnostic equipment.
European community representative

indicates the name and address of the authorized representative in the European Community.
WEEE label
The following definition of the WEEE label applies to EU member states only.
The use of this symbol indicates that this product should not be treated as household waste. By
ensuring that this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent bringing potential
negative consequences to the environment and human health. For more detailed information
with regard to returning and recycling this product, please consult the distributor from whom
you purchased the product.

Safety information
Main power switch: ON

This symbol located on the main power switch indicates that the system power is on when the
switch is toggled rightwards to expose this symbol and ON character and the green light is
lightened.
Main power switch: OFF

This symbol located on the main power switch indicates that the system power is off when the
switch is toggled leftwards to expose this symbol and OFF character and the green light is
extinguished. All components including the reagent refrigeration system will be stopped.
Analyzer power switch

This symbol located on the analyzer power switch indicates that the analyzer power is on
when the switch is on the dotted-circle portion and off when it is on the blank-circle portion.
Network interface
This symbol located on the network interface indicates the connection between the analyzer
and the operation unit.
Serial port
This symbol located on the serial port indicates the connection between the analyzer and the
operation unit.
Electrical ground
This symbol indicates an electrical ground.

Safety information
Interfaces for fluid connection

This symbol located on the right panel of the analyzer indicates the connection of fluid tubing.
Warning labels
Biohazard warning
This label indicating the risk of biohazardous infection is located in the following positions:
 Sample probe
 Waste outlet
 Waste tank
Moving parts warning

This symbol and text indicating the hazardous moving parts is located in the following
positions:
 Sample probe and reagent probe
 Mixer
 Wash station
Laser warning
This symbol and text located near the bar code reader reminds you of not staring into the laser
beam.

Safety information
Photometer lamp warning

This symbol and text located on the lamp housing reminds you of not touching the lamp before
it gets cool.
Probe collision warning

This symbol and text located near the sample carousel, reagent carousel and reaction carousel
reminds you of not opening the cover to prevent from damaging the probe.
Upper cover
This symbol and text located on the transparent upper cover reminds you of not wipe the
upper cover with ethanol or other organic solutions.
ISE module
This symbol and text is located on the left side panel of the analyzer. Please turn off the main
power before opening the small door.
Risk of Electrical Shock

This symbol and text located on the power supply shield, reminds you of not touching or
removing the power supply shield while the power is on.
Risk of Chemical Hazards

This symbol and text is located on the diluted wash solution tank. Take cautions to avoid the
chemical hazards of the wash solution.

Safety information
Liquid level floater

This symbol and text is located near the liquid level floater of the DI water tank and the wash
solution tank, Please do not take out the liquid level floater during test.

Safety information

Table of contents
Intellectual Property Statement............................................................................................................................................ 1
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party ....................................................................................................................... 1
Warranty ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
Exemptions...................................................................................................................................................................... 2
Customer service department................................................................................................................................. 2
EC - Representative ...................................................................................................................................................... 2
Preface ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3
Product introduction................................................................................................................................................... 3
Conventions .................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Safety information ··················································································································· 4
Safety symbols .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Summary of hazards .................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Summary of precautions .......................................................................................................................................................... 7
Labels and silkscreen...............................................................................................................................................................12
Non-warning labels and silkscreen .....................................................................................................................12
Warning labels .............................................................................................................................................................14
Table of contents ······················································································································ I
1 System Description ············································································································· 1-1
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Functions of Analyzing Unit ........................................................................................................................................ 1-3
2 System Performance and Workflow ······················································································· 2-1
2.1 Major Specifications ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 General Specifications ................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Sample Specifications .................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 Reagent Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System .......................................................................................................... 2-5
2.1.5 Specifications of Operation Unit ............................................................................................................. 2-6
2.1.6 Typical Test Procedure ................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.1.7 Startup Procedure ......................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.1.8 Shutdown Procedure ................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.1.9 Sleep Procedure ............................................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.1.10 Wakeup Procedure ..................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.1.11 Workflow Descriptions............................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.1.12 Measuring Points ..................................................................................................................................... 2-10
3 Installation Requirements and Procedure ··············································································· 3-1
3.1 Check Before Installation ............................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Installation Environment ........................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Configuration Check ..................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Installation Requirements ........................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation ................................................................. 3-2
3.2.2 Power Supply and Noise ............................................................................................................................. 3-2
I
Safety information
3.2.3 Water Supply and Drainage ...................................................................................................................... 3-2

3.3 Computer Configuration (for International Customers)................................................................................. 3-3
3.3.1 CPU ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.2 Memory.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3.3 Network Adapter ........................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.4 Serial Port ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.5 Hard Drive Partition ..................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.6 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby ........................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.7 Screen Display Properties .......................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.4.1 Unpacking ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.4.2 Installation ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4.3 Fluidic Connection ..................................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.4 Connection of Analyzer ............................................................................................................................ 3-15
3.4.5 Starting up the System ............................................................................................................................. 3-15
3.4.6 Fluidic Prime ................................................................................................................................................ 3-16
3.4.7 Initial Maintenance Record .................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.4.8 Startup Initialization ................................................................................................................................. 3-22
3.4.9 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters of Mindray Reagents .......................... 3-23
3.4.10 System Performance Test ..................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.5 Stop Use ............................................................................................................................................................................ 3-25
3.5.1 Stop Use for Short Term........................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.5.2 Stop Use for Long Term............................................................................................................................ 3-26
4 Software Introduction ·········································································································· 4-1
4.1 Software Installation ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Introduction of Installation Package ..................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Folder Structure ............................................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.3 Log Files............................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.1.4 Normal Startup Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.2 Software Upgrading ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.3 Software Uninstallation ................................................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.3.1 Uninstalling BS-410/BS-410E/BS-410S/BS-430/BS-450/BS-460/BS-470/BS-470E
Software ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.3.2 Uninstalling SQL Database ........................................................................................................................ 4-4
5 Modules and Units ·············································································································· 5-1
5.1 Shell Assembly .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 Module Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Component Locations and FRU Details ................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.3 Removing Shielding Cover Assembly and Replacing the Hinges .............................................. 5-3
5.1.4 Replacing Air Spring..................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Left and Right Panels ........................................................................... 5-4
5.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Panels ......................................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.7 Removing and Reinstalling Front Cover .............................................................................................. 5-5
5.1.8 Replacing Left/Right Front Door Assemblies and Hinges............................................................ 5-5
5.1.9 Cleaning Fans .................................................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.2 Frame Assembly ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
II BA43 Service Manual

Safety information

5.2.3 Replacement of Lock Catch ....................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.4 Removing and Reinstalling Left and Right Dust Screens .............................................................. 5-8
5.3 Reaction Carousel Assembly ....................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.3 Replacing Slip Ring .................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.4 Replacement of Reaction Carousel Body Cables ........................................................................... 5-12
5.3.5 Replacement of Cuvette Spring Plate ................................................................................................. 5-14
5.3.6 Replacing Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor ................................................................... 5-15
5.3.7 Replacing Reaction Carousel Motor and Synchronous Belt ..................................................... 5-17
5.4 Reagent Carousel Assembly ..................................................................................................................................... 5-18
5.4.1 Module Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 5-18
5.4.2 Component Locations and FRU Details ............................................................................................. 5-19
5.4.3 Replacing Reagent Carousel Body Assembly .................................................................................. 5-20
5.4.4 Replacing Semi-conductive Peltier and Temperature Sensor ................................................. 5-21
5.4.5 Replacing Cooling Fan .............................................................................................................................. 5-24
5.4.6 Replacing Reagent Carousel Motor and Synchronous Belt....................................................... 5-25
5.4.7 Replacing Reagent Carousel Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor .............................. 5-27
5.4.8 Removing and Reinstalling Reagent Bar Code Reader ............................................................... 5-28
5.4.9 Installing Reagent Anti-Fogging Heater Assembly ....................................................................... 5-29
5.5 Sample Carousel Assembly ....................................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.5.3 Replacing Sample Carousel Body Assembly.................................................................................... 5-32
5.5.4 Replacement of Sample Carousel Home Sensor and Coder Sensor Cables ........................ 5-33
5.5.5 Removing and Reinstalling Sample Carousel Motor and Synchronous Belt ..................... 5-34
5.5.6 Removing Sample Bar Code Reader ................................................................................................... 5-36
5.6 Cuvette Wash Station .................................................................................................................................................. 5-37
5.6.3 Replacing Wash Probe Assembly ......................................................................................................... 5-39
5.6.4 Replacing BA48 Wash Station Photocoupler .................................................................................. 5-40
5.6.5 Replacing Wash Probe Drive Assembly............................................................................................. 5-41
5.6.6 Replacing Zero Position Photocoupler .............................................................................................. 5-42
5.7 Sample/Reagent Probe Unit..................................................................................................................................... 5-42
5.7.3 Replacing Sample/Reagent Probe Assembly .................................................................................. 5-44
5.7.4 Replacing Reagent Probe Drive Assembly ....................................................................................... 5-46
5.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly ............................................................................. 5-48
5.7.6 Replacing 3-probe Horizontal Motor Assembly and Synchronous Belt .............................. 5-50
5.8 Mixer Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-51
5.8.3 Replacing Mixer Arm Assembly ........................................................................................................... 5-52
5.8.4 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly.............................................................................................. 5-56
BA43 Service Manual III

Safety information
5.8.5 Replacing Horizontal Motor Assembly and Synchronous Belt ............................................... 5-57
5.9 Modules and Units — Photoelectric Unit ........................................................................................................... 5-58
5.9.1 Functions and Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 5-58
5.9.2 Composition and Structure of Optical Assembly .......................................................................... 5-58
5.9.3 Replacing Lamp ........................................................................................................................................... 5-60
5.9.4 Replacing Fiber Bundle............................................................................................................................ 5-61
5.9.5 Replacing Light-splitting Assembly .................................................................................................... 5-62
5.9.6 Replacement of PDA Assembly ............................................................................................................. 5-63
5.9.7 Replacing Reaction Cuvette .................................................................................................................... 5-67
5.9.8 Photometer Lens Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 5-68
5.10 ISE Unit (Optional) .................................................................................................................................................... 5-69
5.10.1 Module Functions .................................................................................................................................... 5-69
5.10.2 Structure and FRU List .......................................................................................................................... 5-69
5.10.3 Unclogging Waste Tubes ....................................................................................................................... 5-72
5.10.4 Replacing Pump Tube ............................................................................................................................ 5-72
5.10.5 Replacing Calibrator Tube ................................................................................................................... 5-73
5.10.6 Inventory Calculation of Reagent Pack ........................................................................................... 5-74
6 Hardware Circuits ··············································································································· 6-1
6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Precautions ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.3 Summary of PCBAs.......................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.4 Locations of PCBA............................................................................................................................................................ 6-3
6.5 Functions of PCBA ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.5.1 Control Structure ........................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.5.2 Main Control Board ...................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.5.3 3-probe Drive Board.................................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.5.4 3-carousel Drive Board ............................................................................................................................ 6-13
6.5.5 Pump/Valve Drive Board......................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.5.6 Rotation Speed Photocoupler Conversion Board ......................................................................... 6-20
6.5.7 Reaction Carousel Temperature Collection Board ....................................................................... 6-21
6.5.8 Heater Conversion Board of Reaction Carousel ............................................................................ 6-24
6.5.9 Cleaning Fluid Temperature Collection Board ............................................................................... 6-26
6.5.10 AD collection board ................................................................................................................................ 6-28
6.5.11 Pre-amplification Board........................................................................................................................ 6-32
6.5.12 Level Sense Board.................................................................................................................................... 6-35
6.5.13 Clog Detection Board.............................................................................................................................. 6-38
6.5.14 Reagent Refrigeration Board .............................................................................................................. 6-41
6.6 Power Supply System .................................................................................................................................................. 6-44
6.6.1 Power Supply System of Whole Unit .................................................................................................. 6-44
6.6.2 Performance Indices ................................................................................................................................. 6-45
6.6.3 BA40 Power Supply Assembly .............................................................................................................. 6-46
6.6.4 Analog Power Supply Conversion Board .......................................................................................... 6-53
6.6.5 Maintenance of Power Supply System ............................................................................................... 6-55
6.7 Wiring Diagram of Analyzer..................................................................................................................................... 6-56
7 Hydropneumatic System ······································································································ 7-1
7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Fluidic Diagram ................................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
IV BA43 Service Manual

Safety information
7.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System.................................................................................................................... 7-4

7.3.1 Probe Wash Module...................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.2 Cuvette Wash Module .................................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.3.3 Water Supply/Drainage Module ............................................................................................................. 7-6
7.3.4 Other ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.4 Introduction of Fluidic Actions .................................................................................................................................. 7-8
7.4.1 Fluidic Initialization ..................................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.4.2 Prime Wash Station ...................................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.5 Removing and Reinstalling Hydropneumatic Components ........................................................................... 7-9
7.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.5.2 Probe Wash Module................................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.5.3 Cuvette Wash Module ............................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.5.4 Water Supply/Drainage Module .......................................................................................................... 7-24
7.5.5 External Modules ........................................................................................................................................ 7-28
8 Alignment ·························································································································· 8-1
8.1 Basic Operation ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.1 Utility - Maintenance.................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Alignment Fixtures ....................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.3 Mechanical Reset ........................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2 Alignment Procedure ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3 Photometer Unit ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1 Lamp Brightness Adjustment................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.3.2 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment ................................................................................................. 8-7
8.3.3 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment................................................................................................................ 8-9
8.4 Sample Carousel Unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.4.1 Radial Position Adjustment of Probe to Reaction Carousel ..................................................... 8-10
8.4.2 Sample Carousel Inner Ring Circumferential Position ............................................................... 8-11
8.4.3 Sample Carousel Middle Ring Circumferential Position ............................................................ 8-12
8.4.4 Sample Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential Position............................................................... 8-12
8.5 Reagent Carousel Unit ................................................................................................................................................ 8-13
8.5.1 Circumferential Position Adjustment of Reagent Probe to Reagent Carousel Outer Ring8-13
8.5.2 Circumferential Position Adjustment of Reagent Probe to Reagent Carousel Inner Ring8-14
8.5.3 Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Reversed Stop Position Compensation ................................. 8-15
8.6 Sample Probe Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-15
8.6.1 Sample Probe Rotary to Cuvette .......................................................................................................... 8-15
8.6.2 Sample Probe Rotary to Wash Well and Home .............................................................................. 8-16
8.6.3 Sample Probe Rotary to Sample Carousel Outer Ring ................................................................ 8-17
8.6.4 Sample Probe Rotary to Sample Carousel Middle Ring .............................................................. 8-17
8.6.5 Sample Probe Rotary to Sample Carousel Inner Ring................................................................. 8-17
8.6.6 Sample Probe Cuvette Height ................................................................................................................ 8-18
8.6.7 Sample Probe Rotary to ISE (Optional)............................................................................................. 8-18
8.6.8 Sample Probe Rotary to ISE Vertical Extreme Height (Optional) .......................................... 8-18
8.7 Reagent Probe Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.7.1 Reagent Probe Rotary to Cuvette ......................................................................................................... 8-20
8.7.2 Reagent Probe Rotary to Wash Well and Home ............................................................................ 8-20
8.7.3 Reagent Probe Rotary to Bottle ............................................................................................................ 8-21
8.7.4 Reagent Probe Cuvette Height .............................................................................................................. 8-21
BA43 Service Manual V

Safety information
8.7.5 Reagent Probe Bottle Height ................................................................................................................. 8-22

8.8 Mixer Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-22
8.8.1 Reagent Mixer Rotary to Horizontal Position of Reaction Carousel ..................................... 8-23
8.8.2 Adjusting Positions of Mixer Motor Stopper and Sensor .......................................................... 8-24
8.8.3 Sample Mixer Rotary to Horizontal Position of Reaction Carousel ....................................... 8-25
8.8.4 Run Mixer Motor ......................................................................................................................................... 8-26
8.8.5 Reagent Mixer Height ............................................................................................................................... 8-26
8.8.6 Sample Mixer Height ................................................................................................................................. 8-26
8.8.7 Replacing Mixer ........................................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.9 Alignment of Cuvette Wash Unit............................................................................................................................. 8-27
8.9.1 Cuvette Wash Station Home................................................................................................................... 8-28
8.9.2 Cuvette Wash Station Height ................................................................................................................. 8-29
8.10 Bar Code Unit (Optional) ........................................................................................................................................ 8-29
8.10.1 Bar Code Sticking Requirements....................................................................................................... 8-29
8.10.2 Sample Barcode Unit .............................................................................................................................. 8-30
8.10.3 Sample Bar Code Reader Adjustment ............................................................................................. 8-30
8.10.4 Sample Bar Code Stability Test .......................................................................................................... 8-32
8.10.5 Reagent Barcode Unit ............................................................................................................................ 8-32
8.10.6 Reagent Bar Code Reader Adjustment............................................................................................ 8-32
8.10.7 Reagent Bar Code Stability Test......................................................................................................... 8-34
8.11 Hydropneumatic Unit Alignment ........................................................................................................................ 8-35
8.11.1 Preparations Before Alignment ......................................................................................................... 8-35
8.11.2 Confirming Diluted Wash Solution ................................................................................................... 8-36
8.11.3 Checking Floater and Valve Status.................................................................................................... 8-36
8.11.4 Syringe Check ............................................................................................................................................ 8-37
8.11.5 Fluidic Prime.............................................................................................................................................. 8-37
8.11.6 Adjustment of Deionized Water Pressure ..................................................................................... 8-39
8.11.7 Deionized Water Flow Test .................................................................................................................. 8-40
8.12 Pyrology Unit ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-40
8.12.1 Sensor Configuration.............................................................................................................................. 8-41
8.12.2 Observe Temperature Curve ............................................................................................................... 8-42
8.12.3 Wash Solution Temperature Control ............................................................................................... 8-42
8.12.4 Fan Status Query ...................................................................................................................................... 8-43
8.12.5 Reagent Refrigeration Alignment ..................................................................................................... 8-43
9 Proactive Maintenance········································································································· 9-1
9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 Maintenance Tools........................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3 Maintenance Procedure ................................................................................................................................................ 9-2
9.3.1 Steps .................................................................................................................................................................... 9-3
10 Troubleshooting ·············································································································· 10-1
VI BA43 Service Manual

1 System Description
1.1 Overview
The BS-410/BS-410E/BS-410S/BS-430/BS-450/BS-460/BS-470/BS-470E is a fully automated
and computer-controlled chemistry analyzer designed for the in vitro determination of clinical
chemistries in serum, plasma, urine, and cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) samples. It consists of the
analyzing unit and the operation unit.
Figure 1.1 BS-410/BS-410E/BS-410S/BS-430/BS-450/BS-460/BS-470/BS-470E chemistry
analyzer
The throughput of the biochemical analysis system is 420 tests/hour.

The throughput of the ISE module:
Serum/plasma: 312±12 (Max.) tests/hour (Na+, K+, Cl-).
Urine: 177±6 tests/hour (Na+、K+、Cl-).
1-1
1System Description
The maximum throughput of the analyzer with ISE integrated is 626 tests/hour.
1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit

The fully automated chemistry analyzer consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer), operation
unit (computer), and output unit (printer).
The analyzing unit is responsible for all operations related to sample analysis, including
sample adding, reagent adding, mixing, reaction and measurement, automatic washing of
cuvettes, ISE analysis, etc.
The operation unit (computer) is installed with the operating and result analysis software to
control the running and operation of the analyzers and to process the test data.
The output unit can print the sample results.
The operation unit and the analyzing unit are independent structurally and communicate with
each other through the serial port. The operation unit sends data and instructions to the
analyzing unit and acquires the data and status information from the analyzing unit.
Figure 1.2 System structure
Analyzing
unit
Computer
(operating software) Analyzer
Printer
The fully automated chemistry analyzer has a throughput of 420 tests per hour for single- or
double- reagent analysis, and its maximum throughput is 626 tests per hour with ISE module.
The working period is 8.55 seconds.
The instrument is composed of the following components: one reaction carousel, one sample
carousel, one reagent carousel, one reagent probe, one sample probe, one mixer, one cuvette
wash station, one optical measurement system, and one ISE module (optional). The optical
measurement system collects photoelectric signals in the "grating + diode array" mode. After
testing, an eight-phase automatic cuvette washing is conducted by the automatic cuvette wash
station.
1-2 BA43 Service Manual

1 System Description
Figure 1.3 Layout of the analyzer’s operation panel

(7)
(6)
(1)
(5)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Mixer assembly (2) Reagent probe

(3) Reagent carousel (4) Sample carousel
(5) Sample probe (6) Cuvette wash unit
(7) Reaction carousel
Figure 1.4 Front cabinet of the analyzer
(1)
(2) (7)
(6)
(3) (5)
(4)
(1) Reagent syringe (2). Pressure gauge

(3) Left dust screen (4) Deionized water tank
(5) Right dust screen (6) Sample syringe
(7) ISE reagent pack grid
1.3 Functions of Analyzing Unit

The working procedure of the system is described as follows:
1 The system resets to initialize all mechanical units and wash the exterior and
interior of the sample probe, reagent probe and mixer.
2 Reaction cuvettes are washed through 8 phases, and run water blank test after
phase 6.
3 The reagent carousel rotates to the specified position, from which the reagent probe
aspirates R1.
BA43 Service Manual 1-3

1System Description
4 The reaction cuvettes are carried to the reagent dispense position after the 8-phase
washing. And the probe R1 rotates to a cuvette to dispense reagent into it after
aspirating R1.
5 R1 is incubated for 10 periods in the cuvette.
6 The sample carousel rotates to the specified position, and the sample probe lowers
down to aspirate specified amount of sample.
7 The reaction cuvette with R1 added is carried to the sample dispense position, to
which the sample probe rotates to dispense sample after aspirating from the sample
carousel.
8 The reaction cuvette with sample added is carried to the sample mixing position for
stirring.
9 For double-reagent tests, the reagent carousel rotates to the specified position after
a fixed period, and the reagent probe lowers down to aspirate R2.
10 The reaction cuvettes are carried to the reagent dispense position, And the reagent
probe with R2 added rotates to the reaction carousel and dispenses R2 into the
reaction cuvette.
11 With R2 added, the reaction cuvette rotates to the reagent mixing position for
stirring.
12 During each period, the reaction cuvette receives photometric measurement
(absorbance reading taking) when passing by the photometric unit;
13 Triple-/quadruple-reagent measurement is similar to single-/double-reagent
measurement stated above. (As for triple-/quadruple-reagent tests, the reaction
cuvette with R2 dispensed will not be washed when passing by the wash station.)
14 The reaction cuvettes in which reaction is finished will be washed automatically
when they pass by the cuvette wash station.
Table 1.1 Functions of system units
Unit Name Functions
Sample Performs aspiration and dispensing for all biochemistry tests and ISE
probe unit tests.
Sample Provides 102 positions to hold samples.
carousel unit The outer and middle rings support barcode scanning.
Reagent Perform aspiration and dispensing of R1, R2, R3 and R4 for all
probe unit biochemistry tests.
Reagent 92 positions are available for the reagents.
carousel unit All positions support scanning by a built-in reagent bar code reader.
The outer ring supports 20ml reagent bottles.
The inner ring supports 40ml and 20ml reagent bottles. Reagents can be
placed in any positions of the reagent carousel.
The reagent carousel provides a refrigerating environment which is
constant within 2°C-8°C for 24 hours a day.
Reaction 93 positions are available for plastic cuvettes.
carousel unit
Mixer unit Two mixer heads, driven by step motors.
Photometric Reversed optics with 12 wavelengths: 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm,
unit 505nm, 546nm, 570nm, 605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm, and 800nm.
Cuvette 8-phase automatic washing of reaction cuvettes.
wash unit
ISE unit Provides the function of ISE measurement.
(optional)

2 System Performance and Workflow
2.1 Major Specifications

2.1.1 General Specifications
System
Random selection, multi-channel, multi-chemistry, capable to pause tests and adding new tests
System structure
Analyzing unit + computer + printer
Sample type
Serum, urine, plasma, CSF (cerebrospinal fluid), whole blood, etc.
Max. number of items that can be analyzed at the same time
45 double-reagent tests/90 single-reagent tests
Throughput
420 tests/hour; Maximum: 626 tests/hour (with ISE module)
Reaction types
Endpoint, Kinetic and Fixed-time; supporting single-/double-/triple-/quadruple-reagent tests,
and single-/double-wavelength tests
Reaction time
The longest reaction time is 10 minutes for single-reagent test, and 5 minutes for
double-reagent test.
Reaction temperature
37±0.3°C
Test type
Clinical chemistries, Immunoturbidimetry, and Therapeutic Drug Monitoring (TDM)
Predilution
Dilution is conducted in reaction cuvette at the ratio of 3 -133.
Operation mode
2-1
2System Performance and Workflow
Chemistries are defined one by one via the operating software; panels and calculation tests are
supported.
Calibration Math Model
Single-point linear, two-point linear, multi-point linear, Logit-Log 4P, Logit-Log 5P, Spline,
Exponential, Polynomial, and Parabola
QC
Westguard rules, Cumulative sum check, and Twin plot
Data Processing
Capable of storing and outputting various types of data and charts, and calculating among
different chemistries
Dimensions
Analyzing unit: l×b×h: 990 mm×710 mm×1135 mm
Weight
Analyzing unit: 197.5 kg
STAT features
Emergent samples can be analyzed at any time with highest priority.
Networking
LIS connection
2.1.2 Sample Specifications

Sample loading
Samples are loaded via sample carousels.
Sample cuvette type
Table 2.1 Sample tube volume and dead volume
Sample Container Specification Dead Volume
Sample tube Φ14×25mm, 0.5ml 70μl
(Beckman microtube)
Sample tube Φ14×25mm, 2ml 150μl
(Beckman microtube)
Sample tube Φ12×37mm, 2ml (Hitachi) 100μl
Primary tube or plastic Φ12×68.5 mm 8mm more over the unacceptable
tube sample level height
Primary tube or plastic Φ12×99 mm 8mm more over the unacceptable
Primary tube or plastic Φ12.7×75 mm 8mm more over the unacceptable
Primary tube or plastic Φ12.7×100 mm 8mm more over the unacceptable

Sample Container Specification Dead Volume

Least sample volume

Hitachi sample container (Φ12×37mm): the sample volume ≥ 150μl; Beckman microtube
(Φ14×25mm, 0.5ml): the sample volume ≥ 120μl; Beckman microtube (Φ14×25mm, 2ml): the
sample volume ≥ 180μl.
For primary tube or plastic tube, the sample should be kept 8mm higher than the unacceptable
sample level height.
Sample carousel
Coaxial sample carousel consists of inner, middle and outer rings. The outer and middle rings
support barcode scanning.
Sample positions on sample carousel
There are 34 sample positions on each ring and 102 positions in total. The inner ring is used to
hold routine sample, control, STAT sample, and wash solution.
STAT sample
STAT samples can be analyzed at any time with highest priority.
Sample volume
1.5μl - 45μl, with an increment of 0.1μl
ISE sample—Serum: 70μl; Urine: 140ul.
Sample probe
One sample probe is available, featuring level detection, horizontal/vertical obstruction
detection, clog detection (optional) and level tracking.
Sample probe cleaning
The exterior and interior of the sample probe is washed with carryover rate less than or equal
to 0.05%.
Sample input mode (bar code, etc.)
Name Value
Symbology Codabar, ITF, code128, code39, UPC/EAN, Code93
Minimum bar code 0.19mm~0.5mm
density
Data bits 3-27
Format and content Defined by user
Maximum width 55mm
Minimum height 10mm
Maximum inclination ±5°
angle
Print quality No less than Class C according to the ANSI MH10.8M
Print Quality Specification.
Width and 2.5-3.0:1
narrowness

2.1.3 Reagent Specifications

Reagent loading
Reagents can be set in both the inner and outer rings.
Reagent bar code
Name Value
Symbology Codabar, ITF, code128, code39, UPC/EAN, Code93
Minimum bar code 0.25mm~0.5mm
density
Data bits 13-30
Format and content Defined by user
Maximum width 55mm
Minimum height 10mm
Maximum inclination ±5°
angle
Print quality Class A according to the ANSI MH10.8M Print Quality
Specification.
Width and 2.5:1
narrowness
Reagent refrigeration
Refrigeration temperature: 2-8°C
Reagent addition approach
Reagent is aspirated and dispensed precisely by syringe, which is capable of detecting fluid
level and checking reagent volume.
Supported reagent types
R1, R2, R3 and R4
Reagent volume
Reagent Reagent Volume Diluent Volume Sum of Reagent and

Diluent
Non-concentrated reagent
R1 90μl~200μl, with 0.5μL Empty 90μl~200μl
increment.
increment.
increment.
increment.
Concentrated reagent
R1 10μl~190μl, with 0.5μL 10μl~190μl, with 0.5μL 90μl~200μl
increment. increment.

Reagent Reagent Volume Diluent Volume Sum of Reagent and

Diluent
Reagent carousel
The reagent carousel is a coaxial carousel with inner and outer rings, which are driven by the
same motor. All reagent positions support bar code scanning by a built-in bar code reader.
Number and volume of reagent bottle
The reagent positions support Mindray reagent bottles, which include: outer ring 20ml; inner
ring 40ml and 20ml.
Reagent probe
One reagent probe is available, featuring level sense, horizontal/vertical bump detection,
empty aspiration detection, and level tracking.
Reagent probe cleaning
Both interior and exterior of the probe are washed.
Specifications and dead volume of reagent bottle
Maximum dead volume of reagent bottle
 Outer ring 20ml reagent bottle: 1.5ml
 Inner ring 40ml reagent bottle: 2.5ml
 Inner ring 20ml reagent bottle: 1.5ml
Prevention of reagent cross contamination
Users are allowed to perform carryover settings, e.g. washing interior and exterior of reagent
probes and inserting special wash between tests.
2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System

Optical pathlength of reaction cuvette
Optical path: 5mm
Material of reaction cuvette
5mm×4mm×29mm, plastic cuvette
Number of reaction cuvettes
93
Mixing method
The mixer unit with two mixer heads is equipped with sample and reagent mixers. It starts to
work after the sample, R2, R3 and R4 are respectively added.
Reaction volume
100μl~300μl
Optical measurement method
Reversed optics with holographic concave flat-field gratings, and detecting each wavelength
through a photodiode.
Wavelength

12 wavelengths: 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm, 570nm, 605nm

660nm, 700nm, 740nm, 800nm
Light source
12V/20W tungsten-halogen lamp; optical fiber incidence
Grating type
Reversed optics with holographic concave flat-field gratings
Wavelength accuracy
±2nm
Photometric measurement method
Measuring through a photodiode
Number of wavelengths simultaneously measured for each test
Supporting one or two wavelengths
Absorbance range
0-3.5A, optical path conversion: 10mm
Resolution of photometer
0.0001OD
2.1.5 Specifications of Operation Unit

Display monitor
Screen resolution of 1280×1024
Operating system
Microsoft Window 8 (64 bit).
Communication interface
RS232, compatible with TCP/IP
Printer
Supporting three types of printer: inkjet printer, laser (black and white) printer and stylus
printer
Data input
Keyboard; mouse; bar code reader; RMS (communicating through the TCP/IP network
interface of static IP address); LIS: HL7, ASTM1394 (communicating through the TCP/IP or
serial interface of static IP address)
Data output
Display monitor, printer, RMS (communicating through TCP/IP interface of static IP address),
and LIS
Data storage
Hard disk, with USB interface

2.1.6 Typical Test Procedure

Figure 2.1 Test flowchart
dispenses R2
Reagent probe
the solution
Reagent mixer stirs
Cuvette is automatically washed
Cuvette is automatically washed

Sample mixer stirs the solution
Double-reagent
Sample probe adds the sample
Absorbance measurement is
Reagent probe dispenses R1
When the ligh t source chemistry
Shutdown Procedure
Startup initialization
becomes stable, th e
reaction carousel All
temperature gets
steady chemistries
finished
are finished
Single-reagent
chemistry
Next test
According to the reaction curve of double-reagent, there is a measuring point in every 2 short
periods. The first measuring point happens when R1 is dispensed; sample is dispensed after
the 5th measuring point and mixed after the 6th one; R1 reacts with sample from the 6th to
22nd measuring point; R2 is dispensed and mixed with R1 after the 22nd measuring point;
from the 23rd to 39th measuring point, R1, sample and R2 react with each other.
See the figure below:
Absorbance
Pri ma ry S ec onda ry Pri ma ry and Se conda ry

Wa ve le ngth Wa ve le ngth Wa ve le ngth Measuring period
For the sample that had the diluting test ran, the diluted sample will be aspirated by the sample
probe from the corresponding cuvette after 51 periods, and then added to the No. (X+72)
cuvette to complete the auto dilution test.
According to the reaction curve of R4, there is a measuring point in every 2 short periods. The
first measuring point happens when R1 is dispensed; sample is dispensed after the 5th
measuring point and mixed after the 6th one; R1 reacts with sample from the 6th to 22nd
measuring point; R2 is dispensed and mixed after the 22nd measuring point; from the 23rd to
47th measuring point, R1, sample and R2 react with each other. R3 is dispensed after the 47th
measuring point and mixed after the 52nd one; from the 53rd to 68th measuring point, R1,
sample, R2 and R3 react with each other. R4 is dispensed and mixed after the 68th measuring
point; from the 69th to 86th measuring point, R1, sample, R2, R3 and R4 react with each other.
See the figure below:

Absorbance
Pri ma ry
Wa ve le ngth Measuring period
2.1.7 Startup Procedure

1 The analyzer is powered on.
2 The operating software is run and starts checking the running environment.
3 Check the middle-low layer unit’s status.
4 The software checks the parameters and status of the analyzer, and inquires the
unconfigured and wrong parameters of all units, and checks the status of the fans.
5 The system communicates with the sample bar code reader, if it is configured.
6 The system communicates with the reagent bar code reader, if it is configured.
7 Mechanical reset is performed.
8 The reaction carousel temperature control is turned on.
9 The lamp is turned off and the dark current and maximum luminance value of the
reaction carousel lamp are inquired. The lamp is turned on (it takes 5 minutes for
the lamp to become steady. When 5 minutes are not reached and the the system
finishes its home procedure, the system enters incubation status.)
10 The fluidic unit is initialized. Wash solution circulation pump P03 is switched on.
11 The preheating of cuvette wash solution and cleaning water is turned on.
12 The system of the analyzer is reset.
13 The reagent bar code is scanned (when the reagent bar code reader is configured.)
14 ISE module stats its initialization. (performed after the ISE module is configured.)
15 Wash solution circulation pump P03 is switched off.
16 If the conditions for system standby are met, the system enters into Standby status.
2.1.8 Shutdown Procedure

1 When the system is in Stop, Sleep or Standby status, it can be shut down.
2 The lamp power is turned off.
3 The reaction carousel temperature control and the preheating of cuvette cleaning
fluid and wash solution are turned off.
4 The fluidic unit is turned off. The pumps and valves are reset. The DI water pump
P03 is switched off.
5 Perform ISE MANT for 10 times to discharge the waste in the ISE pipe to the reagent
pack. Then, perform PUGA instruction once. (Skip this step if the instrument is
stopped, and this step is required only when the optional ISE module is equipped.)
6 The database is shut down. If the operation fails, the system gives a warning, and
continues the shutdown after confirmation.
7 The system exits.
2.1.9 Sleep Procedure

1 The lamp is turned off.
2 The bar code reader motors are turned off if the reagent/sample bar code readers
are configured.
3 The fluidic unit is turned off. The pumps and valves are reset. The DI water pump
P03 is switched off.
4 The instrument enters into Sleep status.
2.1.10 Wakeup Procedure

1 The lamp is turned on and a 4.5min countdown is started. The following operations
continue during the countdown.
2 The bar code reader motors are turned on and laser is turned off, if the
reagent/sample bar code readers are configured.
3 The hydropneumatic unit is initialized.
4 The system of the analyzer is reset.
5 Wash solution circulation pump P03 is switched off.
6 The instrument wakes up to enter the Incubation status.
7 If the lamp has been turned on for 4.5 minutes, the system enters the Standby
status.
2.1.11 Workflow Descriptions

Sequential actions of sample probe in each period (adding sample for biochemistry test)
Wash ->rotate to sample carousel->lower into the sample tube-> aspirate sample -> raise to
“home” position vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction carousel ->
dispense sample -> raise to the specified height for washing -> rotate to wash well -> go to next
period
Sequential actions of sample probe in each period (adding sample for ISE test)
Wash -> rotate to sample carousel -> lower into the sample tube -> aspirate sample -> raise to
“home” position vertically -> rotate to the position above the ISE sample injection port -> lower
into the ISE sample injection port -> dispense sample -> raise to the specified height for
washing -> rotate to wash well -> go to next period

Sequential actions of reagent probe in each period

Rotate to reagent carousel -> lower to reagent bottle -> aspirate R1 -> raise to “home” position
vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction carousel -> dispense R1 ->
raise to the specified height for washing -> rotate to wash well ->wash -> rotate to reagent
carousel -> lower to reagent bottle -> aspirate R2 -> raise to “home” position vertically ->
rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction carousel -> dispense R2 -> raise to the
specified height for washing -> rotate to wash well -> wash -> go to the next period
Sequential actions of mixer assembly in each period

Rotate the reagent mixer to the position above the sample carousel -> lower into the reaction
carousel -> mix the reagent and wash the reagent mixer -> raise to the position above the
reaction carousel -> rotate the sample mixer to the position above the sample carousel -> lower
into the reaction carousel -> mix the sample and wash the reagent mixer raise to the position
above the reaction carousel -> go to the next period
Sequential actions of reaction carousel

The fully-automated chemistry analyzer provides 93 positions for reaction cuvettes; 8.55
seconds for one cycle; one stop after one rotation. In the first clockwise rotation, 25 positions
are rotated. During the first stop, R1 is dispensed and sample and reagent are mixed, and
8-phase wash is performed. In the second rotation, 114 positions are rotated, and photometric
collection is finished. During the second stop, R2 and the sample are dispensed and mixed.
2.1.12 Measuring Points

Figure 2.2 Measuring points for single-/double-reagent test
Stir the
R1 S sampl e R2 Stir R2 Reaction ends
Phase 8 wash
5.8s 82.5s 8.6s 4min35.2s 3.5s 5min1s
4min43.8s 5min4.5s
1min22.5s 9min48.3s
Test Procedure of Double-Reagent Chemistry
Figure 2.3 Measuring points for triple-/quadruple-reagent test

Stir the
R1 S sample R2 Stir R2 R3 Stir R3 R4 Stir R4 Reaction ends
Phase 8 wash Auto wash stops
5.8s 8.6s 4min35.2s 3.5s 1min31.1s 4min35.2s 3.5s 5min1s
1min22.5s 4min43.8s 7min13.4s

6min6.3s 5min4.5s
11min10.8s
Test Procedure of Triple-/Quadruple-Reagent

Chemistry

3 Installation Requirements and Procedure
3.1 Check Before Installation

3.1.1 Installation Environment
 Altitude: -400m to +2,000m.
 The system is for indoor use only.
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be level (with gradient less than 1/200).
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to support at least 450Kg weight.
 The installation site should be well ventilated.
 The installation site should be free of dust.
 The installation side should not be in direct sun.
 The installation site should be kept away from a heat or draft source.
 The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be free of vibration.
 The installation site should be kept away from big noise and power supply
interference.
 Keep the system away from brush-type motors and electrical contact device that is
frequently switched on and off.
 Do not use such devices as mobile phones and radio transmitter near the system.
 Operating temperature: 15°C-30°C with fluctuation < 2°C/H.
 Relative humidity: 35%-85%, without condensation.
 Provide air conditioning equipment if the room temperature does not meet the
requirements.
 Install the equipment near a sewer for convenient discharging of waste liquid.
 Dimensions before packing: 990mm(length)×710mm(depth)×1135mm(height)
 Dimensions after packing: 1330mm(length)×935mm(depth)×1360mm(height)
3-1
3Installation Requirements and Procedure
3.1.2 Configuration Check

 Fully-automated chemistry analyzer
 Packing list of accessory kit
 Packing list of ISE accessory kit (for ISE module only)
 Optional modules (water supply module, for international customers)
3.2 Installation Requirements

3.2.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation
Figure 3.1 System clearance
Wall
Min.: 500
Max.: 3000
Min.: 500
Operation Unit
710
Analyzing unit
Front
side
Min.: 500
990
Min.: 500 Unit: mm
3.2.2 Power Supply and Noise

 Power supply: 220V: 220-240V- 50Hz, 220/230V- 60Hz; 110V: 110/115V- 60Hz.
Voltage fluctuation: +/-10%. Line frequency: +/-3Hz. Three-wire power cord with
good grounding performance (ground voltage ≤ 5V).
 The instrument (exclusive of analyzer, external vacuum pump, water supply module,
and water drainage module) should be powered by a properly-grounded power
supply no less than 3000VA, and the mains socket used to connect the instrument
should have its load no less than 10A.
 Keep the instrument away from the mains socket within 2.5m.
 If you are going to use a UPS to power the instrument, make sure that the UPS can
provide power supply greater than or equal to 3000VA/2100W.
WARNING:
Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Incorrect grounding may lead to
electric shock or equipment damage.
Measurement of ground voltage:
Set the multimeter to the AC 250V scale, connect the black probe to the earth wire
and the red probe to the live wire and neutral wire. If grounding is proper, the
voltage between earth wire and neutral wire should be less than 5V, and the voltage
between earth wire and live wire should be similar to that between live wire and
neutral wire.
Check if the power socket output voltage meets the specified requirements and has
a proper fuse installed.
3.2.3 Water Supply and Drainage

 Water quality: meeting requirements of CLSI type II with specific resistance no less
than 1 (MΩ.cm@25°C) and silicate less than 0.1mg/L.
3-2
 Water supply pressure: 100~392kPa. Use a water supply module if the water unit
does not meet the requirements of water supply pressure.
 Flow: no less than 38L/H for continuous flow, and no less than 2L/M for transient
peak flow.
 Water temperature: 5-32°C.
 When the instrument uses water supplied by a water unit:
 Make sure that the tube between the water unit outlet and the instrument inlet
is no longer than 10 m.
 The water tube provided by the instrument is ID4mm×OD6mm PU tube, which
should be installed by the water unit supplier.
 When the instrument uses water supplied by a water supply module(optional):
 Lay the water supply module between the deionized water tank (with cap) and
the instrument.
 Make sure that the tube between the deionized water tank (with cap) and the
instrument inlet is no longer than 10m.
 Choose a deionized water tank (with cap) with capacity of 80-120L.
 Lay the water supply module on the ground.
 To discharge low-concentration waste to the sewer:
 Low-concentration waste tube is shorter than 5m.
 The low-concentration waste outlet should be no less than 50mm wide.
 Make sure that the low-concentration waste outlet is no higher than 100mm.
Biohazard:
Dispose of liquid waste according to the local regulations.
CAUTION
The supplied water must meet the requirements of CLSI type II; otherwise, insufficiently purified water may
result in misleading test results.
The drainage module must be placed on the ground, otherwise low-concentration waste may overflow.
3.3 Computer Configuration (for International Customers)

3.3.1 CPU
At least P4 2.6GHz, dual core
3.3.2 Memory
At least 2GB for each RAM
3.3.3 Network Adapter

The computer is connected to the analyzer through a network adapter. If you are going to
connect the computer with the LIS or Internet, you should prepare another network adapter
(Intel gigabit network adapter)
3.3.4 Serial Port

The computer should provide an RS232 serial port, which is used to connect it with the
analyzer.

3.3.5 Hard Drive Partition

Install the operating system in the C drive and the operating software of the instrument in the
D drive. Make sure that the C drive is over 30GB and D drive over 100GB, and the disk file
system is of NTFS format. Deselect the two options at the bottom of the disk properties
window: “Compress drive to save disk space” and “Allow Indexing Service to index this disk for
fast file searching”.
Figure 3.2 Requirements for hard drive partition
Operating system
Microsoft Window 8 (64 bit)
By default, the user account used for logging in to the system must be an account in the
Administrator group with relevant rights.
Application software
Except for the operating system, other application software must not be installed or reserved
on the computer. If anti-virus application has been installed, remove the automatic scheduled
scanning and add BS-430 and BSLOG to the trust list.
3.3.6 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby

To remove the screen saver and system standby, select None in the Screen saver pull-down list
box of the Screen Saver Settings window, and then select Change power settings -> Change plan
settings to go to the Edit plan settings window. Perform the settings as shown in the figures
below.
3-4
Figure 3.3 Remove screen saver
Figure 3.4 Standby settings 1
Select Never in the Turn off the display and Put the computer to sleep pull-down list boxes.
Figure 3.5 Standby settings 2
3.3.7 Screen Display Properties

Set the screen resolution as 1280×1024 pixels and color quality as Highest (32 bit).
Disable automatic synchronization with Internet time server

Double click the time icon on the lower-right corner of the task bar. The Date and Time window
is displayed.

Figure 3.6 Disable automatic synchronization with Internet time server - 1
Select the Internet Time tab page, and deselect the Synchronize with an Internet time server
option.
Figure 3.7 Disable automatic synchronization with Internet time server - 2
Turn off automatic updates

Turn off the automatic updates on the Windows Update window.
3-6
Figure 3.8 Turn off automatic updates
3.4 Installation Procedure

3.4.1 Unpacking
1 Before unpacking, check the packing list and see if the following items are included:
chemistry analyzer, accessory kit, high-concentration waste tank, wash solution, ISE
module (accessory kit, optional), and water supply module (optional for
international customers).
2 The chemistry analyzer is about 300kg. Unload it from the truck with a forklift.
3 Use an adjustable wrench to loosen the retaining screws on the upper cover and
slope cover of the package, remove the two covers and keep 2.3m space in front of
the slope cover (1.3m for the slope cover and 1m for the instrument).
Figure 3.9 Remove the screws on the upper cover and slope cover of the package
Figure 3.10 Remove a side cover from the package

4 Unscrew the anchors, and keep the four roller wheels from contacting the mounting
plates. Use an adjustable wrench to remove the four stationary barriers of the
analyzer and all screws on the steel angles, and then remove the steel angles and
screw up the anchors.
Figure 3.11 Screw down the anchors and tighten them to support the analyzer
Figure 3.12 Remove the mounting plate and screw up the anchors carefully
5 A slope cover is fixed on the side cover. Loosen the two screws on the slope cover to
remove it.
Figure 3.13 Remove the slope cover
6 Fix the slope cover in proper direction on the bottom cover, and push the analyzer
along the slope cover to the ground. Store all of the wooden boards and retaining
screws properly so that they can be used when the instrument is transported.
3-8
Figure 3.14 Align the slope cover with the analyzer
7 After removing the analyzer from the package, screw down the four anchor screws,
lift the roller wheels slightly from the ground and make sure all the four anchors
steadily support the analyzer.
3.4.2 Installation
Taking out sample probe and reagent probes
Remove the packaging material and plastics on the analyzer panels. Take out the sample probe
and reagent probe from the accessory kit and insert them into the corresponding metal
connectors. Note not to forget the white washers in the package.
Figure 3.15 Install white washer

Installing probes
Figure 3.16 Installation procedure of probes
Keep the
washer
Washer
steady
Retaining screw and

spring Earthing
wire
Fluid level
sense board
connector
1 Before installing the probe, remove the probe arm cover, loosen the screws on the
probe arm cover, and lift the probe upwards.
2 Insert the probe downwards into the hole on the probe arm while aligning the
screw hole on the probe plate to the rod inside the arm.
3 Install the washer in the tube connector. To replace the washer, remove the old one
from the tube connector and install the new one. Connect the tube connector to the
probe and then tighten it.
4 Fix the earthing wire of the probe to the earthing terminal inside the arm; connect
the probe connector to the liquid level detection board.
5 Sleeve the spring on the rod and tighten the retaining screw. Pay attention to the
spring direction and make the thread opening face downwards.
6 Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Push the probe upwards and then
release it to check if the spring works well. If it does, proceed to the next step. If not,
check if the spring is clamped or fixed too tightly.
7 After installation, power on the analyzer, and check if the No.D2 LED indicator on
the circuit board inside the probe arm is lit. If it is, it indicates that the level
detection system works normally.
8 Install the arm cover, and tighten the screws on it.
9 Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Push the probe upwards and then
release it to check if the spring works well. If it does, proceed to the next step. It not,
it indicates that the arm cover is not installed correctly. Reinstall the arm cover and
check the spring until it can move freely.
3-10
Installing mixers
1 Take out the mixer from the accessory kit and lift the mixer arm to the vertical
extreme position.
Figure 3.17 Take out mixers
2 Screw the mixer into the large hole of the retaining screw till it is level with the
small hole end.
Figure 3.18 Mixer
3 Insert the mixer motor shaft into the mounting hole and make sure they contact
closely and there is no gap in the vertical direction.
Figure 3.19 Install the mixer
4 Tighten the retaining screw of the mixer clockwise and check whether the mixer is
perpendicular. If not, reinstall the mixer.

Figure 3.20 Tighten the retaining nut and check if the mixer is vertical
5 Tighten the mixer by using the mixer wrenches in the accessory kit. Use even force
to avoid bending the mixer motor shaft.
Figure 3.21 Tighten the mixer by using the mixer wrenches
3.4.3 Fluidic Connection

Connecting BS-430 with water unit
Figure 3.22 Connect BS-430 with water unit
Analyzer
Deionized water
inlet
4 7
Water unit
3 6
2 5
Water inlet
filter
3-12
The water tube provided with the instrument is ID4mm OD6mm PU tube, which should be
installed by the water unit supplier, as shown in the above figure.
Requirements for connecting the BS-430 and the water unit:
1 Use the PU tube in the accessory kit to connect the analyzer with the water unit.
Install the water inlet filter between the water unit outlet and the analyzer inlet and
make sure that the filter will not be influenced by external force and can be replaced
conveniently.
2 Make sure that the arrow on the filter shell that indicates the water flow points at
the analyzer inlet.
3 Ensure that the water inlet tube between the water unit and the analyzer is less
than 10m long. When installing the tube, prevent it from being bent, twisted, or
pressed, and keep it away from any sharp-edged objects or others that may scratch
the tube.
4 If the tube is not installed correctly, remove it from the water unit and the analyzer,
cut off the part that has contacted the connectors, and then reinstall the tube
properly.
Connecting analyzer with water supply module (optional)

Figure 3.23 Connect the BS-430 and the water supply module
Analyzer
DI water
tank
Deionized water
inlet
4 7
3 6
2 5
8 — Air vent of water supply
1 module
9 — Water inlet of water supply

Water inlet 8 9 10 module
filter
10 — Water outlet of water
supply module
Water supply
module
Requirements for connecting the BS-430 and the water supply module:
1 Use the PU tube in the accessory kit to connect the analyzer with the water supply
module. Install the water supply module between the deionized water tank and the
analyzer inlet. Install the water inlet filter between the water supply module outlet
and the analyzer inlet, and make sure that the filter will not be influenced by
external force and is convenient for replacement.
2 Install the water supply module filter at the end of the inlet tube and then place the
tube at the bottom of the deionized water tank.
3 Make sure that the arrow on the filter shell that indicates the water flow points at
the analyzer inlet.
4 Ensure that the water inlet tube between the deionized water tank and the analyzer
is less than 10m long. When installing the tube, prevent it from being bent, twisted,
or pressed, and keep it away from any sharp-edged objects or others that may
scratch the tube.
5 Connect the air vent of the water supply module to the sewer and keep the tube less
than 10m long.
6 If the tube is not installed correctly, remove it from the water unit and the analyzer,
cut off the part that has contacted the connectors, and then reinstall the tube
properly.

Connecting analyzer with wash solution facilities

Figure 3.24 Wash solution facilities connection of BS-430
Analyzer
4 7 Wash solution sensor
3 6
2 5
Diluted wash solution tank
Requirements for connecting wash solution facilities of the BS-430:
1 To prevent leaks, fix all tubes and connectors properly with the tube clamps in the
accessory kit.
2 When installing the tubes, prevent them from being bent, twisted, or pressed, and
keep them away from any sharp-edged objects or others that may scratch the tubes.
3 Ensure that all electric connectors are higher than and away from fluidic parts and
prevent fluidic connectors from facing electric components.
Connecting analyzer with waste drainage facilities

Figure 3.25 Connect BS-430 with waste drainage facilities
Analyzer
High-concentration waste
sensor
4 7
High-concentration
waste
Max.: 100mm
3 6
2 5
1
Low-concentration
waste
High-concentration
waste tank
Drain hole
Requirements for connecting waste drainage facilities of the BS-430:

1 Lay the high-/low-concentration waste tubes separately.
2 Connect the high-concentration waste tube and sensor (high-concentration waste
tank cap assembly) to the high-concentration waste tank.
3 Insert the low-concentration waste tube into the sewer, and make sure that the tube
is less than 5m long.
3-14
4 Make sure that the low-concentration waste outlet is no less than 50mm wide and
less than 100mm high.
5 To prevent leaks, fix all tubes and connectors properly with the tube clamps in the
accessory kit.
6 When installing the tubes, prevent them from being bent, twisted, or pressed, and
keep them away from any sharp-edged objects or others that may scratch the tubes.
7 Ensure that all electric connectors are higher than and away from fluidic parts and
prevent fluidic connectors from facing electric components.
3.4.4 Connection of Analyzer

1 Dilute the concentrated wash solution 10 times and fill the wash solution tank with
the diluted wash solution.
2 If you are using an UPS, install it and make it properly grounded.
3 Connect the analyzer, computer, printer, monitor, water unit (or water supply
module), power cord and data cable. Do not switch on the power before finishing all
connections.
4 Connect the computer with the analyzer through the serial port (choose the port
COM1 for the computer).
3.4.5 Starting up the System

1 Turn on the power switch of the water unit or the water supply module (optional)
and the water drainage module(optional).
2 Turn on the analyzing unit power switch and the main power switch. The water
inlet valve in the back of the analyzer is turned on automatically to supply water for
the water tank. In normal conditions, the water tank can be filled full in 20-30
minutes.
3 Start the computer. The operating software is run automatically when the Windows
is started. You are also allowed to run the operating software by selecting the
shortcut icon on the desktop or in the Start menu. Enter the username and
password: "ServiceUser" and "#BS8A#SEU", as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3.26 Startup screen

Figure 3.27 Login screen
4 When the main screen is shown, select Utility -> System Setup -> Factory Settings.
On Optional Modules, select Enable/Disable ISE, Enable/Disable Sample Carousel
Bar Code, Enable/Disable Reagent Bar Code and Probe clog detection, and then click
OK to save settings. See the figure below:
Figure 3.28 Optional window
5 Perform fluidic prime as instructed by 3.4.6Fluidic Prime.
3.4.6 Fluidic Prime

1 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Hydro Unit. The screen is displayed as
follows.
3-16
Figure 3.29 Hydro Unit screen
2 Select 4 Fluidic Prime to display the following window. The check of solenoid valves,
fluid level floaters, pumps, and syringes has been finished by default. Select
Continue to proceed to the next step.
Figure 3.30 Fluidic Prime alignment procedure
3 Select Continue and then select Start to prime the water tank. When the priming is
finished, select OK.

Figure 3.31 Water Tank Prime window
4 Select Continue to perform the Clean and Prime Probe Exterior procedure. The DI
water pump P03 is turned on during the process. Observe the water pressure gauge
and make sure that the water supply pressure is within 15-24kPa. Check if cleaning
fluid can spray out continuously from the wash wells without air bubbles. Select OK
and then select Continue to go to the next step.
Figure 3.32 Clean and Prime Probe Exterior
3-18
5 Follow the screen instructions, remove the cuvette wash station and put it in an
opening container. (This step is important, otherwise cuvette 5 may overflow.)
Select Continue and Start to perform the phase 1-2 probe priming. When the wash
probes for Phase 1-2 can spray out wash solution continuously without air bubbles,
select Stop to exit.
Figure 3.33 Prime Wash Station
6 Select Continue to prime the wash probes of phase 3, 4, 5 and 6 under the 60s
countdown. Check the dispense probes of phase 3, 4, 5 and 6 till they spray clear
water continuously without bubbles. After 60s, check if they stop spraying water in
sequence. Select Continue to go to the next step.

Figure 3.34 Countdown for priming wash station
7 Follow the screen instructions to lift the wash probes from the fluid level. Select
Continue, and touch the wash probes to feel suction force.
Figure 3.35 Determination of cuvette wash station suction force
8 Reinstall the cuvette wash station in step 8.
3-20
9 Loosen the retaining screws and sample/reagent syringes. Select Continue to prime
the probe interior. Check if the cleaning liquid is sprayed out straightly from the
probes. Pull and push the 2 syringe plungers until there are no air bubbles in the
syringe and T pieces. Install the sample syringe and make the V-shape slot level to
scale 7.5. In the same way, remove air from the reagent syringes, install the reagent
syringes and make the V-shape slot level to scale 15. Select OK to exit.
Figure 3.36 Probe Wash Priming
10 The system is homed for 3 times in Step 10. There should be no failure alarms, and
the containers and pressure gauges in correct status as indicated in the following
figure.
Figure 3.37 Container status and pressure gauges

11 The fluidic prime is finished.
3.4.7 Initial Maintenance Record

Exit the Alignment screen and enter the Maintenance screen. Confirm all scheduled
maintenance procedures and set up start time for them. The maintenance frequencies include
Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Three-Month, Six-Month, and Other. Select the Select All button on each
maintenance frequency tab page, and then select OK. The current date and time appears in the
Date Performed column of each maintenance procedure as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3.38 Scheduled Maintenance screen
3.4.8 Startup Initialization

After priming, exit the operating software and restart the computer. Then, open the operating
software again to check the version related information. Enter the username (Admin) and
password (Admin) to log in to the system and start the initialization procedure, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 3.39 Login screen
3-22
When the main screen is shown, select Reagent -> Reagent/Calibration, and then load diluted
wash solution and ISE buffer by selecting the Load button.
Figure 3.40 ISE Reagent/Calibration screen
3.4.9 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters of Mindray Reagents

1 Select Utility -> Chemistries -> Config, and select Options to display the Option
window. Select Import to display the Import window.
Figure 3.41 Entering the Import screen

2 Select Load Default to display all Mindray reagent chemistries in the left column.
Select Add All to add all chemistries to the right column. Select Exit to close the
window.
Figure 3.42 Import screen
3 All Mindray reagent chemistries are displayed in the Available Chemistries column.
You can delete chemistries that will not be used in your laboratory.
4 Select OK to complete the chemistry configuration.
Figure 3.43 Complete chemistry configuration
3-24
3.4.10 System Performance Test

Water test
1 Perform following checks during water test:
All components' mechanical movement is correct without abnormal alarms (of

optics, temperature control, mechanics, communication, etc.).
Probes are washed normally without hanging liquid.
When lowering to cuvette bottom, the wash station is lifted (except for the phase-6
probe).
The reaction curve of all samples has no periodical fluctuation or sharp jumps, and
the absolute value of test results is no greater than 10.
2 Define a chemistry.
Define a double-reagent chemistry “Water” with the following parameters: Kinetic,

increased reaction, primary wave 340nm, secondary wave 412nm, unit U/L,
decimal 0.01, reaction time 24-33, sample volume 5, R1 100 and R2 10.
3 On the Calibration Setup window, select the chemistry "Water", specify the K factor
math model with K factor 10000, select Save and exit the window.
4 Load the reagent.
5 Preparation for analysis is as follows:
 Load deionized water as R1 and R2 (each more than 15ml).
 Place deionized water as two samples (each more than 2ml).
 Place concentrated wash solution in position D of the reagent carousel and in position
D2 of the sample carousel.
NOTE:
Wear gloves when loading the wash solution.
6 Start testing.
Program two samples with the chemistry "Water", each with 65 replicates. Start the
test and observe the working status of the parts. If an alarm is given, troubleshoot
the error.
3.5 Stop Use

3.5.1 Stop Use for Short Term
When to do
Stop use for short term (within 3 days)
How to do
1 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Hydro Unit.

2 Follow the software prompts to drain the tubes.
3 In case that the ISE module is configured, select Utility -> Maintenance > ISE Unit.
Follow the software prompts to drain the pipes of ISE module. Then, disconnect the
ISE electrode, use a pipette to dispense proper amount of calibrator A to the Na, K
and Cl electrode pipes of the ISE (to the extent that the pipes are filled with
calibrator A). Then, seal the electrode pipes with tape. For the Ref electrode, put the
hose through the pipe.

4 Exit the software, turn off the computer, and turn off the analyzing unit.
5 If the analyzer is to be stored in another place, disconnect the data cables and
power cords among the analyzing unit, computer, monitor, and water unit (or water
supply module), and disconnect the tubes in the back of the analyzer following the
reversed order in section 3.4.3.
3.5.2 Stop Use for Long Term

When to do
Stop use for long term (more than 3 days or for several years)
How to do
1 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Hydro Unit.
2 Follow the software prompts to drain the tubes.
3 In case that the ISE module is configured, select Utility -> Maintenance > ISE Unit.
Follow the software prompts to drain the pipes of ISE module. Then, disconnect the
ISE electrode, use a pipette to dispense proper amount of calibrator A to the Na, K
and Cl electrode pipes of the ISE (to the extent that the pipes are filled with
calibrator A). Then, seal the electrode pipes with tape. For the Ref electrode, put the
hose through the pipe.
4 Exit the software, turn off the computer, and turn off the analyzing unit.
5 Follow the reserved order in 3.4.4 Connection of Analyzer to disconnect the
analyzer. Then, follow the reserved order in section 3.4.3 to disconnect the pipe
connection at the rear end of the analyzing unit.
6 Follow the reserved order in 3.4.2Installation to restore the instrument to its
original status, and put the probe and relevant parts back to the accessory kit.
7 Follow the reversed order in 3.4.1Unpacking to pack the analyzer, and put the water
supply module and drainage module into the packages for storing.
3-26
4 Software Introduction
4.1 Software Installation

4.1.1 Introduction of Installation Package
The installation package of the operating software contains three folders: Setup, SetupGuide,
and Thirdparty.
Figure 4.1 Folders in operating software installation package
Setup folder: includes the operating software installation file setup.exe and the KillBsLog tool
that can end the Bslog service.
Figure 4.2 Setup folder
KillBslog: a service that runs automatically when the operating software is started, and used
to record the logs of the software. When started, the software checks if the service is started,
and if it is not started, the software gives an alarm indicating startup failure. When logging on
the software, you are allowed to end this process, and this action will not be recorded in the
logs.
SetupGuide folder: includes the software installation and upgrading guides.
4-1
4Software Introduction
Thirdparty folder: includes dotnetfx and SQLExp installation packages. The former contains
the installation program of Microsoft .net Framework and is the running environment
assembly of SQL; while the latter is database software.
4.1.2 Folder Structure

The default installation path of the operating software is: D:\Mindray\BA43.
After installation, the folder structure is like the following:
Figure 4.3 BA43 folder
The OperationSoft folder is relatively important and expanded as follows:

Figure 4.4 OperationSoft folder
Important folders include:

 AbsData: stores reaction curve files.
 AlarmFile: stores alarm log messages.
 Database: database file, which contains all parameters, test results, calibration and
QC data, etc.
 ExceptionLog: records address segment for error analysis when the software
collapses abnormally. (Note: There are two ExceptLog files, and the other one is in
Instrument_1 folder.)
4-2
4 Software Introduction
 Help: online help in .chm format.

 Instrument_1: log file of the analyzer.
 Item: Mindray's chemistry parameter file.
 LOG: records software upgrading information. (last upgrading information record)
 Logs: RMS (Remote Management System) logs. Not used temporarily.
 Workstation.exe: shortcut of the BS-430 program.
4.1.3 Log Files

The BsLog process records in real-time mode the communication and action information of the
software and analyzer, which includes but not limited to the following:
 Keyboard input
 Error log, operation log and maintenance log of the software
 Communication instructions between the PC and analyzer
 Action instructions of the analyzer
 Floater and photocoupler statuses of the analyzer (real-time)
 Pump and valve powering statuses of the analyzer (real-time)
 Photoelectric data (real-time)
 ……
Separate log files are produced every day and stored in the following addresses:
1 In the WorkstationLOG folder of D:\Mindray\BA43\OperationSoft.

2 In the InstrumentLOG folder of D:\Mindray\BA43\OperationSoft\Instrument_1.
The folder structure is shown below:

Figure 4.5 InstrumentLOG folder
Important folders include:

 InstrService: water blank data.
4Software Introduction
 Lislog: LIS communication data.

 RPC: (short form of Remote Procedure Call) basic control command data.
 ISEAdapterSrv: ISE command and test data.
4.1.4 Normal Startup Procedure

The normal startup procedure of the operating software is as follows:
1 The system checks if the Bslog process has been started automatically. If not, the
Bslog.exe program is run.
2 Sqlserver is started, and it will exit if an error indicating database initialization
failure occurs.
3 The software process is started.
4 Enter the username and password.
5 The software shakes hands with the middle-/lower-layer units. (If handshake fails,
an alarm is given prompting the unit is abnormal.)
4.2 Software Upgrading

Refer to the upgrading guide in the SetupGuide folder.
Note: After upgrading the software, switch off the main power and switch it on again.
4.3 Software Uninstallation

4.3.1 Uninstalling BS-410/BS-410E/BS-410S/BS-430/BS-450/BS-460/BS-470/BS-470E
Software
1 End the BSlog process by using the KillBslog tool in the installation package.
2 Find the Workstation program on the Control Panel window and uninstall it.
4.3.2 Uninstalling SQL Database

Find the SQL Server program on the Control Panel window and uninstall it.
4-4
5 Modules and Units
5.1 Shell Assembly

5.1.1 Module Functions
The shells assembly indicates the apparent structures of the whole analyzer and is designed for
protecting the internal assemblies. It provides interfaces for each module, and is also a
representation of industrial design.
5.1.2 Component Locations and FRU Details

The shells assembly consists of the shielding cover, desk panel, left and right side cover
assemblies, left and right door assemblies, and rear panel.
Figure 5.1 Front view of the shells assembly
Middle panel assembly Right side panel

Left panel
Shielding cover Right panel assembly

assembly
ISE port plug for panel
Air spring
Screw plug for panel
Sample carousel cover

Shielding cover hinge
assembly
Reaction carousel Front

cover assembly cover
Upper hinge of
Reagent carousel cover right door
assembly
Left panel assembly

Front right door
assembly
Upper hinge of left
door
Rubber
cover
Front left door assembly
5-1
5Modules and Units
Figure 5.2 Rear view of the shells assembly
Rear
upper
Rear cover weldment panel
of light source
assembly
Rear
panel 2
Rear
panel 1
Table 5.1 List of materials

SN FRU No. or Part No. Part Name Remarks
1 043-006840-00 Left panel FRU
2 043-006841-00 Middle panel assembly FRU
3 043-006842-00 Right side panel FRU
4 115-037193-00 Left panel assembly FRU
5 115-037194-00 Right panel assembly FRU
6 042-017477-00 Rear upper panel FRU
7 801-BA40-00070-00 Air spring, YQ8/18-90-272 (B-B) FRU
-180N
8 BA38-20-87976 Upper hinge of left door FRU
9 BA38-20-88237 Upper hinge of right door FRU
10 BA38-30-88119 Front left door assembly FRU
11 BA38-30-88120 Front right door assembly FRU

12 042-017412-00 Rear panel 1 FRU
13 115-022017-00 Rear panel 2 FRU
14 042-004716-00 Light source assembly rear cover FRU
weldment
15 BA40-20-72907 Rubber plug for panel (Mould MR72907) FRU
16 BA40-20-72908 ISE port plug for panel (Mould MR72908) FRU
17 BA30-20-06741 Rubber cap (Mould 8692) FRU
18 BA40-30-61956 Shielding cover hinge FRU
19 043-007060-00 BS460 front cover FRU/Optional
20 115-036555-00 Reagent carousel cover assembly FRU/Optional
(BS-460)
21 115-036558-00 Sample carousel cover assembly FRU/Optional
(BS-460)
22 115-036556-00 Reaction carousel cover assembly FRU/Optional
(BS-460)
23 BA38-30-88121 Shielding cover assembly (BS-460) FRU/Optional
5-2
5 Modules and Units

25 115-036348-00 Reagent carousel cover assembly FRU/Optional
(BS-430)
26 115-036557-00 Sample carousel cover assembly FRU/Optional
(BS-430)
27 115-036349-00 Reaction carousel cover assembly FRU/Optional
(BS-430)
28 115-036553-00 Shielding cover assembly (BS-430) FRU/Optional
30 115-036554-00 Shielding cover assembly (BS-450) FRU/Optional
5.1.3 Removing Shielding Cover Assembly and Replacing the Hinges

When to do
Replace the shielding cover assembly when it is damaged.
Replace the hinges when they are working improperly or cannot work.
Tools
Cross screwdriver and flathead screwdriver
How to do
1 Switch off the main power of the analyzer to ensure all moving assemblies are not in
working status.
2 Open the shielding cover, and use a flathead screwdriver to push outwards the cir
clip on the air spring head to the degree that it will be dropped.
3 Hold the shielding cover with one hand and remove the air spring with another
hand.
4 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the M4×10 powder screws on the hinge of the
shielding cover, and then remove the shielding cover assembly.
5 To replace the hinges, remove the retaining screws after removing the shielding
cover assembly, and then replace the hinges.
6 To restore the shielding cover assembly, follow the steps mentioned above in the
reversed order.
Alignment and confirmation
After restoring the shielding cover assembly, check the gap with the panels, and if the gap is
uneven or the shielding cover interferes with the panels, adjust the hinges.
Warning
When removing the air spring, hold the shielding cover in case it drops to hurt people and damage the
intrument.
5.1.4 Replacing Air Spring

When to do
Replace the air spring if it loses elasticity or fails.
Tools
Flathead screwdriver

5Modules and Units
How to do
1 Open the shielding cover, and use a flathead screwdriver to push outwards the cir
clip on two ends of the air spring to the degree that it will not be dropped.
2 Hold the shielding cover with one hand and remove the air spring with another
hand.
3 Install a new air spring.
4 If the two air springsneed replacement, change one first and then change the other.

No
5.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Left and Right Panels

When to do
Remove left and right panels if the main unit PCB or the components on two sides of the
instrument need maintenance and repairing.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
How to do
1 Remove the rubber caps on the left (right) side panel assembly.
2 Remove the retaining screws on the left (right) side panel assembly.
3 Hold the upper rim of the left (right) side panel assembly and slightly lift the left
(right) side panel assembly to remove it.
4 To reinstall the left (right) side panel assembly, follow the steps mentioned above in
the reversed order.
The two screw holes at the bottom of the side plates should be aligned.
5.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Panels

When to do
Remove panels when they need to be replaced or the parts below them need to be maintained
or repaired. (Note: Panels include the left panel, middle panel, and right panel.)
Tools
Cross screwdriver
How to do
1 Remove the right panel assembly.

2 Unscrew the three screws on the rear upper panel and remove the rear upper panel.
3 Remove the rubber plug from the panel.
4 Remove the retaining screws on the panel.
5 Remove the panel carefully and avoid contact with the probe.
6 To reinstall the desk panel, follow the steps mentioned above in a reversed order.

Do not fasten the screws during panel installation. After the gap is properly adjusted, fasten the
screws.
5-4
5 Modules and Units
5.1.7 Removing and Reinstalling Front Cover

When to do
Remove the front cover if it is damaged and needs to be replaced, or the components inside the
analyzer need maintenance or repairing.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
How to do
1 Remove the rubber plugs of the three screws on the top of the front panel, and
loosen the three screws to the degree that they will not be dropped.
2 Open the front door, loosen the four retaining screws in the front of the front desk
panel, and then remove the panel.
3 To reinstall the front desk panel, follow the steps mentioned above in the reversed
order.
If the gap between the front desk panel and the desk panel is improper, adjust the three screw
holes at the top of the front desk panel.
5.1.8 Replacing Left/Right Front Door Assemblies and Hinges

When to do
Replace the left/right front door assemblies and hinges when they are seriously deformed
under abnormal external force.
Tools
Hexagon wrench and cross screwdriver
How to do
1 Open the left (right) front door.

2 Remove the retaining screws on the left (right) front panel assembly, and remove
the left (right) front panel assembly.
3 Unscrew the three M4×10 hexagon screws on the lower hinge to remove the lower
hinge.
4 Unscrew the three M4×10 hexagon screws on the upper hinge to remove the left
(right) front door assembly and the upper hinge.
5 Replace the desired parts, and install the left (right) front door assembly and hinges
in the reversed order.
Figure 5.3 Replacing left/right front doors and hinges
Upper hinge
Upper hinge
Front right door
Front left d oor assembly
assembly Front right door
Front left d oor panel assembly
panel assembly
Lower hin ge
Lower hin ge

5Modules and Units

After replacing the left (right) front door assembly or the hinges, check if the gap between the
left front door and the right front door is even. If not, adjust the upper hinge and the lower
hinge. Open and close the door repeatedly, and check that the door can be locked normally and
no bump is heard during the door closing. After alignment, install back the left (right) front
panel assembly.
5.1.9 Cleaning Fans

When to do
When much dust is accumulated on the fans, or it has been 1 year since the last maintenance.
Maintenance Tools
Cross screwdriver, suction cleaner or hair brush
Procedure:
1 Switch off the analyzing unit power.
2 If the reagent refrigeration fan needs cleaning, remove rear panel 2.
3 If the lamp fan needs cleaning, remove the light source assembly cover.
4 Manually rotate the fan and remove the dust on it.
5 Install the removed panels.
6 Switch on the analyzing unit power.

Check if the fans work normally.
5.2 Frame Assembly

The frame assembly is a basic unit for installing and supporting the components of the
analyzer.
5-6
5 Modules and Units

Figure 5.4 Frame assembly
Dust Screen Dust Screen

Lock catch

1 BA40-20-61599 Dust Screen FRU
2 801-BA40-00064-00 Lock catch FRU
5.2.3 Replacement of Lock Catch

When to do
Replace the lock catch when it is damaged.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
How to do
1 Loosen the three screws on the lock catch assembly, and then remove the lock catch
assembly.
2 Remove the retaining screws on the lock catch, and then remove the lock catch.
3 Install a new lock catch.
4 Install the new lock catch assembly to the original position.

When installing the lock catch, ensure it is aligned completely with the door assembly, and the
two doors must be level and not interfere with each other.

5Modules and Units
5.2.4 Removing and Reinstalling Left and Right Dust Screens

When to do
Replace the left and right dust screens when they are damaged.
Tools
No
How to do
1 Push the dust screen upwards to remove it.

2 Install a new dust screen.

Make sure that the dust screen completely covers the air inlet.
5.3 Reaction Carousel Assembly

The reaction carousel assembly is situated in the middle and rear of the analyzer, including the
reaction carousel body assembly, reaction carousel drive assembly, reaction carousel chamber,
reaction carousel sensor, and reaction carousel motor assembly. It is used to complete various
actions, such as carrying and rotating the reaction cuvette to the specified position, adding
sample/reagent to the cuvette, mixing and washing, together with the sample probe, reagent
probes, mixers and 8-phase wash probes. Meanwhile, it provides a constant temperature for
reaction cuvettes, in which sample-reagent reaction takes place.
Figure 5.5 Front view of the shells assembly
Reaction Carousel
Assembly
5-8
5 Modules and Units

Figure 5.6 Reaction carousel assembly
Sensor assembly
Reaction carousel
motor assembly

1 801-BA38-00024-00 Slip ring FRU
2 Silicone heater, 24V FRU
024-000775-00
55W, circular
3 Temperature protection FRU
801-BA40-00170-00 switch wire (for
reaction carousel)
4 Reaction carousel FRU
801-BA38-00035-00
temperature sensor 1
801-BA38-00036-00
801-BA38-00037-00
051-002415-00 temperature collection
board
8 Heater conversion board FRU
801-BA38-00013-00
of reaction carousel
9 042-017445-00 Metal plate for cuvette FRU
10 115-029875-00 Reaction carousel motor FRU

5Modules and Units

11 Synchronous cog belt, FRU
M6C-020011---
TBN260XL037
12 Correlative optical FRU
coupler wire (S) Coded disk
009-002204-00
sensor/Home
position sensor
5.3.3 Replacing Slip Ring

When to do
Replace the slip ring when it is damaged.
Tools
Cross screwdriver, hexagon wrench and cutting pliers
Exploded view for installation
Figure 5.7 Slip ring
Slip ring driver M3*12

hexagon socket
cap head screw
Slip ring M4*10 cross

pan head screw
Slip ring This is side A.

mounting kit
5-10
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.8 Replace the slip ring

This is the place where the cable connector of the slip
ring connects with the cable connector of the machine.
Warning
The slip ring cable connector is underneath the big bottom plate and the reaction carousel assembly, as shown
in the above figure.
Do not install the slip ring driver close to the slip ring, but lift it from the A side for about 2mm in order to prevent
damaging the slip ring.
Carefully tighten the screws on the slip ring driver. A distorted slip ring driver will damage the slip ring.
How to do
1 Switch off the main power of the whole unit.
2 Open the front shielding cover, loosen the knurled screw on the wash station,
remove the wash station, and store it properly to prevent bending the wash probes.
3 Rotate the reagent probe to the reagent aspiration position and rotate the sample
probe to the sample aspiration position. Rotate the mixer clockwise to the end to
remove the reaction carousel cover. Loosen the M4×8 cross pan head screws on the
rear left panel, and then remove the rear left panel.
4 Manually loosen the two M3 screws on the reaction carousel’s skylight cover to
remove it, and unplug the slip ring from the temperature collection board and the
heater conversion board.
5 Cut off the cable tie, unplug the slip ring connector from the big bottom plate, loosen
the three M4×10 cross pan head screws on the slip ring, and then remove the slip
ring.
6 Unscrew the one M3×12 hexagon socket cap head screw on the driver of the slip
ring to remove it.
7 Install the driver of the slip ring onto the new cables of slip ring using one M3×12
hexagon socket cap head screw. Please lift the driver about 2mm from plane A and
then tighten the screw.

5Modules and Units
8 Fix the new cables of the slip ring to the rotating shaft using the three M4×10 cross
pan head screws with spring washer, and connect the terminals under the bottom
plate of the analyzer.
9 Restore the components in the reversed order.

See 8.12.2 for reaction carousel temperature test.
5.3.4 Replacement of Reaction Carousel Body Cables

When to do
Replace the temperature sensor, heater, protection switch, heater adapter plate or temperature
collection board if the reaction temperature is abnormal.
Tools
Cross screwdriver and hexagon wrench
Figure 5.9 Cables of reaction carousel body assembly
M2.5*8 cross pan head

screw
Lower clamping
device
Heater cable of reaction

carousel
M3*10 hexagon socket cap

head screw
Upper
clamping
device
M3*8 cross Reaction carousel

countersunk temperature sensor 3
head screw
Reaction Anchor ring
carousel
temperature
sensor 2 Reaction carousel
M3*8 cross temperature sensor 1
countersunk head
screw
Temperature protection
switch wire (for
reaction carousel)
Anchor
plate Heater anchor plate
Heater conversion
board
Temperature
collection board
M2.5*8 cross pan head

screw
5-12
5 Modules and Units
NOTE:
Remove the reaction carousel carefully to protect the cuvettes and the top of the carousel’s rotary shaft.
Do not pull the cables during the installation. In particular, pay attention to protect cables of the three sensors.
The exploded view is based on the minimum decomposition of the reaction carousel assembly, and further
decomposition may invalidate its functions.
How to do
2 Open the front shielding cover and remove the auto wash station, and store them
properly to protect the wash probes. Rotate the reagent probe to the reagent
aspiration position and rotate the sample probe to the sample aspiration position.
Rotate the mixer clockwise to the end to remove the reaction carousel cover.
remove it, and unplug the slip ring from the temperature collection board and the
heater conversion board.
4 Remove the four M5×12 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the
reaction carousel body, rotate the mixer clockwise as much as possible and then
remove the reaction carousel body assembly. Take the reaction carousel carefully to
avoid damaging the reaction cuvettes.
Figure 5.10 Reaction carousel body
M5*12 hexagon
socket cap head
screw with spring
and flat washer
5 Remove all reaction cuvettes and store them properly.

6 Place the carousel body with the bottom surface upward and unscrew the two
M3×8 cross countersunk head screws on the anchor plate to remove it. Or, remove
the two M3×8 cross pan head screws on the heater plate to remove it.
7 Loosen the eight M3×8cross countersunk head screws on the anchor ring and then
remove the anchor ring.
8 Loosen the nine M2.5×8 cross pan head screws on the lower clamping device, and
then remove the lower clamping device.
9 Unplug the heater connector from the heater conversion board to remove the
heater.
10 Unscrew the nine M3×10 hexagon socket cap head screws on the upper clamping
device to remove it.

5Modules and Units
11 Unplug the connectors between the three temperature sensors and the temperature
collection board and remove the temperature sensor cable 1, reaction carousel
temperature sensor cable 2 and reaction carousel temperature sensor cable 3.
12 Evenly apply proper amount of KP97 thermal paste on the three new temperature
sensors and insert them into the holes on the reaction carousel body. Remove the
redundant thermal paste around the holes. Ensure that the three temperature
sensors are installed in the correct positions, the sensor cables are inside the cable
slot on the reaction carousel, and the sensor plugs are inserted properly into the
temperature collection board. Write down the serial numbers and the
corresponding parameters of the three sensors which will be used to set the sensor
parameters during the alignment.
13 Unplug the temperature protection switch connector from the heater conversion
board, and then remove the temperature protection switch.
14 Evenly apply proper amount of KP97 thermal paste on the new temperature
protection switch, put the temperature protection switch in the mounting slot, and
insert its connector into the heater conversion board.
15 Install the clamping device, and use nine M3×10 hexagon socket screws to fasten it.
16 Apply proper amount of KP97 thermal paste on the root of the new heater cable,
and place the heater on the upper clamping device with the cable passing through
the slot to the slot on the reaction carousel. Ensure that the heater cable is inside
the slot on the reaction carousel. Then insert the cable connector onto the heater
conversion board.
17 Put the lower clamping device on the heater and secure the lower clamping device
to the upper clamping device with nine M2.5×8 cross pan head screws. When
tightening the screws, push the protruding part of the heater towards the inside of
the upper and lower clamping devices, and tighten the screws diagonally.
18 Press cables of the heater, the temperature protection switch and the three sensors
into the slot of the carousel body, and then install the wire clamping ring onto the
carousel body with eight M3×8 cross countersunk head screws.
19 To replace the temperature collection board or the heater conversion board, first
perform steps 1-6, and then unplug the connectors on the temperature collection
board or the heater conversion board, loosen the M3×8 cross pan head screws,
replace the temperature collection board or the heater conversion board with a new
one, restore the cable connectors, and fix the temperature collection board or the
heater conversion board with M3×8 cross pan head screws.
After replacing the reaction carousel temperature sensor, heater and temperature
protection switch, reconfigure the related sensor parameters on the software and
perform the heat insulation performance test. For sensor parameter configuration,
see 8.12.1; for reaction carousel temperature test, see 8.12; for reaction carousel
temperature curve, see 8.12.2.
5.3.5 Replacement of Cuvette Spring Plate

When to do
If the metal plate has no elasticity and cannot retain a cuvette, then it should be replaced.
Tools
Tweezers and utility knife
5-14
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.11 Spring plate
Cuvette slot Metal plate for

cuvette
NOTE:
The spring plate should be pressed to the bottom.
Edges of the spring plate may have some small burrs. Please be careful during replacement.
How to do
2 Open the shielding cover and remove the auto wash station, and store them
properly to protect the wash probes. Rotate the reagent probe to the reagent
aspiration position and rotate the sample probe to the sample aspiration position.
Rotate the mixer clockwise to the end to remove the reaction carousel cover
assembly.
remove it, and unplug the slip ring from the reaction carousel temperature
collection board and the heater conversion board.
4 Unscrew the four M5×12 hexagon socket cap head screws with flat washer on the
reaction carousel assembly, remove the reaction carousel assembly and place it
carefully to avoid damaging the reaction cuvettes.
5 Use tweezers to remove the cuvette of the spring plate as well as the 3 cuvettes on
its left and right sides, and store them properly.
6 Use a utility knife to pick the spring plate for about 3-5mm and then use tweezers to
take it out. Please note not to scratch the reaction carousel surface with the knife,
and clear the glass fragments, if any.
7 Press a new spring plate into the cuvette slot in the correct direction.

Ensure that the cuvettes are pressed to the end.
5.3.6 Replacing Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor

When to do
Replace the reaction carousel home position sensor or the coder sensor when they fail.

5Modules and Units
Tools
Figure 5.12 Reaction carousel sensors
M3*6 cross pan

head screw with Coder sensor
Home position sensor
washer
Mounting plate of
sensor
The sensor is installed

into the threaded hole
on the left side of the
Sensor bracket M3*8 hexagon socket cap bracket M3*6 cross pan head
head screw screw
NOTE:
Install the sensors according to the identifications on the cable connectors and the instrument connectors:
"RCD--PHO-C" for coder sensor and "RCD--PHO-O" for home position sensor.
Do not tighten the sensor screws with excessive torque force, in order to avoid damaging the sensors.
Make sure to install the home position sensor in the correct position.
How to do

2 Loosen the M4×8 cross pan head screws on the rear left panel, and then remove the
rear left panel. Manually loosen the two screws to remove the rear cover of the light
source assembly.
3 Unplug the connectors of the reaction carousel home position sensor and coder
sensor.
4 Loosen the three M3×8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers on the sensor assembly, and then remove the sensor assembly. Pay
attention not to drop the screws into the instrument.
5 Unscrew the two M3×6 cross pan head screws with washers on the sensor’s
mounting plate and remove the coder sensor cable with the sensor.
6 Loosen the two cross pan head screws on the coder sensor, and remove the coder
sensor from the mounting plate.
7 Fix the new coder sensor on the mounting plate using two M3×6 cross pan head
screws.
8 Fix the sensor mounting plate to the bracket with two M3×6 cross pan head screws
with washer. Do not tighten them.
9 Loosen the two M3×6 cross pan head screws on the home position sensor, and then
remove the home position sensor.
10 Fix the new home position sensor onto the sensor bracket using two M3×6 cross
pan head screws.
5-16
5 Modules and Units
11 Fix the sensor assembly on the big bottom plate using three M3×8 hexagon socket
cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Manually rotate the reaction carousel
and check that the zero position stopper of the coder does not interfere with the
zero position sensor. Adjust the sensor mounting plate to keep the coder in the
middle of the coder sensor, and then tighten the screws on the mounting plate.
12 Connect the home position sensor and the coder sensor.
13 After aligning and confirming the sensor assembly, fix the rear left panel to the
frame using M4×8 cross pan head screws.
Note:
When replacing only the coder sensor, skip step 9-10.
When replacing only the reaction carousel home position sensor, skip step 5-8.
After replacing the home position sensor and the coder sensor, adjust the photoelectric signal
collecting position according to 8.3.2; adjust the circumferential position of the sample
carousel and reagent carousel, and the horizontal positions of the sample probe, reagent
probes, sample mixer, reagent mixer, and cuvette wash station, according to 8.4-8.9.
5.3.7 Replacing Reaction Carousel Motor and Synchronous Belt

When to do
Replace the reaction carousel motor or synchronous belt when they are damaged.
Tools
Figure 5.13 Reaction carousel motor assembly
M4*10 hexagon
socket cap head
screw with spring
washer
SST59D5300 motor
(maintenance parts,
including belt
pulley)
Motor damping
washer
M5*12 hexagon
socket cap head
screw with spring
and flat washer

5Modules and Units
Warning
During removing and installation, avoid dropping screws and washers into the analyzer.
Do not remove the two screws on the damping washer.
How to do
Replace the motor:
2 Remove the reaction carousel body assembly according to 5.3.4.
3 Remove the sample and reagent carousel cover assemblies, the front desk panel, the
middle panel assembly, the right panel, the light source assembly rear cover, and the
rear left panel.
4 Disconnect the motor cable, unscrew the 4 M5×12 cylindrical head socket head
screws with spring flat washer on the reaction carousel motor assembly, remove the
motor assembly and avoid dropping screws into the analyzer.
5 Loosen the two M4×10 hexagon socket head screws with spring washer on the
motor, and then remove the motor together with the belt wheel.
6 Fix a new 3-carousel motor assembly on the damping board using two M4×10
hexagon socket head screws with spring washer. Make sure that the interface
direction of the motor is away from the reaction carousel.
7 Fix the motor assembly to the large bottom plate using four M5×12 cylindrical head
socket head screws with spring flat washer. Tighten the belt and screws and connect
the cable of the motor.
To replace the synchronous belt:
2 Remove the reaction carousel body assembly according to 5.3.4.
3 Remove the sample and reagent carousel cover assemblies, the front desk panel, the
middle panel assembly, the right panel, the light source assembly rear cover, and the
rear left panel.
4 Replace the old synchronous belt with new one.

N/A
5.4 Reagent Carousel Assembly

The reagent carousel assembly is situated at the left front of the analyzer, including the reagent
carousel body assembly, reagent chamber, drive assembly and the reagent bar code reader. It is
used to complete various actions, such as carrying and rotating the reagent bottle to the
specified position, add samples together with sample addition assembly. It provides a
refrigerating environment, and the reagents stored in such environment can be kept stable
with little volatilization.
5-18
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.14 Locations of components on the instrument
Reagent Carousel
Assembly

Figure 5.15 Reagent carousel assembly
Reagent
refrigeration
assembly
Reagent carousel Reagent bar code

Sensor assembly
body assembly reader

5Modules and Units
2-carousel motor assembly

1 115-036494-00 Reagent refrigeration FRU
assembly
2 009-002204-00 Correlative optical FRU / Home position or
coupler wire (S) coder sensor
3 BA40-21-61655 Semi-conductive Peltier FRU / Peltier
cable
4 801-BA38-00022-00 2-carousel motor FRU/Reagent carousel
assembly motor (with pulley)
5 115-036347-00 Reagent carousel body FRU
assembly
6 801-BA40-00210-00 Fan, 24V 91.8CFM FRU / Refrigerating fan
120×120×38mm 300mm,
with alarm
7 801-BA30-00088-00 Sensor temperature FRU / Temperature
5Kohm B3470K with sensor
threads
8 M6Q-120023--- Fan screen (120mm) FRU
9 801-BA20-00001-00 Built-in bar code reader FRU/Scanner
(featuring laser diversion)
10 801-BA40-00199-00 Reagent carousel FRU
antifogging heating
assembly
5.4.3 Replacing Reagent Carousel Body Assembly

When to do
Replace the reagent carousel body assembly when it is damaged or cannot meet the operation
requirements.
Tools
No
5-20
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.16 Removing/Installation Diagram for Reagent Carousel Body Assembly
Reagent carousel body

assembly
Positioning
pin
How to do
2 Rotate the reagent probe to the dispense position, and then remove the reagent
carousel cover.
3 Manually loosen the two screws on the reagent carousel body assembly.
4 Lift the handle bar to remove the reagent carousel body assembly.
5 Align the positioning hole of the new reagent carousel body assembly with the stop
bolt and install it onto the rotating shaft sleeve of the sample carousel. Tighten the
two screws on the reagent carousel body assembly with hands.

N/A
5.4.4 Replacing Semi-conductive Peltier and Temperature Sensor

When to do
When the reagent refrigeration compartment is seriously rusted or has bad refrigeration
effects, or the temperature sensor is damaged
Tools
Cross screwdriver, flathead screwdriver, hexagon wrench, scissors, waterproof glue gun, AC
impedance meter, blade, and reagent chamber thermistor fixture (BA40-J09).

5Modules and Units
Figure 5.17 Reagent refrigeration assembly

Reagent chamber
sealing ring
Reagent refrigeration
chamber
Reagent chamber
mounting plate
Heat-/Humidity-
Semi-conductive
insulating sponge
cooler
Radiator
Radiator
Rectangle
helical spring
Radiator retaining
screw
Sound-absorbing
Refrigeration fan Refrigerating air duct
cotton
Semi-conductive
Semi-conductive
peltier groove
peltier groove
Temperature
sensor
Reagent chamber
drain hole
How to do

2 Remove the reagent carousel cover assembly, reaction carousel cover assembly and
sample carousel cover assembly, and dismantle the desk panels around the reagent
refrigeration assembly (front desk panel, left panel, and middle panel), the left side
panel assembly and the rear right panel. Protect the sample probe, mixer assembly
and reagent probes from being collided during the dismantling.
3 Manually loosen the two screws on the reagent carousel body assembly, and then
remove the reagent carousel body assembly.
5-22
5 Modules and Units
4 Loosen the three M3×10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer and
remove the rotating shaft sleeve of the sample carousel to expose the transmission
shaft.
5 Disconnect the drain tube from the reagent refrigeration compartment to the drain
hole of the reagent chamber.
6 Unplug the connectors of the temperature sensor and peltier.
7 Remove the four M4×8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers, and remove the reagent refrigeration assembly from the refrigeration air
duct.
8 Remove the reagent refrigeration chamber assembly without touching the reagent
probes, wash well and other components. (If a bar code reader is installed, remove
it.) Turn the reagent refrigeration assembly over for 180°, and put it on the desktop.
9 Scrape off the sealing glue in the sensor mounting hole of the refrigeration chamber,
use the thermistor fixture (BA40-J09) to loosen the temperature sensor, and then
remove the temperature sensor.
10 Scrape off the glue in the sensor mounting hole of the refrigeration chamber, install
a new temperature sensor (remove the nut and washer that come with it). Then,
apply proper amount of KP97 thermal paste on the threads of the temperature
sensor and inside the threaded hole of the reagent chamber.
11 Use the reagent chamber thermistor fixture (BA40-J09) to make the temperature
sensor through the bottom of the reagent chamber, and tighten the temperature
sensor. Then, clean the excessive thermal paste in the chamber. Fill up the mounting
hole with TSE382-W waterproof glue until it is flush with the surface of the bottom
of the chamber. (After TSE382-W waterproof glue is squeezed into the hole, use a
toothpick to smear along the edge of the hole to make the glue closely stick to the
hole wall. Then, evenly smear the waterproof glue to ensure seal of the mounting
hole.)
12 Scrape off the waterproof glue around the radiator, remove the four radiator
retaining screws, remove the radiator and the rectangle helical spring, and remove
the semi-conductive peltier.
13 Use an AC impedance meter to measure the AC impedance of the new peltiers,
record the values and number each peltier as 1#-2# or 3#-4#. Check that the AC
impedance of each peltier is within 2.15Ω±10%. If not, replace the peltier.
14 Clean the thermal paste (KP97) on the projecting part of the panel for the
installation of the semi-conductive peltier of the refrigeration chamber. Then, even
apply the KP97 thermal paste on the projecting part (thickness of paste: about 0.1
to 0.2mm), put the new peltier on the projecting part, with the text-side facing
downwards. Carefully attach the peltier, and lead the cable out from the groove.
Note: Pay attention to the installation direction of the peltier. Incorrect
installation will lead to refrigeration failure.
15 Clean the overflow thermal paste around the peltier.
16 Attach a piece of thermal film (phase change heat conductive material) on the
no-text side of each peltier. Press with fingers to ensure that the film is properly
fixed. Then, remove the protective sheet from the film.
17 Install two radiators respectively into the slot of the chamber (the peltier cable
must not press the peltier, and all cables must be led out from the two grooves on
sides of the peltier), and install four rectangle helical springs in the hole in
sequence.
18 Put four radiator retaining screws through the rectangle spring and radiator onto
the chamber. Fasten the screws alternately (do not fasten them one by one, as
uneven force on the peltier may damage the peltier).
19 Use an AC impedance meter to measure the AC impedance of the 4 peltiers, and
check that it is within 2.15Ω±10%. If not, replace the peltiers.

5Modules and Units
20 Use a glue gun to apply TSE382-W waterproof glue inside the glue tank around the
radiator and the groove of reagent chamber (filling glue in the groove of reagent
chamber can fix the peltier cable inside the groove, note that the glue must not
exceed the surface of the chamber). Then, remove the excessive glue that is higher
than the surface of the bottom of the chamber.
21 When the sealing glue becomes solid completely, use four M4×8 hexagon socket cap
head screws with spring and flat washers to fix the reagent refrigeration assembly
to the refrigeration air duct.
Note:
When replacing only the temperature sensor, skip steps 12-20.
When replacing only the semi-conductive peltier, skip steps 9-11.
NOTE:
1、 When replacing the semiconductor Peltiers, store the removed screws properly.
2、 Pay attention to the installation direction of the peltier. Incorrect installation
will lead to refrigeration failure.
3、 The surrounding of the radiator and the mounting hole of the temperature
sensor must be completely covered by TSE382-W waterproof glue with no air gaps.
4、 Remember to install the thermal film when replacing the radiator.

See 8.12.5 for alignment of the reagent refrigeration assembly, and see 8.10.6 for alignment of
the reagent carousel bar code reader.
5.4.5 Replacing Cooling Fan

When to do
Replace the cooling fan when it is damaged.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
5-24
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.18 Reagent cooling fan
Refrigerating
air duc t
Refrigeration
fan
Fan screen
M4*50 cross pan head

screw with spring and
flat washer
How to do
1 Find the damaged cooling fan.
3 Remove the reagent carousel cover assembly and left side panel assembly, the front
desk panel, the reagent carousel desk panel and the rear right panel.
4 Unplug the connector of the damaged cooling fan.
5 Loosen the four M4×50 cross pan head screws with spring and flat washers, and
remove the damaged fan screen and refrigeration fan.
6 Install a new refrigeration fan with the arrow pointing outwards instead of at
the refrigeration compartment. Install the fan screen and fix it with four M4×50
cross pan head screws with spring washer onto the air passage. Note to tighten the
screws with proper force.
After powering on the instrument, check that the cooling fan is blowing wind outwards, To
confirm the refrigeration fan status, refer to 8.12.4.
5.4.6 Replacing Reagent Carousel Motor and Synchronous Belt

When to do
Replace the reagent carousel motor or synchronous belt when they are damaged.
Tools

5Modules and Units
Figure 5.19 Reagent carousel motor and belt
Motor bracket
M4*10 hexagon
socket cap head
screw with
spring and flat
washer
M4*10 hexagon
Damping washer socket cap head
screw
3-carousel motor
assembly
M4*10 hexagon
socket cap head
screw with
spring washer
How to do
Replace the motor:
2 Remove the reagent refrigeration assembly according to 5.4.4.
3 Remove the rear right panel and disconnect the motor cable.
4 Loosen the four M4×10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers on the motor bracket to remove the motor assembly.
5 Loosen the two M4×10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers on the motor to remove the 3-carousel motor assembly.
6 Fix a new motor on the damping board using two M4×10 hexagon socket head cap
screw screws with spring washer, and make the motor connector face the back of
the analyzer.
7 Sleeve the synchronous belt on the small belt wheel. Fix the motor assembly to the
big bottom plate using four M4×10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and
flat washers. Tighten the synchronous belt and all screws and connect the motor
cable.

2 Remove the reagent refrigeration assembly according to 5.4.4.
5-26
5 Modules and Units
3 Remove the rear right panel and disconnect the motor cable.
4 Remove the synchronous belt from the belt pulley. Install the new synchronous belt,
and then connect the motor cable.
NOTE:
Do not remove the belt wheel of the 3-carousel motor assembly.
N/A
5.4.7 Replacing Reagent Carousel Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor
When to do
Replace the reagent carousel home position sensor or coder sensor when they fail.
Tools
Figure 5.20 Reagent carousel sensor assembly
M3*6 cross pan

head screw with Coder sensor Home position sensor
washer
Mounting plate of
sensor

head screw screw
How to do
2 Rotate the reagent probes to the dispense position, remove the reagent carousel
cover assembly, and loosen the M4×8 cross pan head screws with washers to
remove the front desk panel.
3 Unplug the connectors of the reagent carousel home position sensor and coder
sensor.
4 Loosen the three M3×8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers to remove the reagent carousel sensor assembly.
5 Loosen the two M3×6 cross pan head screws with washers on the sensor mounting
plate, and then remove the sensor mounting plate together with the coder sensor.
6 Loosen the two M3×6 cross pan head screws on the coder sensor, and remove the
coder sensor from the mounting plate.
screws.

5Modules and Units
8 Install the mounting plate together with the coder sensor onto the sensor bracket
using two M3×6 cross pan head screws with washers. Do not tighten them.
9 Loosen the two M3×6 cross pan head screws to remove the home position sensor
from the bracket.
10 Fix the new home position sensor on the bracket using two M3×6 cross pan head
screws.
11 Fix the reagent carousel sensor assembly on the big bottom plate using three M3×8
hexagon socket cap head screws. Note to put the sensor assembly in the middle
of the big bottom plate. Manually rotate the reagent carousel and check that the
coder does not interfere with the home position sensor. Adjust the sensor mounting
plate to make the coder lie in the middle of the coder sensor, and then tighten the
screws on the mounting plate.
12 Plug the connectors of the reagent carousel home position sensor and coder sensor.
13 After aligning the sensor assembly, restore the components in the reversed order.
Note:
When replacing only the coder sensor, skip step 9-10.
When replacing only the reagent carousel home position sensor, skip steps 5-8.
NOTE:
"RGD--PHO-C" for coder sensor and "RGD--PHO-O" for home position sensor.

Refer to 8.5 to check the reagent carousel position, and refer to 8.7.3 to check the horizontal
positions of reagent probes to the inner and outer rings of reagent carousel.
5.4.8 Removing and Reinstalling Reagent Bar Code Reader

When to do
Replace the reagent bar code reader when it cannot work normally.
Tools
Hexagon wrench
5-28
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.21 Reagent bar code reader
Anti-fogging
Small bracket for bar
heating assembly
code reader
Bar code bracket

Scanner
assembly
How to do
1 Remove the desk panels around the reagent bar code reader.
2 Loosen the two M3×10 hexagon socket screws on the small bracket, disconnect the
reagent bar code reader cable from the instrument, and remove the bar code reader.
3 Install a new bar code reader and connect it in the reversed order of the above steps.
Prevent the sponge cushion from blocking the light emitting window of the bar code
reader. After attaching the bar code reader closely to the sponge cushion, use a tool
to push aside the pressed part of the sponge cushion in order to prevent it from
indenting and blocking the scanning window.
Refer to 8.10.6 to check the reagent bar code scanning position.
5.4.9 Installing Reagent Anti-Fogging Heater Assembly

When to do
Replace the reagent anti-fogging heater assembly when the glass is damaged or the assembly
does not work.
Tools
Hexagon wrench
Removing and reinstalling reagent anti-fogging heater assembly
1 Place a silicone pad in the groove of the anti-fogging device mounting plate, and
make the rubber side contact the latter.
2 Place the anti-fogging glass on the silicone pad.
3 Lay the heat-conducting aluminum plate with the groove side facing upwards, and
use six M2×8 cross pan head screws to fix it on the mounting plate.

5Modules and Units
4 Stick a heater to the groove on the aluminum plate.

5 Daub some thermal paste on the bottom side of the overheat protection switch and
place the switch on the heater. Use one M3×12 hexagon screw to fix the protection
switch with the switch plate.
6 Use four M3×10 pan head or countersunk head screws to fix the anti-fogging device
mounting plate on the exterior wall of the reagent chamber.
7 Use four M3×6 pan head screws to fix the dust shield on the mounting plate.
8 Stick a sponge cushion to the dust shield.
Precautions:
1. Align the window of the silicone pad with that of the mounting plate.
2. Ensure that the glass is not cracked or dirty.
3. Lay the cables of the heater and overheat protection switch downwards as shown in the
figure below for the purpose of convenient connection.
4. Align the window of the sponge cushion with that of the dust shield in order to ensure that
the scanning light comes smoothly. Prevent the sponge cushion from blocking the light emitting
window of the bar code reader. After attaching the bar code reader closely to the sponge
cushion, use a tool to push aside the pressed part of the sponge cushion in order to prevent it
from indenting and blocking the scanning window.
Figure 5.22 Anti-fogging heater module
Package mounting plate of Anti-fogging Heating Switch press Shielding Window of the
anti-fogging device glass element plate cover sponge cushion
Heat-conducting Overheat protection

Silicone pad
aluminum plate switch
Replacing reagent anti-fogging glass
1 Loosen the four M3×6 pan head screws to remove the dust shield from the
anti-fogging device mounting plate.
2 Loosen the four M3×10 pan head or countersunk head screws on the mounting
plate, disconnect the anti-fogging heater cable and temperature protection switch
cable, and then remove the anti-fogging device from the reagent chamber.
3 Loosen the six M2×8 pan head screws on the heat-conducting aluminum plate, and
then remove the aluminum plate together with the anti-fogging heater and
temperature protection switch.
4 Remove the damaged glass from the mounting plate and clear the broken glass on
the silicone pad. If necessary, replace the silicone pad. When installing a new
silicone pad, make the rubber side contact the mounting plate, and then place the
new glass window on the silicone pad. Ensure that the glass is not cracked or dirty.
5 Use six M2×8 cross pan head screws to fix the aluminum plate, anti-fogging heater
and temperature protection switch on the mounting plate.
5-30
5 Modules and Units
6 Use four M3×10 pan head or countersunk head screws to fix the anti-fogging device
mounting plate on the exterior wall of the reagent chamber.
7 Use four M3×6 pan head screws to fix the dust shield on the mounting plate.
Prevent the sponge cushion from blocking the light emitting window of the bar code
reader. After attaching the bar code reader closely to the sponge cushion, use a tool
to push aside the pressed part of the sponge cushion in order to prevent it from
indenting and blocking the scanning window.
5.5 Sample Carousel Assembly

The sample carousel assembly, situated in the right front of the analyzer, consists of the
carousel body assembly, chamber assembly, drive assembly, sensor assembly, motor assembly,
and bar code reader assembly. It holds and carries sample containers to the specified position,
and cooperates with the sample probe for sample dispensing etc.
Figure 5.23 Location of sample carousel assembly on the instrument
Sample Carousel
Assembly

5Modules and Units

Figure 5.24 Sample carousel assembly
Sample carousel body

assembly
Sample
Sample bar code Motor assembly Sensor assembly compartment
reader assembly

1 115-036346-00 Sample carousel body FRU
assembly
2 009-002204-00 Correlative optical coupler FRU / Home position or
wire (S) coder sensor
3 BA38-30-88129 2-carousel motor assembly FRU/Sample carousel
motor assembly
4 Sample compartment FRU
115-036993-00
assembly
5 BA40-20-61458 Tube holder FRU
6 BA38-21-88063 Sample chamber FRU
7 801-BA20-00001-00 Built-in bar code reader FRU/Bar code reader
(featuring laser diversion)
5.5.3 Replacing Sample Carousel Body Assembly

When to do
Replace the sample carousel body assembly when it is damaged or cannot meet the operation
requirements.
Tools
N/A
5-32
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.25 Sample carousel body assembly
Screw
Sample carousel
body assembly
Positioning pin
How to do
2 Remove the sample carousel cover.
3 Manually loosen the two screws on the sample carousel body assembly, and then
remove the sample carousel body assembly.
4 Align the locating holes on the new sample carousel body with the stop bolts and
place it on the rotating shaft sleeve of the sample carousel.
5 Tighten the two screws on the new sample carousel body assembly.

N/A
5.5.4 Replacement of Sample Carousel Home Sensor and Coder Sensor Cables
When to do
Replace the sample carousel home position sensor or the coder sensor when they fail.
Tools
Figure 5.26 Sample carousel sensor assembly
M3*6 cross pan

head screw with Coder sensor Home position sensor
washer
Mounting plate of
sensor

head screw screw

5Modules and Units
How to do

2 Rotate the sample probes to the sample dispense position, remove the sample
carousel cover assembly, and loosen the M4×8 cross pan head screws with washers
to remove the front desk panel.
3 Disconnect the home position sensor and coder sensor.
4 Loosen the M3×8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers of the
sample carousel sensor and remove the sensor assembly.
5 Loosen the two M3×6 cross pan head screws with washers on the sensor mounting
plate, and then remove the sensor mounting plate together with the coder sensor.
6 Loosen the two M3×6 cross pan head screws on the coder sensor, and remove the
coder sensor from the mounting plate.
screws.
8 Install the mounting plate together with the coder sensor onto the sensor bracket
using two M3×6 cross pan head screws with washers. Do not tighten them.
9 Loosen the two M3×6 cross pan head screws to remove the home position sensor
from the bracket.
10 Fix the new home sensor onto the sensor bracket using two M3×6 cross pan head
screws.
11 Fix the sample carousel sensor assembly on the big bottom plate using three M3×8
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers. Note to put the sensor
assembly in the middle of the big bottom plate. Manually rotate the sample
carousel and check that the coder does not interfere with the home position sensor.
Adjust the sensor mounting plate to make the coder lie in the middle of the coder
sensor, and then tighten the screws on the mounting plate.
12 Connect the home position sensor and coder sensor.
13 After aligning the sample carousel sensor assembly, restore the components in the
reversed order.
NOTE:
To replace only the coder sensor cable, neglect step 9 and 10.
To replace only the home position sensor, neglect step 5 to 8.
NOTE:
"RGD--PHO-C" for coder sensor and "RGD--PHO-O" for home position sensor.

Refer to 8.4 to check the sample carousel position and refer to 8.6 to confirm the horizontal
position when the sample probe is aligned with the inner/middle/outer ring of the sample
carousel.
5.5.5 Removing and Reinstalling Sample Carousel Motor and Synchronous Belt
When to do
5-34
5 Modules and Units
Replace the sample carousel motor and synchronous belt when they are damaged.
Tools
Figure 5.27 Removing/Installation Digram for Sample Carousel Motor
Motor bracket
M4*10 hexagon
socket cap head
screw with
spring and flat
washer
M4*10 hexagon
Damping washer socket cap head
screw
3-carousel motor
assembly
M4*10 hexagon
socket cap head
screw with
spring washer
How to do
Replace the motor:
2 Remove the front desk panel and front panel weldment (the water tank and others
need to be removed), and unplug the motor cable.
4 Loosen the four M4×10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers on the motor bracket to remove the synchronous belt from the belt pulley.
Then, remove the motor assembly.
4 Loosen the two M4×10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers on the
motor to remove the 3-carousel motor assembly (with the belt pulley).
5 Fix a new motor with the belt pulley on the damping board using two M4×10
hexagon socket head screws with spring washers, and turn the motor connector
back to the sample carousel.
6 Sleeve the synchronous belt on the small belt wheel. Fix the motor assembly to the
big bottom plate using four M4×10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and
flat washers. Tighten the synchronous belt and all screws and connect the motor
cable.


5Modules and Units
2 Remove the sample carousel cover and the desk panel and the front desk panel
around the sample carousel assembly.
3 Loosen the two screws to remove the sample carousel body assembly.
4 Loosen the three M3×10 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers to
remove the rotating shaft sleeve of the sample carousel.
5 Loosen the three cross pan head screws to remove the sample chamber.
6 Remove the synchronous belt from the belt pulley. Install the new synchronous belt.
NOTE:
Do not remove the belt wheel of the 3-carousel motor assembly.

N/A
5.5.6 Removing Sample Bar Code Reader

When to do
Replace the sample bar code reader when it does not work normally.
Tools
Hexagon wrench
Figure 5.28 Sample bar code reader and sample chamber
Dust shield for Sponge

bar code reader cushion
Sponge
cushion
Bar code Glass

reader window
Sample
Bar code reader compartment
bracket assembly
How to do
To install the sample bar code assembly:
1 Apply sponge cushion 2 on two sides of the glass window, and note not to
contaminate the window surface. The sponge cushion should align with the glass
verge. Apply sponge cushion on the dust shield for bar code reader, and note to align
its opening with that on the dust shield.
5-36
5 Modules and Units
2 Place the glass window in the position of window of the sample carousel chamber.
Use four M3×8 pan head screws to fix the bar code reader to the sample chamber.
3 Use two M3×8 hexagon socket screws with spring washer to fix the small bracket of
the bar code reader to the square hole on the upper end of the bar code reader
bracket.
4 Use two M3×10 hexagon socket screws with spring washer to fix the bar code
reader on the small bracket.
5 Use two M5×12 hexagon socket screws with spring washer to fix the bar code
reader bracket to the big bottom plate. Tighten the screws and connect the bar code
reader cable. Use the strip to fix it to the bracket.
NOTE
Prevent the sponge cushion from blocking the light emitting window of the bar code reader.
After attaching the bar code reader closely to the sponge cushion, use a tool to push aside the
pressed part of the sponge cushion in order to prevent it from indenting and blocking the
scanning window.
Replacing Bar Code Reader
1 Remove the sample carousel cover and three rubber plugs on the panel. Unscrew
the three screws till they cannot be dropped. Open the front door, unscrew the four
retaining screws on the front desk panel, and then remove the front desk panel.
2 Disconnect the bar code reader cable, loosen the wire clamp, unscrew the two
M3×10 hexagon socket cap head screws on the bar code reader, and then remove
the bar code reader.
3 Install the bar code reader on the small bracket with two M3×10 hexagon socket
cap head screws with flat and spring washers, and then connect the bar code reader
cable. Prevent the sponge cushion from blocking the light emitting window of the
bar code reader. After attaching the bar code reader closely to the sponge cushion,
use a tool to push aside the pressed part of the sponge cushion in order to prevent it
from indenting and blocking the scanning window.
4 Restore the front desk panel and adjust the gap. Use three M4×10 pan head screws
with washer to fix the top and then apply the rubber plugs on the panel. Fix the
front with four M4×8 pan head screw with washer and then close the sample
carousel cover.
Align the sample bar code reader according to 8.10.3.
5.6 Cuvette Wash Station

The cuvette wash unit, located in the rear right of the whole unit, consists of the wash probe
assembly and wash probe drive assembly. It provides 8-phase auto wash for non-disposable
reaction cuvettes so that they can be used repeatedly without influencing the test effects. The
first 6 phases are wash probes that can dispense and aspirate water. The last 2 phases are wipe
probes.

5Modules and Units
Figure 5.29 Location of the cuvette wash assembly
Cuvette Wash
Station

Figure 5.30 Cuvette wash assembly
Knurled
screw
Wash probe
assem bly
Wash probe
drive
assem bly
Zero position
photocoupler
5-38
5 Modules and Units

1 115-036498-00 Wash probe assembly FRU
2 051-001147-00 BA48 wash station FRU
photocoupler PCBA
3 115-013232-00 Wash probe drive assembly FRU
4 009-002204-00 Correlative optical coupler FRU / Zero
wire (S) position
photocoupler
5 041-022457-00 Wipe block FRU
5.6.3 Replacing Wash Probe Assembly

When to do
Replace the wash probes when they are bent or damaged or the wipe blocks are damaged.
Tools
No
Figure 5.31 Wash probe assembly
Wash probe Wipe block
How to do
2 Open the shielding cover assembly, and manually loosen the two screws to remove
the rear panel of light source assembly.
3 Unplug the cable connector of the BA48 wash station photocoupler.
4 Unplug the tubes and cables on the wash probe assembly, and manually loosen the
knurled screw to remove the wash probe assembly.

5Modules and Units
5 Install the new wash probe assembly, manually tighten the knurled screw, and
restore the tubes and cables according to their numbers.
NOTE:
Reinstall the tubes and cables on the wash probe assembly according to the number
marking.

Check the wash probes' vertical position in reaction cuvettes according to 8.9.2.
5.6.4 Replacing BA48 Wash Station Photocoupler

When to do
Replace the wash station photocoupler when it is damaged.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
Figure 5.32 Wash station photocoupler
M2.5*4 cross
pan head screw
M3*10 cross pan

head screw with Clip
spring washer
BA48 wash
station
photocoupler
How to do
2 Open the shielding cover assembly, and manually loosen the two screws to remove
the rear panel of light source assembly.
3 Unplug the cable connector of the BA48 wash station photocoupler.
4 Unplug the tubes and cables on the wash probe assembly.
5 Manually loosen the knurled screw to remove the wash probe assembly.
6 Loosen the one M3×10 cross pan head screw with spring washer to remove the
cable clamp.
5-40
5 Modules and Units
7 Loosen the one M2.5×4 cross pan head screw to replace the BA48 wash station
photocoupler with a new one, and tighten the screw again.
NOTE:
Reinstall the tubes and cables on the wash probe assembly according to the number
marking.

N/A
5.6.5 Replacing Wash Probe Drive Assembly

When to do
Replace the wash probe drive assembly when it is damaged.
Tools
Figure 5.33 Wash probe drive assembly
Knurled
screw
Position
adjusting plate
M4*16 hexagon
socket cap head
screw with spring
washer
M3*8 cross pan

head screw
Zero position
photocoupler
M4*12 hexagon
socket cap head
screw with spring
washer
Moto r supporting
block
Wash well
supporting rod
How to do

5Modules and Units
2 Open the shielding cover assembly, remove the reaction carousel cover, reagent
carousel cover and sample carousel cover. Remove the front desk panel, the middle
desk panel, the right desk panel, the rear panel of light source assembly and the left
rear cover. Loosen and clean the desk panels.
3 Unplug the connectors of the BA48 wash station photocoupler, zero position
photocoupler and motor. Manually loosen the knurled screw to remove the wash
probe assembly and store it properly.
4 Loosen the four M4×12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers on the
motor supporting block, and remove the wash probe drive assembly.
5 Install the new wash probe drive assembly and lock it on the supporting rods with
four M4×12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers. Do not tighten
the two M4×16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers on the
location adjustment plate, till you finish the alignment.
6 After alignment, restore the components in the reversed order.

Check the wash probes' vertical and horizontal positions in reaction cuvettes according to 8.9.
5.6.6 Replacing Zero Position Photocoupler

When to do
Replace the zero position photocoupler on the wash probe drive assembly when it is damaged.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
Exploded View for Installation (refer to Figure 5.32)
How to do
2 Manually loosen the two screws to remove the rear panel of light source assembly,
and loosen the M4×8 cross pan head screws to remove the rear left panel.
3 Unplug the connector of the zero position photocoupler.
4 Loosen the M3×8 cross pan head screw on the wash probe drive assembly, replace
the zero position photocoupler with a new one, and then fix it with the screw.

Adjust the wash probes' vertical position to reaction cuvettes according to 8.9.2.
5.7 Sample/Reagent Probe Unit

The sample/reagent probe assembly includes sample probe movement part and reagent probe
movement part. Sample movement part can aspirate the sample from the sample tube and
dispense it into the cuvette through the sample probe. Reagent movement assembly can
aspirate the reagent from the reagent bottle and dispense it into the cuvette through the
reagent probe.
They both have the following functions: featuring level detection, horizontal/vertical bump
detection and clog detection. The probe assembly has other functions, such as limiting of
mechanical position, self-lock during power interruption, etc.
Sample/reagent probe position:
5-42
5 Modules and Units
Sample probe assembly: wash well --> aspirate position on sample carousel --> dispense
position on reaction carousel or ISE module.
Reagent probe assembly: wash well --> aspirate position on reagent carousel --> dispense
position on reaction carousel.
Figure 5.34 Locations of Sample Probes/Reagent Probes/Mixers Units on the Instrument
Reagent probe Mixer Sample Probe
assembly Assembly Assembly

Figure 5.35 Sample/reagent probe assembly
130mm arm cover BA80 level sen se

board/BA804 00ul
reagent probe level
sense board
130mm arm bas e
Probe bracket
guid e rod and anti-
collision spring
Reagent p rob e assembly/

samp le probe assembly
Three-probe Sample probe drive assembly /

horizontal motor reagent probe drive assembly
assembly

5Modules and Units

1 043-002344-00 130mm arm cover FRU
2 044-000263-00 130mm arm base FRU
3 115-007022-00 Reagent probe assembly FRU
115-037086-00 Sample Probe Assembly FRU
4 115-036617-00 Sample probe drive assembly FRU
115-036619-00 Reagent probe drive assembly FRU
5 115-016625-00 Three-probe horizontal motor assembly FRU
6 801-BA80-00036-00 BA80 level detection board PCBA FRU/Sample
probe level sense
board
801-BA80-00030-00 BA80 400μl reagent probe level sense board FRU
PCBA
7 009-002204-00 Correlative optical coupler wire (S) FRU
8 043-002345-00 Probe bracket FRU
9 041-003368-00 Spring guide post FRU
10 033-000108-00 Anti-collision spring FRU
11 041-009179-00 Hardened power screw (M3×6) FRU
12 0040-10-32307 Valve Washer,10-32,18011Telfon washer FRU/Sample
probe washer
13 0040-10-32303 Kleohn14271 Teflonwasher, 14271 washer FRU/Reagent
probe washer
5.7.3 Replacing Sample/Reagent Probe Assembly

Note: The replacement of sample probe assembly is the same as that of reagent probe assembly.
The following takes the replacement of sample probe assembly as an example.
When to do
When the probe is bent or rusted, or the anti-collision spring is impaired in functioning, or the
level sense board goes wrong, replace it.
Tools
Cross screwdriver, flathead screwdriver, hexagon wrench, and cutting pliers
5-44
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.36 Removing/Installation Digram for Sample/Reagent Probe Assembly
Probe arm
cover
Spring guide
post
Anti-collision
spring
M3*12 stainless hexagon
socket cap head screw
with spring washer
Sample Probe
Assembly
How to do
2 Open the shielding cover.
3 Loosen the powder screws on two sides of the probe cover, and lift the cover to
remove it.
4 Unplug the cable from the level sense board.
5 Remove the fluidic tube connector.
6 Remove the spring guide post and the anti-collision spring.
7 Remove the sample probe assembly.
8 Loosen the two M3×12 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the sample
probe arm assembly, and then remove the arm assembly.
9 Fix the new sample probe arm assembly on the precision shaft using two M3×12
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.
10 Lead the new sample probe assembly through the mixer arm and support sleeve.
11 Fix the new anti-collision spring on the probe arm using the spring guide post.
Note:
If only the level sense board needs to be replaced, skip steps 5 to 11.
Refer to 8.6 and 8.7 to perform the alignment related to the sample/reagent probe.

5Modules and Units
5.7.4 Replacing Reagent Probe Drive Assembly

When to do
Replace the reagent probe drive assembly when the assembly as a whole or one of its
components is impaired in functioning or damaged.
Tools
Figure 5.37 Reagent probe drive assembly
Bracket
Bracket
M6*16 hexagon
socket cap head
screw with spring
washer
How to do
2 Open the shielding cover, and remove the desk panels around the sample probe
movement part, and the rear right panel, and then remove the mixer wash well.
3 Unplug the reagent probe drive motor cable, sensor cable and wash tube, cut off the
connector (beneath the big bottom plate) on the cables passing through the
precision shaft, cut off the wash tube connector connecting the syringe, remove the
braided hose (about 400mm), and then remove the reagent probe arm assembly.
Refer to 5.7.3 to remove the sample/reagent probe arm assembly.
(Note: Make sure to install the cable connector in place. If the cable can be pulled
out from the connector, lift the cable barb and insert it again into the connector.)
5-46
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.38 Remove the cable connector and install the braided hoses
4 Loosen the three M6×16 hexagon screws with spring washers to remove the sample
probe drive assembly from beneath the big bottom plate. Remove the two brackets
and install them on the new sample probe drive assembly.
5 Fix the new reagent probe drive assembly on the big bottom plate using three
M6×16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer. Make sure to lead the
wash tube and sensor cable through the precision shaft prior to the installation.
NOTE:
When installing the sensor of the sample probe drive assembly, lead the cable through the
supporting flange, connect the terminal block, insert the braided hose into the protection
sleeve for about 20mm deep, raise the arm to the highest position, and tighten the braided hose
and cable with a cable tie at 10mm away from the protection sleeve. See the figure below. Align
the Teflon tube and cables, lead the braided hose for 10-20mm more than the cable tie position,
use a cable clamp UC-1 to pinch the braided hose at the cable tie position, and then use one
M4×8 pan head screw with washer to fix the cable clamp on the bottom plate.

5Modules and Units
Figure 5.39 Install the braided hose

Align and confirm the reagent probe's positions on the reaction carousel, reagent carousel and
wash well, according to 8.7.
5.7.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly

When to do
Replace the sample probe drive assembly when the assembly as a whole or one of its
components is impaired in functioning or damaged.
Tools
Cross screwdriver, flathead screwdriver, hexagon wrench, and cutting pliers
Figure 5.40 Sample probe drive assembly
Bracket
Bracket
M6*16 hexagon socket

cap head screw with
spring washer
5-48
5 Modules and Units
How to do

2 Open the shielding cover, and remove the desk panels around the sample probe
motion assembly, the right side panel and the rear left panel.
3 Remove the sample carousel body assembly, rotating shaft sleeve, and sample
chamber assembly. Make sure to disconnect the earthing wire of the sample
chamber assembly from the big bottom plate.
4 Unplug the sample probe drive motor cable, sensor cable and wash tube, cut off the
connector (beneath the big bottom plate) on the cables passing through the
precision shaft, cut off the wash tube connector connecting the syringe, remove the
braided hose (about 400mm). Refer to 5.7.3 to remove the sample/reagent probe
arm assembly.
(Note: Make sure to install the cable connector in place. If the cable can be pulled
out from the connector, lift the cable barb and insert it again into the connector.)
Figure 5.41 Remove the cable connector and install the braided hoses
5 Loosen the three M6×16 hexagon screws with spring washer to remove the sample
probe drive assembly from beneath the big bottom plate. Remove the two brackets
on it and install them on the new sample probe drive assembly.

5Modules and Units
6 Fix the new sample probe drive assembly on the big bottom plate using three
M6×16 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer. Make sure to lead the
wash tube and sensor cable through the precision shaft prior to the installation.
NOTE:
Connect the sensor cable connector on the sample probe drive assembly after leading the cable
through the supporting flange.
Make sure to connect the earthing wire of the sample chamber assembly to the big bottom
plate.
Insert the braided hose into the protection sleeve for about 20mm deep, raise the probe arm to
the highest position, and tighten the braided hose and cable with a cable tie at 10mm away
from the protection sleeve. See the figure below. Align the Teflon tube and cables, lead the
braided hose for 10-20mm more than the cable tie position, use a cable clamp UC01 to pinch
the braided hose at the cable tie position, and then use an M4×8 pan head screw with washer
to fix the cable clamp on the bottom plate.
Figure 5.42 Install the braided hose

Align and confirm the sample probe' positions on the reaction carousel, sample carousel, wash
well, and ISE module according to 8.6.
5.7.6 Replacing 3-probe Horizontal Motor Assembly and Synchronous Belt

When to do
Replace the sample/reagent probe horizontal motor assembly and synchronous belt when they
are impaired in functioning or damaged.
Tools
5-50
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.43 3-probe horizontal motor assembly
M3*8 hexagon
socket cap head
screw with flat
washer
How to do

2 Open the shielding cover and remove the desk panels around the probe/reagent
probe unit, the reagent carousel cover and sample carousel cover.
3 Disconnect the 3-probe horizontal motor assembly.
4 Loosen the four M3×8 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers
on the sample/reagent probe horizontal motor assembly, and then remove the
3-probe horizontal motor assembly and synchronous belt.
5 Fix the new 3-probe horizontal motor assembly onto the horizontal motor bracket
using four M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws with spring and flat washers, and
do not tighten the screws. Sleeve the new cog belt on the synchronous belt wheel,
tighten the belt wheel, and then tighten the screws on the motor assembly.

Refer to 8.6 and 8.7 to perform the alignment related to the reagent probe.
5.8 Mixer Unit

The mixer unit includes the sample mixer assembly and reagent mixer assembly, which share
the same set of vertical drive assembly to mix the reaction liquid after sample and reagent are
respectively dispensed. The mixer unit is located in the rear left of the instrument.

5Modules and Units

Figure 5.44 Mixer movement assembly
Mixer arm cover
Mixer arm Mixer motor assembly
Mixer base
Mixer drive assembly
3-probe
horizontal
motor assembly

1 115-036615-00 Mixer drive assembly FRU
2 041-017465-00 Mixer FRU
3 041-020846-00 Retaining nut FRU
4 115-027877-00 Mixer motor assembly FRU
5 043-006907-00 Mixer arm cover FRU
6 042-017010-00 Mixer arm FRU
7 041-022527-00 Mixer base FRU
8 115-016625-00 3-probe horizontal motor FRU
assembly
9 009-002204-00 Correlative optical coupler FRU
wire (S)
10 051-001620-00 Rotation speed photocoupler FRU
conversion board
11 041-009179-00 Hardened power screw (M3×6) FRU
5.8.3 Replacing Mixer Arm Assembly

Replacement of the mixer arm assembly includes the replacement of the mixer, mixing motor
assembly, conversion board of rotation speed detection optical coupler, and mixer arm
assembly.
5-52
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.45 Removing/Installation Digram for Mixer Arm Assembly
Mixer arm cover

Rotation speed
photocoupler
conversion board
Mixer arm Mixer motor

assembly
Mixer motor
mounting plate
Mixer base
Retaining nut
Mixer
(1) Replacing Mixer

When to do
Replace the mixer when it is bent or damaged.
Tools
Two wrench fixtures (BA60-J21)
Figure 5.46 Mixer
Edge cutting
Retaining nut
side of mixer
How to do
2 Open the front shielding cover, and pull the mixer arm to the highest point for
operation.
3 Use the wrench (BA60-J21) to loosen the mixer, and then grab the mixer with one
hand and unscrew the retaining screw counter-clockwise with the other hand to
loosen and remove the mixer straight down.

5Modules and Units
4 Loosen the lock nut on the mixer to the extent that the motor shaft can be easily
inserted.
5 Reinstall the new mixer in the reverse order of above steps.
NOTE:
1. When installing the mixer, push it completely along the motor shaft. Force in other directions
may damage the motor shaft or the mixer.
2. Stuck the small opening of a wrench at the wrench position of the mixer, stuck the large
opening of the other wrench at the position for nut fastening. Rotate the two wrenches in
opposite directions until the nut is fastened (evenly apply force to avoid the motor shaft from
being bent). Note: Do not touch the mixer during nut fastening. Otherwise, the mixer may
deform.
Figure 5.47 Diagram of Wrench (BA60-J21)
Large opening of wrench Small opening of wrench

No
(2) Replacing Mixing Motor Assembly

When to do
Replace the mixer motor when it fails.
Tools
Cross screwdriver and cutting pliers
How to do
2 Open the shielding cover, and gently pull the mixer arm to the highest point. Rotate
the mixer assembly to place the mixer at a position ready for operation.
3 Use the wrench (BA60-J21) to loosen the mixer, and then grab the mixer with one
hand and unscrew the retaining screw counter-clockwise with the other hand to
loosen and remove the mixer straight down.
4 Remove the powder screws on the mixer cover and lift it up to remove it.
5 Disconnect the motor cable and loosen the two M2×6 cross pan head screws to
remove the mixer motor assembly.
6 Install a new mixing motor assembly.
7 After alignment of the motor location, restore the components in the reversed order.
NOTE:
When installing the mixer, push it completely along the rotor. Force in other directions may
damage the motor shaft or the mixer.
Refer to 8.8Mixer Unit to adjust the photocoupler conversion board, the insertion depth of the
motor stopper, and the mixer's horizontal position on the reaction carousel.
5-54
5 Modules and Units
(3) Replacing Conversion Board of Rotation Speed Detection Optical Coupler

When to do
Conversion board of rotation speed detection optical coupler is faulty.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
How to do

operation.
4 Loosen the two M2×6 cross pan head screws to remove the optical coupler
conversion board.
5 Install the new conversion board of rotation speed detection optical coupler.
6 After alignment of the board location, restore the components in the reversed order.

Refer to 8.8Mixer Unit to adjust the photocoupler conversion board and the insertion depth of
the motor stopper.
(4). Replacing Mixer Arm Assembly

When to do
Replace the mixer arm assembly when the screw holes on the arm base are slipped, or the
screw nut is broken, or the arm base is damaged.
Tools
How to do
operation.
4 Unplug the mixer motor cable, loosen the four M3×8 hexagon socket cap head
screws with spring washer on the mixer arm assembly, remove the connector from
the motor cable, and then remove the mixer arm assembly.
5 Fix the new mixer arm assembly on the mixer base using four M3×8 hexagon socket
cap head screws with spring washers.
6 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in the reversed order to install the mixer motor
cable and arm cover.
Note:
When aligning the horizontal position of the mixer arm assembly, fasten the screws of the
mixer arm and the mixer base in strict accordance with the sequence as shown in the following
figure. Otherwise, the mixer may easily get loose after long time of movement.

5Modules and Units
Figure 5.48 Removing/Installation Digram for Screw Fastening Sequence of Mixer Arm
Assembly
2 3

Refer to 8.8 Mixer Unit to adjust the mixer position.
5.8.4 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly

When to do
Replace the mixer drive assembly when it is damaged or impaired in functioning.
Tools
Figure 5.49 Removing/Installation Digram for Mixer Drive Assembly
Mixer arm assembly
Mixer drive assembly
M6*16 hexagon
screw with spring
washer
5-56
5 Modules and Units
How to do

2 Open the shielding cover, and remove the desk panels around the mixer drive
assembly, the left side panel and the rear right panel.
3 Unplug the cables of the mixer drive motor, mixer motor, and sensor, remove the
connectors (below the big bottom plate) from the cables passing through the
precision shaft, and then remove the mixer arm assembly. (Note: Make sure to
install the cable connector in place. If the cable can be pulled out from the connector,
lift the cable barb and insert it again into the connector.)
4 Loosen the three M6×16 hexagon socket head screws with spring washer to remove
the mixer drive assembly.
5 Fix the new mixer drive assembly on the big bottom plate using three screws. Make
sure to lead the motor cable through the precision shaft prior to the installation.
NOTE:
When aligning the horizontal position of the mixer arm assembly, fasten the screws
of the mixer arm and the mixer base in strict accordance with the sequence as
shown in Figure 5.48. Otherwise, the mixer may easily get loose after long time of
movement.
Refer to 8.8 to adjust the photocoupler conversion board, the insertion depth of the
motor stopper, and the mixer's horizontal positions on the reaction carousel and
wash well.
5.8.5 Replacing Horizontal Motor Assembly and Synchronous Belt

When to do
Replace the mixer horizontal motor assembly and synchronous cog belt when they are
impaired in functioning or damaged.
Tools
How to do
The removing and reinstalling methods are similar with those in 5.7.6 except for the arm.
N/A

5Modules and Units
5.9 Modules and Units — Photoelectric Unit

5.9.1 Functions and Parameters
The BS-410/BS-410E/BS-410S/BS-430/BS-450/BS-460/BS-470/BS-470E has inherited the
mature concave gratings light-splitting technology of Mindray analyzers. which can not only
simplify the optical design to compact the optical structure, but also eliminate the stray light. A
combined light passing through the entrance slit projects on the PDA (Photodiode Array) via
the concave flat-field gratings. A certain light-activated element on the array receive the
monochromatic light at certain wavelength due to its position. During operation, the
photometric system controlled by the computer receives the electric signals produced by the
light-activated elements of corresponding wavelength and then converts them into absorbance.
In case the spectrum is defined, the absorbance at multiple wavelengths can be calculated
quickly.
Technical Parameters
 Optical system: reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings, with each
wavelength detected by a Photodiode array.
 Wavelength: 12 wavelengths, 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm,
570nm, 605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm, and 800nm
 Wavelength accuracy: ±2nm
 Light source: 12V/20W, tungsten-halogen lamp, transmitting light through fiber
bundle
 Minimum reaction volume: 90μl
 Absorbance range: 0-3.5A, 10mm light path conversion
 Light pathlength of cuvette: 5mm
Number of cuvettes: 93 cuvettes, 4mm×5mm×29mm
 Cuvette material: standard plastic cuvette, compatible with glass cuvettes
Terms of Optics
 AD value: the value converted from photoelectric signal (voltage) through AD
converter.
 Water blank: the AD value of a cuvette measured when the wash station dispenses
water in phase 6. Water blank is the base point for calculation absorbance, that is,
the 0 point of absorbance.
 Cuvette blank out of range: means the water blank of phase 6 is less than the light
intensity low limit. This alarm is used to monitor the energy level of the optical
system to ensure normal signal-to-noise ratio.
 Cuvette blank out of range (10X): means the relative change of continuous phase-6
water blanks for 10 cuvettes is greater than 3% comparing with the history data.
This alarm is used to prevent light fluctuation or erroneous result due to cuvette
overflowing and to remind the operator of this phenomenon.
5.9.2 Composition and Structure of Optical Assembly

The BS-410/BS-410E/BS-410S/BS-430/BS-450/BS-460/BS-470/BS-470E applies the
holographic concave flat-field gratings and PDA for photometric measurement. See the figure
below. The front lens converges the light beam sent from the tungsten-halogen lamp to the
reaction cuvette via the fiber bundle. The light beam passes through the reaction cuvette and
then converges at the entrance slit via the lens group 2. The gratings divide the light beam from
the entrance slit and then converge them to the slit array. Finally, the PDA behind the slit array
converts the light signals into electric signals and then outputs them.
5-58
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.50 Photometer light path
PDA Slit array Filter
Lens Cuvette
Halogen lamp Lens fiber bundle
Entrance slit Grating
Figure 5.51 Location of light source assembly
Light source
assembly
The optical measurement assembly consists of the light-splitting assembly and AD housing
assembly.

5Modules and Units
Figure 5.52 Location of optical measurement assembly
Optical measurement
assembly

1 081-000137-00 Lamp assembly (64258/with FRU
package)
2 801-BA40-00167-00 fiber bundle FRU
3 115-020201-00 Plastic cuvette (with surface Non-FRU
processed)
4 115-022370-00 Light-splitting assembly FRU
5 115-022371-00 PDA assembly FRU
6 801-BA80-00136-00 Cable of lamp housing fan FRU
5.9.3 Replacing Lamp

When to do
Replace the lamp when an alarm is triggered indicating that the lamp has insufficient intensity,
or not turned on, or has been used for over 2000 hours,
or has cuvette blank out of range (10X).
Tools
N/A
5-60
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.53 Exploded view of lamp and fiber bundle for installation
Lamp base retaining

screw
fiber bundle
801-BA40-00167-00
Light source assembly M3 socket set

(64258/with package) screws
115-017932-00
Binding post nut

(manually
fasten)
NOTE:
Replace the lamp according to the instructions on the screen.
Please wait for at least 5 minutes (if the lamp fan works properly) after turning off the lamp to avoid injury.
Do not touch the bulb when installing the new lamp. In case of touching, please clean the bulb with fiber cloth or
ethanol-moistened gauze.
How to do
1 Select Utility->Maintenance->Maintenance->Biochemistry
Maintenance->Replace Lamp.
2 Follow the instructions prompted by the software and wait for five minutes until the
lamp cools down.
3 Loosen the screws on the back cover of the lamp and remove the lamp rear cover.
4 Unscrew the cable connectors and the lamp base retaining screws with hands, to
remove the lamp.
5 Install the lamp and rear panel in a reversed order. Please ensure that the lamp has
been installed properly in the right place and there is no space between the lamp
and the lamp base before mounting the panel.
6 Select Continue and wait for ten minutes to start Lamp Check to check if the lamp
can work properly.
Refer to section Alignment.
5.9.4 Replacing Fiber Bundle

When to do
Replace the fiber bundle when it is broken or the light intensity is insufficient.
Tools
Hexagon wrench

5Modules and Units
How to do
1 Switch off the power supply of the whole unit.

3 According to the figure above, use a hexagon wrench to remove the M3 socket set
screws with cup point on the light source assembly.
4 Remove the light-splitting assembly by referring to the next section.
5 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the screws that fixing the optical fiber baffle, and
remove the optical fiber baffle.
6 Remove the M3 socket set screws with cup point used to fix the optical fiber bundle.
Pull out the optical fiber bundle.
7 Install the new fiber bundle, and tighten the screws on the light source assembly
and the optical measurement assembly. Note to avoid bending the fiber bundle with
radius less than 60mm.
Figure 5.54 Exploded view of fiber bundle on optical measurement assembly for
installation
M3 socket set
screws
Fiber bundle
801-BA40-00167-00
Optical fiber
baffle
Adjusting
washer

5.9.5 Replacing Light-splitting Assembly

When to do
Replace the light-splitting assembly when it is impaired in functioning or its performance
cannot meet the requirements.
Tools
How to do
5-62
5 Modules and Units
3 According to Figure 5.54, use a hexagon wrench to remove the M3 socket set screws
with cup point on the light source assembly.
4 Remove all panels around the reaction carousel and its, and then remove the
reaction carousel body assembly.
5 Loosen the drain line of the reaction carousel heat chamber and remove the heat
chamber.
6 Loosen the cross pan head screws on the AD housing, and then remove the AD
housing assembly.
7 Loosen the three socket cap head screws on the optical measurement assembly to
remove it.
8 Install the new optical measurement assembly following the above steps reversely.
Figure 5.55 Exploded view of optical measurement assembly for installation
M5×10 hexagon socket

cap head screw with AD housing
spring and flat washer assembly
Light-splitting
assembly (BA49)
115-022370-00
Adjusting
washer
M3×8 cross pan

head screw
Pillar
NOTE:
When removing the optical measurement assembly, keep the washers with the supports and ensure the
washers are of equal amount on each support.

5.9.6 Replacement of PDA Assembly

The optical assembly should be replaced if some of functions are disabled or its performance
cannot meet the requirements. Follow the steps below to replace the PDA assembly.

5Modules and Units
NOTE:
Use a new lamp to align the gain of each channel after replacing the PDA assembly, in order to avoid strong
light of the lamp.
When removing the optical assembly, exercise caution not to lose the washers on the supporting rods. The
washers on each supporting rod are of equal number.
The signal cable must be connected correctly.
Tighten the PDA assembly in place until the inner hexagon wrench cannot screw.Ensure the surfaces contact
closely.
Replacement steps:
Refer to the previous section Figure 5.55
2 Remove the wash station.
3 Remove the reaction carousel cover and all panels around it. Rotate the reagent
probes and sample probe to above the reagent carousel and sample carousel, and
the mixers to the wash wells, for the purpose of conveniently removing the reaction
carousel and heat chamber.
4 After removing the reaction carousel, loosen the drain tube to remove the heat
chamber.
5 Remove the AD housing and open its upper cover. Unplug the
pre-amplification-AD-collection cable and power cable from the AD collection
board.
6 Loosen the screws on the light source assembly to remove the fiber bundle.
7 Loosen the three M5 hexagon screws to remove the light-splitting assembly
together with the fiber bundle.
Precautions:
1) Do not bend the fiber bundle too much (less than R60MM for the best) during
removing. When leaving the factory, the fiber bundle is fixed in the middle by a
cable tie on the heat chamber posts. You can remove the cable tie and fiber bundle
by sliding them upwards. (You can also directly cutting off the cable tie and use a
new one in the spare parts kit instead.)
2) Protect the exposed optical part on the head of the fiber bundle from scratching
and contamination.
3) There are washers on each post used to adjust the height of the optical axis. Keep
them properly and do not drop them while removing the optical assembly.
8 Loosen the two M3 screws to remove the shielding cover of the PDA assembly.
5-64
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.56 Remove the shielding cover
Retaining
screws on the
shielding cover
PDA assembly
9 Disconnect the signal cable and power cable on the pre-amplification board, and
remove the four M3 hexagon screws indicated in the following figure.
Figure 5.57 Remove the retaining screws of the PDA assembly.
Retaining
screws of PDA
assembly
Note: keep the four screws with the sealing adhesive. Use the original screws when
installing the new PDA assembly.
10 Remove the PDA assembly. The PDA on positioning post may be very tight. You can
swing the PDA assembly to remove it with the sealing pad.

5Modules and Units
Figure 5.58 Remove PDA assembly
Sealing pad of
PDA assembly
Positioning
pins of PDA
assembly
11 Install a new PDA assembly in the reverse order of steps 8-10 and note:
1) Insert the signal cables correctly as J2 to J2 and J3 to J3.
2) Check if the sealing pad is in place when the new PDA assembly is installed.
3) Tighten the PDA assembly in place until the inner hexagon wrench cannot screw.
Ensure the surfaces contact closely. Since the sealing pad is elastic, tighten the four
screws alternately for two or three times.
Note: use the original screws when installing the new PDA assembly
Figure 5.59 Install a new PDA assembly
Make the two sides

tightly close
12 Install the light-splitting assembly in the reversed order of step 2-7 and pay
attention to the following points:
1) Ensure that the same number (or thickness) of washers are installed on the
supporting rods as before the removing.
2) Insert the signal cables correctly on the AD collection board, as J2 to J2 and J3 to
J3.
5-66
5 Modules and Units
3) Do not bend the fiber bundle too much (less than R60MM for the best) during
installation. Fix the fiber bundle with a cable tie on the heat chamber posts in the
same way when it leaves the factory.
13 After replacement, switch on the main power and analyzing unit power, and run the
operating software. When the lamp output becomes steady, readjust the gain
parameters of each channel according to 8.3.3.
14 Check the stability of the instrument by running tests with water as sample and
reagent. Check that the reaction curve is flat and straight.
15 After the PDA assembly is replaced, calibration should be done for all tests.
5.9.7 Replacing Reaction Cuvette

When to do
Replace a cuvette if,
 it is detected abnormal through the Cuvette Check procedure; or
 scratches or cracks are found on the optical surface of the cuvette.
Warning
While installing the reaction cuvettes, exercise caution to avoid scratching them. Do not touch the optical
surface of the reaction cuvettes. If the optical surface is polluted, the obtained absorbance may be inaccurate.
While installing the reaction cuvettes, make sure that the optical surface is confronted with the outside of the
reaction carousel.
Wear gloves free of fiber and powder to avoid polluting the optical surface of the reaction cuvettes.
Biohazards
Wear gloves and lab coat, and if necessary, goggles during the maintenance process.
NOTE:
If a cuvette cannot be removed from the reaction carousel, first remove 1 or 2 cuvettes to its right, use a knife to
remove the metal plate next to it, and then use your hands or tweezers to take out the cuvette.
Tools
Fiber-free gloves, dry cloth or gauze, reaction cuvettes, and concentrated wash solution
manufactured by our company
How to do
1 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Biochemistry Maintenance.
2 Choose Replace Cuvette.
3 Click Continue to start the maintenance procedure.
4 Remove the reaction carousel cover.
5 Type in the position number of the cuvette you want to replace.
The input range is 1-93. Only one position number can be entered each time.
6 Select Replace.
7 Use your thumb and forefinger to take out cuvettes, and correspond them to the
numbers on the reaction carousel.
8 Place the clean cuvette or the new one into the reaction carousel, and make sure
that the cuvette bottom attaches completely to the reaction cuvette.
9 Cover the reaction carousel.

5Modules and Units
10 Select Done. The system resets mechanically.

11 Perform the Cuvette Check procedure to check if the new cuvettes meet the
requirements.
12 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance, and then select Scheduled
Maintenance -> Other.
13 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Replace Cuvettes.
14 Select OK. The maintenance time of each maintenance item is refreshed.
15 Select Log and then record commends and other important information for the
procedure.
16 Select OK to save your input information.
17 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Biochemistry Maintenance ->
Cuvette Check to perform cuvette Check. If Cuvette Check is not performed, the new
cuvettes may not be used due to too large water blank or alarm "Water blank out of
range (10X)" may be given.
5.9.8 Photometer Lens Maintenance

When to do
The lens of the photometer is contaminated or the maintenance time is over 1 year.
Materials required
Lens cleaning paper, cotton swabs and ethanol
NOTE:
When moving the sample/reagent probe and mixer, do not bend or collide with them.
Do not leave the cotton tissue on the lens.
How to do
1 Switch off the analyzing unit power.

2 Loosen the nuts on the wash station, remove it and put in a clear box.
3 Remove the reaction carousel cover gently.
4 Loosen the screws of the reaction carousel and the cable of the slip ring. Remove the
reaction carousel.
5 Use cotton swabs dipped with ethanol to wipe the exposed lens of the front and rear
lens assembly.
Figure 5.60 Location of lens
5-68
5 Modules and Units
6 Install the reaction carousel and insert the cable of the slip ring. Tighten the screws.
7 Cover the reaction carousel.
8 Install back the wash station and tighten the screws.
9 Turn on the analyzing unit.

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Biochemistry Maintenance -> Cuvette Check. If
the dirty cuvettes are found, replace them. If Cuvette Check is not performed, water blank may
become large after the lens are wiped, which may trigger the alarm "Water blank out of range
(10X)".
5.10 ISE Unit (Optional)

The ISE module is an optional module for the fully-automated chemistry analyzer and designed
to measure the concentration of K+, Na+ and Cl- in serum, plasma and diluted urine. The
sample volume for measurement is: 70µl for serum and plasma, 140µl for urine diluted at the
ratio of 1:9 (1 for urine and 9 for diluent).
5.10.2 Structure and FRU List

The ISE unit consists of the ISE module, pump module and reagent module, functions of which
are introduced in Table below.
Table 5.10 Components of ISE Unit
Name Functions
ISE module The ISE module has the following electrodes: Na+, K+, Cl-,
reference and blank. It analyzes and measures sample
dispensed through the injection port.
Pump module Three peristaltic pumps are contained to transfer reagent
and liquid waste.
Reagent module The reagent module integrates calibrator A, calibrator B,
waste container, and a chip used for monitoring reagent
inventory. It provides reagent for sample analysis and
stores the liquid waste herein.
The figure below shows the composition of the module.

5Modules and Units
Figure 5.61 Exploded view for installation of Measuring module
ISE shielding
box
ISE shielding
cover
Figure 5.62 Exploded view for installation of pump module
Peristaltic pump
Peristaltic bracket
Pump
5-70
5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.63 Exploded view for installation of reagent module
Figure 5.64 ISE measuring system tube connection
Calibrat Calibrat
or B or A
Pump Pump Pump ISE
Waste well B A W

1 115-004626-00 K electrode FRU
2 115-004627-00 Na electrode FRU
3 115-004630-00 Cl electrode FRU
4 115-004625-00 Reference electrode FRU
5 115-004628-00 Spacer FRU
6 BA34-10-63657 Main control board of the ISE FRU
module
7 BA34-10-63659 Pre-amplification board of the FRU
ISE module
8 BA34-10-63658 Compression plate FRU
9 801-BA34-00104-00 ISE module bubble detector FRU
10 801-BA34-00103-00 Sample tube of ISE module FRU
11 BA34-10-63663 O ring of ISE module(3) FRU
12 BA34-10-63668 O ring of ISE electrode FRU
13 082-000684-00 Peristaltic Pump FRU
14 801-BA34-00105-00 The peristaltic pump tube(3 pcs) FRU
15 BA34-10-63666 ISE waste tube connector FRU
16 BA34-10-63667 Tube connector of ISE (4) FRU
17 801-BA34-00106-00 ISE module plastic tube for A ,B FRU
and W liquid
18 BA34-10-63812 ISE module wand FRU

5Modules and Units
5.10.3 Unclogging Waste Tubes

When to do
If the sample contains insoluble substances like fibrin or other substances, they can be
accumulated in the waste tube after long time use, causing clogging of the waste tube.
Maintenance Tools
Name PN Quantity Remarks

Unclogging tool for 115-023372-00 1 FRU
ISE
Warning
Do not spill liquid on the analyzer. Liquid ingression may cause equipment damage.
Biohazards
NOTE:
Excessive bleach and DI water flushed into the ISE reagent pack waste bag may cause waste bag over
expansion and clog the Cal A & Cal B reagent flow.
To prevent this problem, connect to an old used-up reagent pack or use the connector of the used-up reagent.
Procedure:
1 Ensure the analyzer is in idle (standby) status. Open the ISE window on the right
side panel of the analyzer.
2 Remove the electrode housing cover. Remove the waste tube fitting from the bottom
of the right angle adapter. Remove waste peri-pump tube from the pump bracket.
3 Connect the waste tube fitting to a syringe and unclogging tool with 5mL of
undiluted household bleach.
4 Press the wand release button to remove the wand from the current in use ISE
reagent pack and keep it in a save place. Engage the wand to an old used-up reagent
pack.
5 Inject bleach into the ISE waste tube and soak the tube for 5 minutes. Discharge the
waste into the reagent pack.
Note: When the bleach cannot be injected into the ISE pack, remove the wand and
push down to open the waste valve manually with a sharp object, and then inject
again. If bleach can go through this time, the waste bag was clogged and cannot be
used. If bleach still cannot be injected, replacing the ISE wand is recommended.
6 Repeat this step with 5mL of DI water without the 5 minutes of soaking time.
7 Remove the wand from the old use-up pack and re-install it back to the current in
use ISE pack. Re-install the waste tube fitting back to the ISE electrode housing right
angle adapter and waste peri-pump tube back to the pump bracket. Re-install the
housing cover.
Perform ISE pump calibration and if it succeeds, the tube has been successfully unclogged.
5.10.4 Replacing Pump Tube

When to do
5-72
5 Modules and Units
Replace the pump tube when it is aged or leaking or has not been maintained for a half year.
Maintenance Tools
Cross screwdriver, pump tube.
Precautions
Biohazards
Procedure:
1 Ensure the analyzer is on idle (standby) condition. Open the ISE cover on the right
side analyzer panel.
2 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> ISE -> Remove Reagent Pack.
3 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> ISE -> Replace Pump Tube and
Calibrator Tube.
4 Select Pump Tube.
5 Replace it with new one. Make sure the connectors and tubes are correctly
connected; otherwise ISE module failure may occur.
6 Load the reagent pack and the procedure is completed.
7 Install back the right side panel.
8 Record the maintenance log.

Perform ISE pump calibration and if it succeeds, the tube has been successfully replaced.
5.10.5 Replacing Calibrator Tube

When to do
Replace the calibrator tube when it is aged or leaking or has not been maintained for over one
year.
Maintenance Tools
Cross screwdriver, calibrator tube
Precautions
Biohazards
Procedure:
2 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> ISE -> Remove Reagent Pack.
3 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> ISE -> Replace Pump Tube and
Calibrator Tube.
4 Select Calibrator Tube.
5 Replace it with new one. Make sure the connectors and tubes are correctly
connected; otherwise ISE module failure may occur.
6 Load the reagent pack and the procedure is completed.

5Modules and Units

8 Record the maintenance log.

Perform ISE pump calibration and if it succeeds, the tube has been successfully replaced.
5.10.6 Inventory Calculation of Reagent Pack

Reagent pack as one part of the ISE module should be installed as instructed by this manual.
You should install reagent pack while the analyzer is powered off, and then check the reagent
inventory and prime the ISE module with Calibrator A and B. If the reagent pack is not properly
installed, error may be produced in inventory calculation, and the actual volume may differ
from that displayed on the screen.
The following operations may result in the actual inventory of the ISE reagent pack less than
the displayed one.
1. When the analyzer is turned on and the ISE module is in failure status, the reagent pack is
changed, without recovering the module failure or checking the inventory immediately.
Operation explanation: When the ISE module is in Stopped status, the software will stop
writing volume information into the reagent pack chip. However, the analyzer will
automatically execute the sip action of the ISE module during startup to consume certain
amount of reagent. Therefore, when the reagent pack is replaced, but the ISE module is not
restored or the screen display refreshed, the software will not calculate the reagent
consumption volume until reading the new reagent pack. At this moment, the actual reagent
volume = displayed volume - consumption of Sip after replacing the reagent pack, which means
that the actual reagent volume is less than the displayed volume on the screen.
2. When the analyzer is powered on but the software is closed or the computer is shut down,
the reagent pack is changed.
Operation explanation: During shutdown, the analyzer will automatically execute the sip
action of the ISE module to consume certain amount of reagent. When the analyzer is started
up, the software will detect a new reagent pack and zero the consumption that is not written
into the reagent pack chip, and then display the volume read from the reagent pack chip. At this
moment, the actual reagent volume = displayed volume - consumption of Sip after replacing
the reagent pack, which means that the actual reagent volume is less than the displayed
volume on the screen.
the reagent pack is switched to another analyzer and then installed back after use.
Operation explanation: During shutdown process, the analyzer cannot detect if the reagent
pack is normal. If the reagent pack is installed on the current instrument after being used on
another one, the analyzer, when started up, will detect that the recorded reagent volume on the
chip is less than the original one, and the software will zero the reagent consumption of Sip
during shutdown and display the read volume on the screen. At this moment, the actual
reagent volume = displayed volume - consumption of Sip during shutdown (with reagent pack
installed), which means that the actual reagent volume is less than the displayed volume on the
screen.
4. The ISE module is de-configured, but the reagent pack is still on the instrument.
Operation explanation: Though the ISE module is de-configured, the original reagent pack
information is not cleared from the database. When the ISE module is configured again with
the same reagent pack, the Sip period without ISE module will be included in calculation of the
reagent consumption.
5-74
5 Modules and Units
NOTE:
 In condition 1, restore the ISE module and check the reagent inventory immediately
to minimize or eliminate the calculation error.
 In condition 2 and 3, before running the operating software to start up the analyzer,
remove the reagent pack and then run the operating software. After the startup
procedure is complete, re-install the reagent pack and inquire the reagent volume
immediately to minimize or eliminate the calculation error.
 In condition 4, remove the reagent pack and then de-configure the ISE module.
The following operations may result in the actual inventory of the ISE reagent pack more than
the displayed one.
1. When the analyzer is turned on and the ISE reagent pack is changed, without checking the
inventory immediately.
Operation explanation: The analyzer will automatically refresh the ISE reagent consumption,
by subtracting the consumption of calibrator A or B from the known volume (of the original
reagent pack) and writing it into the reagent pack chip, when calibrator A or B is consumed for
1%. The written volume is based on the original reagent pack before replacement, and the
volume of a used reagent pack is often less than that of a new one. So the volume recorded on
the chip of the new reagent pack is less than the actual volume, and the actual volume is
greater than the displayed volume on the screen.
the reagent pack is removed for storage, and re-installed before the operating software is run.
Operation explanation: During shutdown process, the analyzer cannot detect if the reagent
pack is normal. If the reagent pack is loaded before the analyzer is started up, the analyzer,
when started up, will detect that the reagent volume recorded on the chip is same as that
recorded by the software, but the software will confirm by mistake the reagent consumption of
sip during shutdown. (Actually, no reagent is consumed.) Therefore, after calculating the
reagent consumption, the software will write the new volume information onto the chip and
display it on the screen. At this moment, the actual reagent volume = displayed volume +
consumption of Sip during shutdown (with reagent pack installed), which means that the
actual reagent volume is greater than the displayed volume on the screen.
3. The analyzer is powered off after the operating software is closed, and it is powered on again
before the operating software is run.
Operation explanation: When closed normally, the operating software cannot detect if the ISE
module is working. When powered on before the software is run, the analyzer, when started up,
will detect that the reagent volume recorded on the chip is same as that recorded by the
software, but the software will confirm by mistake the reagent consumption of sip during
shutdown. (Actually, no reagent is consumed because the ISE module is not working while the
analyzer is powered off.) Therefore, after calculating the reagent consumption, the software
will write the new volume information onto the chip and display it on the screen. At this
moment, the actual reagent volume = displayed volume + consumption of Sip during shutdown
(with reagent pack installed), which means that the actual reagent volume is greater than the
displayed volume on the screen.
NOTE:
 In condition 1, inquire the ISE reagent volume immediately to minimize or eliminate
the calculation error.
 In condition 2 and 3, before running the operating software to start up the analyzer,
remove the reagent pack and then run the operating software. After the startup
procedure is complete, re-install the reagent pack and inquire the reagent volume
immediately to minimize or eliminate the calculation error.

6 Hardware Circuits
6.1 Overview
This chapter introduces the functions of PCBA of
BS-410/BS-410E/BS-410S/BS-430/BS-450/BS-460/BS-470/BS-470E. The PCBA is the same
for three models. Therefore, all models are collectively referred to as BS-460.
6.2 Precautions
NOTE:
While the whole unit is working, do not touch the hardware circuit boards with your hands or other objects.
Before removing a circuit board, disconnect the instrument from the (AC) power supply. Please wear a pair of
anti-static gloves or take other measures to prevent static electricity prior to removing a circuit board.
6.3 Summary of PCBAs

The table below provides a summary of the PCBAs used on the
BS-410/BS-410E/BS-410S/BS-430/BS-450/BS-460/BS-470/BS-470E Chemistry Analyzer and
briefly describes their functions.
Table 6.1 Sequence number and function description of PCBAs
PCBA Function Descriptions No.
Main Control Board The main control board is the control center of #1
051-001799-00 the BS-460. It is mainly used to fulfill the
following tasks: communicating with a computer
through the RS232 serial port to transmit data and
instructions; communicating with the smart
modules, including the ISE module, through the
extended serial ports to transmit data and
instructions; and controlling digital
potentiometer adjustment and photoelectric data
collection of the AD collection board and
receiving the photoelectric data.
It provides the BDM/JTAG interface for debugging
software and downloading application programs.
The application software of the main control
board can be updated through the RS232 serial
port.
6-1
6Hardware Circuits

Reaction carousel The reaction carousel temperature collection #2
temperature board adjusts the signal of the reaction carousel
collection board temperature sensor and controls it for AD
051-002415-00 conversion. It provides a serial peripheral
interface (SPI) and a power supply jack for the
reaction carousel heater and connects with the
wash solution temperature control board via the
slip ring.
Cleaning Fluid The cleaning fluid temperature collection board #3
Temperature adjusts the signals of two cleaning fluid
Collection Board temperature sensors, one whole unit cleaning
BA38-30-88228 fluid temperature sensor and one environment
temperature sensor, and controls them for AD
conversion. It provides an SPI interface for
connecting with the wash temperature control
board.
3-carousel Drive The 3-carousel, temperature control and cuvette #4
Board wash drive board is used to drive and control the
051-001801-00 sample carousel, reagent carousel, reaction
carousel, cuvette wash station, wash syringes,
and related components.
3-probe Drive Board The 3-probe drive board is used to control and #5
051-002436-00 drive the sample probe, reagent probe, sample
mixer, reagent mixer, and related components.
Pump/Valve Drive The pump/valve drive board drives the auto wash #6
Board pumps and valves, and transmits floater signal.
051-000957-00
Reagent The reagent refrigeration board is used to drive #7
refrigeration board the reagent refrigeration circuit (including
051-000052-00 heatsinks) and fans.
Sample Probe Level The two boards respectively sense the level of #8
Sense Board samples and reagents, and detect/convert the
801-BA80-00036-00 signals of the two vertical obstruct detection
Reagent Probe Level sensors.
Sense Board
801-BA80-00030-00
Clog Detection Board The clog detection board detects clogs inside the #9
801-BA80-00048-00 sample probe by checking the pressure of the
fluidic tube when the sample probe aspirates
samples.
AD collection board The AD collection board adjusts the photoelectric #10
BA40-30-61365 signals output by the pre-amplification board and
(BA40-20-61364) controls it for AD conversion. It provides an SPI
interface for connecting with the main control
board.
Pre-amplification The pre-amplification board converts the signals #11
Board of the discrete photodiode array from analog to
BA40-30-61363 digital.
(BA40-20-61362)
6-2
6 Hardware Circuits

Wash Probe The wash probe obstruction photocoupler #12
Obstruction conversion board is used to adapt the wash probe
Photocoupler obstruction photocoupler.
Conversion Board
051-001147-00
Rotation speed It adapts the rotation speed photocoupler. #13
photocoupler
conversion board
051-001620-00
Analog Power Supply The analog power supply conversion board #14
Conversion Board converts the A5V DC/DC digital of the BA40 power
801-BA38-00005-00 supply assembly into +/-12V analog and then
provides it for the AC collection board and
pre-amplification board.
Power Supply Board Provides power supply for the water supply #15
of Water Supply module.
Module (Optional)
801-BA40-00053-00
Control Board of Controls the start and stop of the diaphragm #16
Drainage Module pump of the drainage module.
(Optional)
BA40-30-61869
12V power supply These boards are used to power the whole unit, #17
board outputting the A12V, A5V digital, D12V/E12V
801-BA40-00029-00 analog, C12V power, B24V power, and the B12V
power for partial radiators.
24V power supply #18
board
801-BA40-00030-00
Power Supply
Conversion Board
801-BA40-00031-00
6.4 Locations of PCBA

The figure below shows the locations of the PCBAs on the whole unit.

6Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.1 Top view of the analyzer

Rotation speed
Reagent level sense Sample level sense
photocoupler
board board
conversion board
Pre-amplification
AD collection board
Board
Figure 6.2 Rear right view of the analyzer
Cleaning Fluid
Temperature
Collection Board
Pump/Valve Drive
Board
6-4
6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.3 Front left view of the analyzer
Reagent
refrigeration
board
3-carousel Drive
Board
Main Control
Board
Power Supply
Module
3-probe Drive
Board
Figure 6.4 Front right view of the analyzer
Clog Detection
Board

6Hardware Circuits
6.5 Functions of PCBA

6.5.1 Control Structure
The BS-460 Chemistry Analyzer consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer), operation unit
(computer), and output unit (printer).
The analyzing unit (analyzer) is composed of the temperature control system, reaction system
(including ISE module), photometric system, sample/reagent handling system, mixer system,
and cuvette wash station.
The general control structure of the BS-460 is shown in the figure below.
Figure 6.5 Control Structure
Optical System
Photoelectric
signal
Control
signal Temperature
control signal
Temperature
Computer RS232 Hardware System
control system
Control signal
Control signal
Position signal
Transmission and
execution system
The hardware system has the following functions:

 Communicating with a computer through the serial port, and receiving/sending
commands, responses, and data.
 Controlling data collection of the photometric system.
 Controlling movement and status signal collection of execution units.
 Controlling working and temperature control signal collection of the temperature
control system.
6.5.2 Main Control Board

Functions and Principles
The main control board is intended to implement the following functions:
 Communicating with a computer through the serial port to transmit data and
instructions and to update the application programs of the PCBA.
 Communicating with the smart modules, including the ISE module, through the
extended serial ports to transmit data and instructions.
 Controlling digital potentiometer adjustment and photoelectric data collection of
the AD collection board and receiving the photoelectric data.
 Providing the BDM/JTAG interface for debugging software and downloading
application programs.
The figure below shows the relation between the main control board and other PCBAs.
6-6
6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.6 Relation between main control board and other PCBAs
PC
Middle-layer unit
3-probe Drive Board
AD collection board
refrigeration board
3-carousel Drive
ISE module
Reagent
Board
The functional diagram of the main control board is as shown below.

Figure 6.7 Functional diagram of main control board
BDM
Power Supply connector for PC
debugging
BDM UART
I2C
RTC
DEVICE
USB
SPI
EEPROM
CPU
FEC
PHY
SDRAMC
SDRAM
USB
PCI
USB Device
Host
Flex Bus
FLASH
Reagent refrigeration board
AD collection board
Main FPGA 3-carousel drive board

Control 3-probe drive board
Board ISE module
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the main control board is as shown below.

6Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.8 Main control board PCB
Connectors
The main control board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J1): 6-pin, providing +/-12V analog and +5V digital for PCBAs.
Pin No. Signal Reference Value

1 +12V 11.4 to 12.6V
2 -12V -11.4 to -12.6V
3 +5V 4.75~5.25V
4 12VGND /
5 12VGND /
6 GND /
Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals:

 Serial port (J2) for PC: 10-pin, RS232, used for communication with a computer.
 Connector (J9) for smart module: 34-pin, TTL, used for communication with the
three-probe drive board.
 Connector (J6) for smart module: 34-pin, TTL, used for communication with the
three-carousel drive board.
 Connector (J8) for AD collection board: DB25, used for communication with the AD
collection board and providing power supply for it.
 Connector (J7) for ISE module: 10-pin, RS232, used for communication with the ISE
module.
 Connector (J6) for mixer motor: 40-pin, TTL, used for communication with the
mixer motor drive board.
 Connector (J5) for reagent refrigeration board: 8-pin, RS422, used for
communication with the reagent refrigeration board.
6-8
6 Hardware Circuits
Connectors for debugging:

 BDM connector (J13): 26-pin, used for debugging the CPU software.
 JTAG connector (J1): 10-pin, used for debugging the FPGA.
Switches and jumpers

The main control board contains the following switches and jumpers.
RST key (S1): used to reset the CPU of the PCBA.
Indicators
The main control board contains the following indicators.
 +12V power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is
turned on, indicating that the +12V power supply has been connected.
 -12V power supply indicator (D1): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is
turned on, indicating that the -12V power supply has been connected.
 +3.3V power supply indicator (D2): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is
turned on, indicating that the +3.3V power supply has been connected.
 D13: orange FPGA configuration indicator. On indicates FPGA is successfully
configured.
 D14: green FPGA working status indicator. LED is flashing every second, indicating
FPGA works normally.
 D17: green Reserved. Constantly lit.
 D18: green When the photoelectric signal collecting is interrupted, the indicator is
lit.
 D19: green When communication with the lower layer unit is interrupted, the
indicator is lit.
Test points
In the following positions of the main control board can signal tests be performed.
 12V: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 11.4 - 12.6V.
 -12V: -12V power supply input. Normal range: -11.4 - -12.6V.
 VCC: +5V power supply input. Normal range: 4.75 - 5.25V.
 VDD: +3.3V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the major
digital circuits of the PCBA. Normal range: 2.97 - 3.63V.
 2V5: +2.5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the DDR
memory. Normal range: 2.25 - 2.75V.
 1V5: +1.5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the CPU core.
Normal range: 1.35 - 1.65V.

6Hardware Circuits
Installation methods and precautions
NOTE:
Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear a pair of anti-static
gloves or wrist straps.
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.
Check the connectors with locks and ensure they have been locked properly.
Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.
It requires great force to plug/unplug the J3~J4,J10~J11connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while
plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
After connecting J7 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides of it.
6.5.3 3-probe Drive Board

Functions and principles
 The 3-probe drive board controls and drives the step motors, DC motors and valves,
and detects the signal of relevant sensor.
 Receiving instructions from or sending data to the main control board through the
relevant interface.
 Controlling and driving the reagent probe, sample probe, sample mixer, reagent
mixer, valves, syringes, etc.
 Detecting position sensor signal and horizontal obstruct detection sensor signal.
 Detecting level sense signal and vertical obstruct signal through the interface for the
level sense board.
 Setting up level detection sensibility through the serial port for the level sense
board.
 Detecting sample probe clog signal through the interface for the sample probe clog
detection board, and reading clog pressure through the relevant serial port.
The functional diagram of the 3-probe drive board is as shown below.
Figure 6.9 Function diagram of 3-probe drive board
3-probe Drive Board

Power drive circuit
Step motor
Reagent probe unit
Pump
Valve
Main Control Board Sample Probe Unit
Position sen sor d etection

Interface circuit
Obstruc tion sensor

Mixer Unit detec tion
Level sense
Clog detection
Description
The PCB layout of the 3-probe drive board is as shown below.
6-10
6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.10 3-probe drive board PCB
Connectors:
The 3-probe drive board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J3): 10-pin, providing A12V analog, +/-12V, +5V digital, and 24V for the
PCBAs.
Table 6.2 Power supply connectors
1 VCC 4.85 – 5.25V
2 +24V 23.5 to 26V
3 +24V 23.5 to 26V
4 +12V 11.4 to 12.6V
5 -12V -11.4 to -12.6V
6 GND /
7 GND /
8 GND /
9 +12VA 11.4 - 12.6
10 AGND /

 Main control board communication serial port (J27): 34-pin, TTL, used for
communicating with the main control board.
Level sense communication serial port for reagent probe and sample probe (J37):
4-pin, TTL, used for communicating with the reagent and sample level sense boards.
 Clog detection communication serial port (J17): 8-pin, TTL, used for communicating
with the clog detection board.
Detection and control connectors:
 Sample level sense signal connector (J40): 4-pin, used for detecting sample probe
level sense signal.
 Sample probe vertical obstruct sensor connector (J40): 4-pin, used for detecting
sample probe obstruct in vertical direction.

6Hardware Circuits
 Reagent level sense signal connector (J39): 4-pin, used for detecting reagent probe
level sense signal.
 Reagent probe vertical obstruct sensor connector (J39): 4-pin, used for detecting
reagent probe obstruct in vertical direction.
 Clog signal connector (J24): 10-pin, used for detecting clog signal and empty
aspirate signal.
 Photocoupler detection connector 1 (J26): 40-pin, used for detecting home position
of sample syringe, reagent syringe, mixer assembly, and reagent probe assembly.
 Photocoupler detection connector 2 (J28): 26-pin, used for detecting home position
and horizontal obstruct of sample probe assembly and mixer head motor obstruct.
 Probe exterior wash valve connector (J31): 20-pin, used for controlling exterior
wash valve of sample probe and reagent probe, reagent and sample mixer wash
valve, and probe interior wash pump.
 Probe interior wash drive connector (J32): 6-pin, used for driving interior wash
valve of sample probe and reagent probe.
 Reagent horizontal motor drive connector (J4): 4-pin, used for driving the reagent
horizontal motor.
 Reagent vertical motor drive connector (J5): 4-pin, used for driving the reagent
vertical motor.
 Reagent syringe motor drive connector (J6): 4-pin, used for driving the reagent
syringe motor.
 Sample vertical motor drive connector (J10): 4-pin, used for driving the sample
vertical motor.
 Sample horizontal motor drive connector (J11): 4-pin, used for driving the sample
horizontal motor.
 Sample syringe motor drive connector (J12): 4-pin, used for driving the sample
syringe motor.
 Mixer vertical motor drive connector (J13): 4-pin, used for driving the mixer vertical
motor.
 Mixer horizontal motor drive connector (J14): 4-pin, used for driving the mixer
horizontal motor.
 Mixer head motor drive connector (J16): 4-pin, used for driving the mixer head
motor.

Indicators
The 3-probe drive board contains the following indicators.
Power supply:
 -12V power supply indicator (D7): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is
turned on, indicating that the -12V power supply has been connected.
 +24V power supply indicator (D10): green It is lit when the analyzer power switch
is turned on, indicating that the +24V power supply has been connected.
6-12
6 Hardware Circuits
 FPGA working indicator (D11): green. It is flashing when FPGA works normally.
Test points
In the following positions of the main control board can signal tests be performed.
 J1.1: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 11.4-12.6V.
 J1.2: -12V power supply input. Normal range: -11.4 - -12.6V.
 J1.3: +5V power supply input. Normal range: 4.75 - 5.25V.
 TP20: +3.3V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the major
digital circuits of the PCBA. Normal range: 2.97 - 3.63V.
 TP17: +2.5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to download the FPGA.
Normal range: 2.25 - 2.75V.
 TP18: +1.5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the FPGA
core. Normal range: 1.35 - 1.65V.
NOTE:
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J3, J26, J28, J31, J35 and J27. Hold the PCBA by its
edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
6.5.4 3-carousel Drive Board

The 3-carousel drive board receives commands from the main control board and then analyzes
them; detects position of the three carousels and cuvette wash station, and drives these units;
detects the temperature of the temperature sensors and controls the heaters. The major
functions of the PCBA include:
 Supporting communication through the serial port. Making the CPUs communicate
with the main control board, receiving and analyzing the instructions from it.
 Making the CPUs output control signals to each execution unit.
 Receiving position sensor signals of relevant execution units, auto wash bump
prevention signals, and other status signals.
 Detecting the temperature of reaction carousel solid heat, cleaning fluid preheat and
the environment, and controlling the heaters.
 Receiving fluid level sensor signals from the hydropneumatic system, and
controlling the fluidic valves.
The functional diagram of the 3-carousel drive board is as shown below.

6Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.11 Functional diagram of 3-carousel drive board
TXD_MCU1+ Bus
TXD_MCU1- TXD_MCU1
RXD_MCU1+ RXD_MCU1 Input signal Reaction carousel motor
RXD_MCU1-
Reaction
Output signal
Carousel Unit INT0
2-channel Position sensor
INT1
RST
Bus
TXD_MCU2+
Input signal
TXD_MCU2-
RXD_MCU2+
RXD_MCU2-
TXD_MCU2 Sample Sample carousel motor
RXD_MCU2 Output signal
Carousel Unit INT0
2-channel Position sensor
INT1
RST
Comunication Interface
Bus
TXD_MCU3+
TXD_MCU3- Reagent carousel motor
Input signal
RXD_MCU3+
RXD_MCU3-
TXD_MCU3
RXD_MCU3
Reagent 2-channel Position sensor
Carousel Unit Output signal
INT0 FPGA
INT1
RST
Vertical motor for

Bus washing
TXD_MCU4+
TXD_MCU4-
Input signal
Wash syringe motor
RXD_MCU4+
RXD_MCU4-
TXD_MCU4 Cuvette Wash 2-channel Position sensor
Unit Pump/Valve
INT0
INT1
RST
3-carousel Drive
Board
Reaction carousel temperature
Bus collection board
Cleaning Fluid Temperature
TXD_MCU5+ Input signal Collection Board
TXD_MCU5-
RXD_MCU5+
TXD_MCU5 Temperature Heating drive
RXD_MCU5- control unit Heating drive
INT0
INT1
RST
Description
The PCB layout of the 3-carousel drive board is as shown below.
6-14
6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.12 3-carousel drive board PCB
Connectors:
The 3-carousel drive board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J8): 12-pin, providing +/-12V analog, +5V digital, and 24V for the PCBAs.
1 +24V 23.5 to 26V
2 +24V 23.5 to 26V
3 +24V 23.5 to 26V
4 +VCC 4.85~5.25V
5 +12V 11.4 to 12.6V
6 -12V -11.4 to -12.6V
7 GND /
8 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /
11 AGND /
12 AGND /
1 +24V 23.5 to 26V

 Main control board communication serial port (J24): 34-pin, TTL, used for
communicating with the main control board.
 Reaction carousel temperature collection communication serial port (J21): 8-pin,
TTL, used for communicating with the reaction carousel temperature collection
board.
 Reagent bar code communication serial port (J12): 10-pin, RS-232, used for
communicating with the reagent bar code reader.

6Hardware Circuits
 Sample bar code communication serial port (J11): 10-pin, RS-232, used for
communicating with the sample bar code reader.
 Cleaning fluid temperature collection communication serial port (J20): 14-pin, SPI,
used for communicating with the cleaning fluid temperature collection board.
 Lamp control signal connector (J1): 8-pin, used for controlling the lamp brightness.
 Cuvette wash syringe photocoupler connector (J15): 9-pin, used for detecting the
home position of cuvette wash syringe.
 Floater connector (J27): 14-pin, used for detecting the status of fluidic floaters.
 Vacuum pump and refrigeration fan jam detection interface (J22): 4-pin, used for
detecting jams of the refrigeration fans.
 Photocoupler connector (J26): 34-pin, used for detecting the photocouplers of the
sample carousel, reagent carousel, reaction carousel, cuvette wash station, and wash
syringes.
 Cuvette wash pump/valve control connector (J2): 34-pin, used for controlling the
pumps and valves of the cuvette wash unit.
 Cleaning fluid heater drive connector (J9): 12-pin, used for driving the cleaning fluid
heater and wash solution heater.
 Reaction carousel heater drive connector (J10): 6-pin, used for driving the reaction
carousel heater.
 Reagent carousel motor drive connector (J4): 4-pin, used for driving the reagent
carousel motor.
 Sample carousel motor drive connector (J5): 4-pin, used for driving the sample
carousel motor.
 Cuvette wash motor drive connector (J6): 4-pin, used for driving the cuvette wash
motor.
 Reaction carousel motor drive connector (J3): 4-pin, used for driving the reaction
carousel motor.
 Cuvette wash syringe motor drive connector (J7): 4-pin, used for driving the cuvette
wash syringe motor.
Indicators
The 3-carousel board contains the following indicators.
 D19: green It is lit when the analyzer power switch is turned on, indicating that the
3.3V power supply has been connected.
5V power supply has been connected.
+12V power supply has been connected.
-12V power supply has been connected.
6-16
6 Hardware Circuits
 D32: green It indicates the working status of cleaning fluid heater 2. It is lit when
the heater is turned on.
 D33: green It indicates the working status of cleaning fluid heater 3. It is lit when
the heater is turned on.
 D36: green It indicates the working status of reaction carousel heater 1. It is lit
when the heater is turned on.
 D38: green It indicates the status of the high-concentration waste tank. It is lit when
the waste tank is full.
 D39: green It indicates the status of the waste buffer tank. It is lit when the waste
buffer tank is full.
 D2: green It is flashing when FPGA works normally.
Test points
In the following positions of the 3-carousel board can signal tests be performed.
 Lamp control signal connector (J1): 8-pin, used for controlling the lamp brightness.
 Cuvette wash syringe photocoupler connector (J15): 9-pin, used for detecting the
home position of cuvette wash syringe.
 Refrigeration fan jam detection interface (J22): 4-pin, used for detecting jams of the
refrigeration fans.
 Photocoupler connector (J26): 34-pin, used for detecting the photocouplers of the
sample carousel, reagent carousel, reaction carousel, cuvette wash station, and wash
syringes.
 Cleaning fluid heater drive connector (J9): 12-pin, used for driving the cleaning fluid
heater and wash solution heater.
 Reaction carousel heater drive connector (J10): 6-pin, used for driving the reaction
carousel heater.
 Reagent carousel motor drive connector (J4): 4-pin, used for driving the reagent
carousel motor.
 Sample carousel motor drive connector (J5): 4-pin, used for driving the sample
carousel motor.
 Cuvette wash motor drive connector (J6): 4-pin, used for driving the cuvette wash
motor.
 Reaction carousel motor drive connector (J3): 4-pin, used for driving the reaction
carousel motor.
 Cuvette wash syringe motor drive connector (J7): 4-pin, used for driving the cuvette
wash syringe motor.

6Hardware Circuits
NOTE:
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J2, J8, J9, J28, J29,J26, and J27. Hold the PCBA by
its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
6.5.5 Pump/Valve Drive Board

The pump/valve drive board receives pump/valve control signals from the 3-carousel control
drive board and 3-probe control drive board, drives BS-460 pumps, and transmits fluidic
sensors' signals to the 3-carousel control drive board.
The functional diagram of the pump/valve drive board is as shown below.
Figure 6.13 Functional diagram of pump/valve drive board
3-carousel
board
Pump
3-probe Pump/
board Valve
Valve Drive
Board
Power supply Fluid level

board sensor
Description
The PCB layout of the communication adapter board is as shown below.
6-18
6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.14 Communication conversion board PCB
Connectors:
The pump/valve drive board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J1): 12-pin, providing +/-12V analog, +5V digital and 24V for the PCBAs.
1 +12V 11.4 to 12.6V
2 GND /
3 +12V 11.4 to 12.6V
4 GND /
5 +12V 11.4 to 12.6V
6 GND /
7 +12V 11.4 to 12.6V
8 GND /
9 +24V 23.5 to 26V
10 GND /
11 +24 23.5 – 26V
12 GND /

 Floater conversion connector (J5): 14-pin, used for feeding back status of fluidic
floaters to the 3-carousel drive board.

6Hardware Circuits
 Pump/valve control connector 1 (J3): 20-pin, used for receiving pump/valve control
signal transmitted from the 3-probe drive board and 3-carousel drive board and the
24V pump control signal.
 24V pump drive connector (J7): 16-pin, used for driving the deionized water
circulating pump.
 Valve drive connector 1 (J9): 34-pin, used for driving the exterior wash valve of
SV08 reagent probe, the exterior wash valve of SV07 sample probe, the SV10 sample
mixer wash valve, the SV11 reagent mixer wash valve, the SV01 water inlet valve,
the SV16 cuvette 3-phase dispensing valve, the SV17 cuvette 4-phase dispensing
valve, the SV18 cuvette 4-phase dispensing valve, the SV15 cuvette 1/2-phase
dispensing valve, and the SV19 cuvette 6-phase dispensing valve.
 Valve drive connector 2 (J12): 26-pin, used for driving the P11 cuvette 1/2-phase
waste pump, the P15 cuvette 8-phase waste pump, the P14 cuvette 7-phase waste
pump, the P13 cuvette 5/6-phase waste pump, the P04 probe interior wash pump,
and the P12 cuvette 3/4-phase waste pump.
Indicators
The pump/valve drive board contains the following indicators.
 D1: green It is lit when the analyzing unit power switch is turned on, indicating that
the 5V power supply for 3-carousel drive board has been connected.
 D28: green It is lit when the analyzing unit power switch is turned on, indicating
that the 5V power supply for 3-probe drive board has been connected.
Test points
In the following positions of the pump/valve drive board can signal tests be performed.
 J1.1: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 11.4-12.6V.
 J1.9: +24V power supply input. Normal range: 23.5 - 26V.
NOTE:
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J2, J3, J5, J9, and J12. Hold the PCBA by its edge
while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
6.5.6 Rotation Speed Photocoupler Conversion Board

The communication adapter board is intended for the following functions:
 Use to connect the photocoupler of the mixer rotation speed.
 Providing the signal of the mixer rotation speed and the mixer drive board.
6-20
6 Hardware Circuits
Description
The PCB layout of the communication adapter board is as shown below.
Table 6.5 PCB layout (TOP layer) of communication conversion board
Figure 6.15 PCB layout (BOTTOM layer) of communication conversion board
Connectors
 J1: connector for the photocoupler of the mixer rotation speed and mixer drive
board.
Indicators
No
NOTE:
6.5.7 Reaction Carousel Temperature Collection Board

The BS-460 has one reaction carousel temperature collection board, which is used to:
 Collect/Convert the reaction carouse temperatre sensor signals and output them to
the wash temperature control board.

6Hardware Circuits
The functional diagram of the reaction carousel temperature collection board is as shown
below.
Figure 6.16 Functional diagram of reaction carousel temperature collection board
Temperature
sensor 1
Reaction carousel
Slip ring
3-carousel Temperature
Drive Board
collection board Temperature
sensor 3
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the reaction carousel temperature collection board is as shown below.
Figure 6.17 Reaction carousel temperature collection board PCB
Connectors
The reaction carousel temperature collection board contains the following connectors.
Connectors 1-3 (J1-J3) for reaction carousel temperature sensor: 3-pin. Used to connect the
reaction carousel temperature sensor with the temperature detection circuit.
Table 6.6 Connectors for reaction carousel temperature sensor
Pin No. Signal Name I/O Description Valid Level and Type
1 SHIELD / Shielded wire of /
sensor
2 REF I Signal cable of /
sensor
3 PT1000 I Signal cable of /
sensor
Reaction carousel ground connector (J4): 2-pin, used to connect the carousel to the GND of
board, with the other end fixing on the reaction carousel by using M3 pan head screws.
Table 6.7 Reaction carousel ground connector
1 GND / GND /
2 GND / GND /
6-22
6 Hardware Circuits
Connector for connecting the reaction carousel temperature collection board and the slip ring
(J5): 20-pin, used to connect the reaction carousel temperature collection board and the
3-carousel control drive board.
Table 6.8 Connectors for slip ring
Pin No. Signal Name I/O Description Valid Level
and Type
1 SHIELD / Shielding /
ground
2 SHIELD / Shielding /
ground
3 / / / /
4 / / / /
5 GND / Analog ground /
7 / / / /
8 / / / /
9 RST I RST reset signal 5V TTL
10 TXD I Serial port TXD 5V TTL
11 / I / 5V TTL
12 RXD O Serial port RXD 5V TTL
13 ISP O ISP downloading 5V TTL
signal
16 GND I Control signals 5V TTL
of multiplexer
switch
17 VPP I Control signals 5V TTL
of multiplexer
switch
18 VPP / 12V power /
supply input
20 GND / Analog ground 5V TTL
Indicators
The reaction carousel temperature collection board contains the following indicators.
 PCB status (D1): green. When the PCB is normal, the indicator will flash at an
interval of 1 second.
Test points
In the following positions of the reaction carousel temperature collection board can signal tests
be performed.
 TP1: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V±5%, that is, 11.4-12.6V.
 TP2: +5V power supply, secondary power supply. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is,
4.75-5.25V.
 TP3: +3.3V power supply, secondary power supply. Normal range: 3.3V±5%, that is,
3.14-3.47V.
6Hardware Circuits
 TP5: reaction carousel temperature collection board ground.
NOTE:
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on the PCBA. Check if the PCBA
has been locked tightly.
It requires great force to plug/unplug connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging the
connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
6.5.8 Heater Conversion Board of Reaction Carousel

The BS-460 has one reaction carousel heater conversion board, which is used to:
 Provide the reaction carousel heater and temperature switch connectors, and
connect the 3-carousel control drive board via the slip ring to control the heater.
The functional diagram of the reaction carousel heater conversion board is as shown below:
Figure 6.18 Functional diagram of reaction carousel temperature collection board
Heater Temperature
Slip ring
protection switch
3-carousel conversion board
Drive Board of reaction Heater
carousel
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the reaction carousel temperature collection board is as shown below.
Figure 6.19 Reaction carousel temperature collection board PCB
Connectors
The reaction carousel temperature collection board contains the following connectors.
6-24
6 Hardware Circuits
Connectors 1-3 (J1-J3) for reaction carousel temperature sensor: 3-pin. Used to connect the
reaction carousel temperature sensor with the temperature detection circuit.
Table 6.9 Connectors for reaction carousel temperature sensor
1 SHIELD / Shielded wire of /
sensor
2 REF I Signal cable of /
sensor
3 PT1000 I Signal cable of /
sensor
Reaction carousel ground connector (J4): 2-pin, used to connect the carousel to the GND of
board, with the other end fixing on the reaction carousel by using M3 pan head screws.
Table 6.10 Reaction carousel ground connector
1 GND / GND /
2 GND / GND /
Connector for connecting the reaction carousel temperature collection board and the slip ring
(J5): 20-pin, used to connect the reaction carousel temperature collection board and the
3-carousel control drive board.
Table 6.11 Connectors for slip ring
1 SHIELD / Shielding ground /
2 SHIELD / Shielding ground /
3 / / / /
4 / / / /
7 / / / /
8 / / / /
9 RST I RST reset signal 5V TTL
10 TXD I Serial port TXD 5V TTL
11 / I / 5V TTL
12 RXD O Serial port RXD 5V TTL
13 ISP O ISP downloading 5V TTL
signal
16 GND I Control signals of 5V TTL
multiplexer
switch
17 VPP I Control signals of 5V TTL
multiplexer
switch
18 VPP / 12V power /
supply input

6Hardware Circuits
20 GND / Analog ground 5V TTL
Indicators
The reaction carousel temperature collection board contains the following indicators.
 PCB status (D1): green. When the PCB is normal, the indicator will flash at an
interval of 1 second.
Test points
In the following positions of the reaction carousel temperature collection board can signal tests
be performed.
 TP1: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V±5%, that is, 11.4-12.6V.
 TP2: +5V power supply, secondary power supply. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is,
4.75-5.25V.
 TP3: +3.3V power supply, secondary power supply. Normal range: 3.3V±5%, that is,
3.14-3.47V.
 TP5: reaction carousel temperature collection board ground.
NOTE:
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on the PCBA. Check if the PCBA
has been locked tightly.
6.5.9 Cleaning Fluid Temperature Collection Board

The BS-460 has one cleaning fluid temperature collection board, which is mainly used to:
Process, collect and AD-convert signals of 1-channel temperature sensor of cleaning fluid and
1-channel temperature sensor of wash solution, and provide SPI access interface. The cleaning
fluid temperature collection board is connected with the wash temperature control board.
The functional diagram of the cleaning fluid temperature collection board is as shown below.
Figure 6.20 Functional diagram of cleaning fluid temperature collection board
Temperature sensor 1
Cleaning Fluid Temperature sensor 2

3-carousel Drive
Temperature
Board
Collection Board
Description
The PCB layout of the cleaning fluid temperature collection board is as shown below.
6-26
6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.21 Cleaning fluid temperature collection board PCB
Connectors
The cleaning fluid temperature collection board contains the following connectors:
Temperature sensor connectors 1-4 (J1-J4): 3-pin, used to connect the temperature sensor
with the temperature detection circuit.
Table 6.12 Connectors for temperature sensor
Pin No. Signal I/O Description Valid Level and
Name Type
1 SHIELD / Shielded wire of sensor /
2 AGND / Signal cable of sensor (analog /
ground)
3 NTC I Signal cable of sensor Analog
Connector J5 for wash temperature control board: 20-pin, used to power the PCBA and
transmit/control the signals.
Table 6.13 Connectors for wash temperature control board
Pin No. Signal Name I/O Description Valid Level and
Type
1 SGND / Enclosure ground /
2 SGND / Enclosure ground /
3 CS I AD chip selection TTL, valid in the
input case of low
level.
4 NC / NC /
5 SDO O AD chip data TTL
output
6 SCLK I AD chip clock TTL
input
7 NC / NC /
8 NC / NC /
9 NC / NC /
10 MUX_A I Channel A TTL

6Hardware Circuits
Pin No. Signal Name I/O Description Valid Level and

Type
11 VPP / 12V power supply /
input
12 MUX_B I Channel B TTL
13 GND / Ground /
14 GND / Ground /
15 GND / Ground /
16 NC / NC /
17 NC / NC /
18 NC / NC /
19 NC / NC /
20 NC / NC /
Indicators
The cleaning fluid temperature collection board contains the following indicators.
 +12V power supply indicator (D2): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +12V
power supply has been connected.
Test points
 In the following positions of the cleaning fluid temperature collection board can
signal tests be performed.
 VPP: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V±5%, that is, 11.4-12.6V.
 AVCC: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the analog
parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.
 VCC: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the digital parts
of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.
 GND1 and GND2: grounding terminals of the cleaning fluid temperature collection
board.
 AIN: AD collection signal test point.
 REF: reference voltage.
NOTE:
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on the PCBA.
6.5.10 AD collection board

The AD collection board is intended to implement the following functions:
 Adjusting gains of 12 photoelectric signals via a digital potentiometer.
6-28
6 Hardware Circuits
 Controlling the channel selection switch to switch among 12 channel signals at

different time.
 Converting photoelectric analog signals into digital signals via an AD converter and
then outputting the signals.
The figure below shows the relation between the AD collection board and other PCBAs.
Figure 6.22 Relation between AD collection board and other PCBAs
Pre-amplification
Board
AD collection
board
Main Control
Board
The functional diagram of the AD collection board is as shown below.

Figure 6.23 Functional diagram of AD collection board
Pre-amplification
Board
Adjusting gains of 12 photoelectric signals
Main Control
Board
Channel selection
ADC
switch
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the AD collection board is as shown below.

6Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.24 AD collection board PCB
Connectors
The AD collection board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply output connector (J1): 3-pin, used to provide +12V and -12V power supplies for
the pre-amplification board.
1 +12V 11.4 to 12.6V
2 AGND /
3 -12V -11.4 to -12.6V

Connector (J2) for pre-amplification board signal input: 8-pin, used to receive photoelectric
analog signals of six channels.
Table 6.15 Connector (J2) for pre-amplification board signal input
1 AGND /
2 Signal1 0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)
8 AGND_SHELD /
Connector (J3) for pre-amplification board signal input: 8-pin, used to receive photoelectric
6-30
6 Hardware Circuits
Table 6.16 Connector (J3) for pre-amplification board signal input

1 AGND /
4 Signa6 0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)
8 AGND_SHELD /
Main control board connector (P1): 25-pin, used for communication with the main control
board.
The AD collection board has no switches or jumpers.
Indicators
The AD collection board contains the following indicators.
Power supply:
 -12V power supply indicator (D14): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the -12V
Test points
In the following positions of the AD collection board can signal tests be performed.
 VG1: signal output of channel 340nm. Normal range: varies with the signal strength
and lies between 0-5V.
 VG10: signal output of channel 700nm. Normal range: varies with the signal
strength and lies between 0-5V.

6Hardware Circuits
 VDD: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V±5%, that is, 11.4-12.6V.
 VSS: -12V power supply input. Normal range: -12V±5%, that is, -11.4-12.6V.
 VCC: +5V power supply input. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.
NOTE:
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J2 and J3. Hold the PCBA by its edge while
plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
After connecting P1 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides of it.
6.5.11 Pre-amplification Board

The pre-amplification board is intended to implement the following functions:
 Converting optical signals into electric signals via a photodiode array.
 With the help of the back circuit, filtering signals and transmitting them to the AD
collection board after amplification.
The figure below shows the relation between the pre-amplification board and other PCBAs.
Figure 6.25 Relation between pre-amplification board and other PCBAs
Optical signal
Pre-amplification ADC collection
Board board
The functional diagram of the pre-amplification board is as shown below.

Figure 6.26 Functional diagram of pre-amplification board
Optical signal
PDA
Signal filter, amplifying
ADC collection
board
6-32
6 Hardware Circuits
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the pre-amplification board is as shown below.
Figure 6.27 Pre-amplification board PCB
Connectors
The pre-amplification board includes the following connectors.

6Hardware Circuits
Power supply:
Power supply input connector (J1): 3-pin, used to provide +12V and -12V power supplies for
the pre-amplification board.
1 +12V 11.4 to 12.6V
2 AGND /
3 -12V -11.4 to -12.6V

Connector (J2) for preamplifier board signal output: 8-pin, used to receive photoelectric analog
signals of six channels.
Table 6.18 Connector (J2) for pre-amplification board signal output
1 AGND /
2 Signal1 Depending on the actual
measuring light intensity.
8 AGND_SHELD /
Connector (J3) for pre-amplification board signal output: 8-pin, used to receive photoelectric
Table 6.19 Connector (J3) for pre-amplification board signal output
1 AGND /
4 Signa6 Depending on the actual
8 AGND_SHELD /
6-34
6 Hardware Circuits

The pre-amplification board has no switches or jumpers.
Indicators
The pre-amplification board is encapsulated inside the Optical measurement assembly and has
no indicators.
Test points
The pre-amplification board is encapsulated inside the Optical measurement assembly and
does not need maintenance, and it therefore, has no test points.

Since encapsulated inside the Optical measurement assembly, the pre-amplification board
should be maintained together with the PDA assembly rather than maintained independently.
6.5.12 Level Sense Board

The BS-460 has three level sense boards, two of them used for detecting reagent level and the
other one used for detecting sample level. It fulfills the following functions:
 Sensing the reagent and sample levels. The three boards are identical in circuit
structure and interfaces and capable of detecting the fluid level steadily and reliably,
especially allowing the sample probe to correctly detecting the fluid level inside
reaction cuvettes. ·
 Outputting level sense signals to the control drive board through the probe/mixer
conversion board when the probe contacts the fluid level.
 Providing vertical obstruction detection and outputting the detection signals to the
control drive board through the five-probe/mixer conversion board.
The functional diagram of the level sense board is as shown below.
Figure 6.28 Functional diagram of level sense board
frequency dividing
obstruction circuit
Oscil lation
Vertical
circuit
Double-tube probe
Amplifying filter
Interface circuit
Phase lock loop
3-probe Drive
circuit
Board
A/D CPU
Description
PCB layout
The top layer of the level sense board is as shown below.

6Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.29 Level sense board PCB (TOP layer)

J3 D5 J1
J2
D4
D2
D6
The bottom view of the level sense board is as shown below.

Figure 6.30 Level sense board PCB (BOTTOM layer
TP1 TP6
TP4 TP2 TP3 S2
Connectors
The level sense board contains the following connectors.
Connector of probes and boards (J1): 2-pin, used for connecting the sample probe or reagent
probes with related circuit.
Table 6.20 Connector of probes and boards (J1)
Pin No. Signal
1 GND
2 Probe capacitor
signal input
Power supply and signal output connector (J2): 4-pin, used to provide power supply for the
level sense board and output the level sense signal and vertical obstruction signal.
Table 6.21 Power supply and signal output connector for level sense board (J2)
1 GND /
2 Vertical High level (about 4V) is output when no vertical obstruction
obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output when vertical
signal obstruction happens.
output
3 Level sense Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails to
signal detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is output
output when the probe detects the fluid level.
4 +12V 11.4 to 12.6V
Serial port communication cable connector (J3): 3-pin, used for communication between the
level sense board and the control drive board.
6-36
6 Hardware Circuits
Table 6.22 Serial port communication cable connector (J3)

Pin No. Signal
1 RXD
2 RST
3 TXD

The level sense board contains the following switches and jumpers.
 PSEN enable jumper (S1): used for downloading application programs.
 Calibrate key (S2): used for manual self-calibration of fluid level detection.
Jumper S1 must be disconnected in normal conditions.
Indicators
The level sense board contains the following indicators.
 Level sense system calibration indicator (D2): yellow. It is extinguished when the
self-calibration of the level sense system fails, and vice versa. If it is lit, it indicates
that the calibration is complete and the level sense system is ready for
measurement. When the calibration is complete, the indicator will be lit all the time.
 Sensitivity switch indicator (D4): red. It is extinguished when the default sensitivity
is being used, and vice versa, which means level sensing is performed in special
positions.
 Level sense indicator (D5): green. It is extinguished when the probe fails to detect
the fluid level, and vice versa.
 Vertical obstruction indicator (D6): green. It is extinguished when no vertical
obstruction occurs, and vice versa.
Test points
In the following positions of the level sense board can signal tests be performed.
 TP1 (LEVEL): level sense signal output. Normal condition: Low level (about 0V) is
output when the probe fails to detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is
output when the probe detects the fluid level.
 TP2 (PLL): working point voltage of the level sense system. Normal range: 3.8±0.5V.
 TP3 (ALEVEL): analog fluid level. Analog level sense signal, based on which whether
the fluid level is detected or not is determined.
 TP4 (GND): grounding terminal of the level sense board.
 TP5 (VCO): reserved.
 TP6 (RAM): vertical obstruction signal output. Normal condition: High level (about
4V) is output when no vertical obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is
output when vertical obstruction happens.
 TP7 (PLL1): reserved.
 TP8: voltage monitoring signal for self-calibration of the level sense system.
 TP9 (CLK): reserved.
 TP10: +9V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the internal
phase-locked loop and some operational amplifiers of the PCBA. Normal range:
9V±5%, that is, 8.55-9.45V.
 TP11: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power most
components inside the PCBA, such as micro control unit (MCU). Normal range:
5V±5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.

6Hardware Circuits
NOTE:
6.5.13 Clog Detection Board

The clog detection board possesses the following functions:
 Collecting pressure by connecting with the pressure sensor.
 Checking for clogs and empty aspirate under the control of the sample control drive
board.
 Sending debugging information to the debugging computer.
The figure below shows the location of the clog detection board in the hardware system.
Figure 6.31 Location of clog detection board in the hardware system
Clog Detection 3-probe Drive
Sensor
Board Board
Computer (for
alignment only)
The circuit diagram of the clog detection board is as shown below.

Figure 6.32 Circuit diagram of clog detection board
Clog Detection
Constant Board Power Supply
current drive
3-probe Drive
Differential Differential Single-end IO Board
analog signal Compensat ion analog signal analog signal Serial Port
Amplifying at
Sensor and amp lifying ADC and MCU
at 1st stage 2nd stage
Serial Port Computer
alignment
Description
PCB layout
6-38
6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.33 Clog detection board PCB
Connectors
Pressure sensor connector (J1): connected with the pressure sensor.
Figure 6.34 Pressure sensor connector (J1)
Pin No. Description Test Methods
1 Positive end input of /
pressure sensor
2 Positive end of power /
supply
3 Negative end of power /
supply
4 Negative end input of /
pressure sensor
5 Gain adjustment /
resistance
6 Gain adjustment
resistance
Clog detection board control connector (J2): connected with the sample control drive board
and used for communicating control signals during clog detection process.
Table 6.23 Clog detection board control connector (J2)
1 +12V power supply The voltage lies between 11.4-12.6V when
the PCBA is working normally.
2 -12V power supply /
(reserved)
3 Confirmed clog signal The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
when no clog signal is detected.
4 Possible clog signal /
(reserved)

6Hardware Circuits

5 Empty aspirate signal The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
when no empty aspirate signal is detected.
6 Interruption control The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
signal when the system status is Standby.
7 Interruption enable The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
signal when the system status is Standby.
8 Ground /
9 Reserved input /
10 Reserved output /
Clog detection board communication connector (J3): connected with the sample control drive
board and used for serial port communication between the clog detection board and the
sample probe unit.
Table 6.24 Clog detection board communication connector (J3)
1 +12V power supply The voltage lies between 11.4-12.6V
when the PCBA is working normally.
2 -12V power supply /
(reserved)
3 Serial port input signal The voltage at this point is greater
than 2.4V when the system status is
Standby.
4 Serial port output signal The voltage at this point is greater
Standby.
5 Online-downloading The voltage at this point is less than
enable signal 0.4V when the system status is
Standby.
6 Reset signal The voltage at this point is greater
Standby.
7 Ground /
8 Ground /
Clog detection board debugging connector (J4): connected with the serial port of a computer
and used for debugging the clog detection system. This connector is temporarily not used.
Table 6.25 Clog detection board debugging connector (J4)
1 +12V power supply /
2 -12V power supply (reserved) /
3 Serial port input signal /
4 Serial port output signal /
5 Ground /

MCU downloading enable jumper (S2): When it is short-circuited, it indicates that the MCU is
downloading something. The jumper must be disconnected when the PCBA is working
normally.
6-40
6 Hardware Circuits
Indicators and test points

Indicators
 Clog signal indicator (D3): red. It is lit when the PCBA outputs a clog signal.
 Empty aspirate signal indicator (D4): It is lit when the PCBA outputs an empty
aspirate signal. ·
 Possible clog signal indicator (D5): It is lit when the PCBA outputs a possible clog
signal.
 +5V power supply indicator (D6): green. It is lit when the +5V power supply is
working normally.
 +12V power supply indicator (D7): green. It is lit when the +12V power supply is
working normally.
Test points
 +12V power supply (VPP): The voltage at this point lies between 11.4-12.6V when
the PCBA is working normally.
 -12V power supply (VEE): reserved test point.
 Ground (GND): This test point is connected with the grounding terminal of the
PCBA.
 Pressure sensor output signal (ANALOG): It is an analog signal amplified by the
pressure sensor. When the pressure sensor is connected to the air, the voltage at this
point lies between 0.8-1.3V.
 Clog signal (CLOG_Y): It is a test point of clog signal output. When the PCBA outputs
a clog signal, indicator D3 will be lit and the voltage at this point greater than 2.4V;
when the PCBA outputs no clog signal, indicator D3 will be extinguished and the
voltage at this point less than 0.4V.
 Empty aspirate signal (NO_SAM): when the PCBA outputs an empty aspirate signal,
indicator D4 will be lit and the voltage at this point greater than 2.4V; when the
PCBA outputs no empty aspirate signal, indicator D4 will be extinguished and the
voltage at this point less than 0.4V.
 Debugging test point (TEST): used for test during debugging.
NOTE:
Insert connectors J2 and J3 tightly into the PCBA. When inserting connector J1, you will hear a click, which
means that the connector is inserted in place into its slot.
6.5.14 Reagent Refrigeration Board

The reagent refrigeration board is independent in the hardware system. It controls the coolers'
switch, refrigerates reagent, keeps the temperature of the reagent chamber within specified
range, provides interface for fans, drives the fans of the entire system, and feeds back the
refrigerating fan signal to the three-carousel drive board. It has the following functions:
Refrigeration control
 Control of the refrigeration temperature indicator.
 Control of cooling fans and demisting.
The functional diagram of the reagent refrigeration board is as shown below.

6Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.35 Functional diagram of reagent refrigeration board
Temperature sensor
Reagent
Temperature Four peltiers
refrigeration indication Refrigeration
board control circuit
circuit
2 PCB cooling fans
12V Voltage
conversion circuit 2 reserved refrigeration
fans
12V
FAN Anti-fogging circuit
Light source fan

Vacuum pump feedback
Phot oelectric signal 1 reserved light source fan
3-carousel coupling
board Processing circuit
1 reserved vacuum pump
fan
Processing circuit for 1 reserved vacuum pump

Phot oelectric
coupling peltier cooling fan s cooling fan
feedback signal
2 peltier cooling fans
24V
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the reagent refrigeration board is as shown below.
Figure 6.36 Reagent refrigeration board PCB
Connectors
The reagent refrigeration board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply connector P1 and P2: provides 12V power for the PCB.
6-42
6 Hardware Circuits
Table 6.26 Power supply connector

P1 12V 11.4 to 12.6V
P2 GND /
Power supply connector J12: provides 24V and 12V power for fans on the PCB.
Table 6.27 Power supply connector J12
1 24V 23.5 to 26V
2 GND /
3 12VFAN 11.4 – 12.6V
4 GND /

 Reagent refrigeration drive connector (J3): 8-pin, used for driving reagent
refrigeration.
 PCB radiating fan connector (J5): 2-pin, used for driving radiating fan of the PCB.
 PCB radiating fan connector (J6): 2-pin, used for driving radiating fan of the PCB.
 Vacuum pump fan connector (J24): 3-pin, used for driving fan of the vacuum pump.
 Vacuum pump and refrigeration fan jam detection interface (J14): 4-pin, used for
detecting jams of the vacuum pump and refrigeration fans.
 Demisting heater connector (J15): 4-pin, used for driving the desmisting heater.
 Lamp radiating fan connector (J2): 2-pin, used for driving radiating fan of the lamp.
 Cooler radiating fan connector (J11): 3-pin, used for driving radiating fan of the
cooler.
 Reagent carousel temperature sensor connector (J1): 2-pin, used for detecting
temperature of the reagent carousel.
Indicators
The main control board contains the following indicators.
 D2: indicates 12V power supply of fan.
 D3: indicates the 12V power supply.
 D4: indicates the 5V power supply (secondary).
 D5: indicates 24V power supply of fan.
 D6: indicates temperature, red. ON: Temperature is higher than the high limit.
 D7: indicates temperature. ON: Temperature is within the normal range.
 D8: indicates temperature, orange. OFF: Temperature is lower than the low limit.
 D9: indicates working status of cooler 2. ON: The cooler is turned on.
 D11: indicates working status of cooler 1. ON: The cooler is turned on.

6Hardware Circuits
Installation Methods and Precautions
NOTE:
6.6 Power Supply System

6.6.1 Power Supply System of Whole Unit
Figure 6.37 Power supply system of the whole unit
To the
enclosure Anal yzing
E Yellow unit switch
Main Power
and green
Switch
L Brown
L Brown L
Power jack BA40 Power
N Light blue
N Light blue N Supply
Assembly
BA40 Power Supply Assembly

The BA40 power supply assembly, as the major part of the entire power supply system,
consists of three boards, which are 24V power supply board, 12V power supply board and
power supply conversion board. It provides power supply for the lamp, DC power supply for
major control boards, and power supply for refrigeration modules. After passing through an
analog power supply conversion board, the 5V power is converted into +/-12V and then
provided for the AD collection board and pre-amplification board. The A5V, C12V, B24V, D12V
and E12V power goes through a DC power supply conversion board and then is provided for
the wash temperature control board, sample control drive board and reagent control drive
board. The B12V and A24V power are input to the reagent refrigeration board for powering the
heatsinks and ISE module. Other boards, such as reaction carousel temperature collection
board, cleaning fluid temperature collection board, pressure detection board, clog detection
board and level sense board, are powered by those boards connected to them. See the figure
below.
 The 24V power supply board converts the AC input into A24V and B24V and into
24VFAN for the cooling fans of heatsinks.
 The 12V power supply board converts the AC input into B12V, A5V, ±14V, and
24VLAMP. The 24VLAMP power supply is transformed to A12V through the power
supply conversion board and used for powering the lamp.
 The power supply conversion board is used to shift the AC voltage, control the
vacuum pump AC voltage, convert the ±14V power into ±12V, control the C12V
power, and shift various output voltages.
6-44
6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.38 BA40 Power Supply Assembly
A12V/1.7A Light source
5V/analog+/-12V 5V/analog+/-12V Analog+/-12V

Analog Power
A5V/8A 5V Main AD Pre-
Supply
Control collection amp lification
BA40 Power Supply Assembly
Conversion Board
Board board
DC power supply conversion board

Board
Reaction carousel
C12V/7A temperature collection board
D12V
3-carousel Drive Cleaning Fluid Temperature
Collection Board
Board D12V/E12V
Pressure detection board
B24V
5V/C12V/B24V D12V
/D12V/E12V Sample Probe Level Sense Board
3-probe Drive
Board D12V/E12V
D12V/0.3A Clog detection board
Pump/Valve
E12V/0.3A Drive Board
B12V/28A Reagent
refrigeration
board
A24V/1.3A
ISE module
6.6.2 Performance Indices

Power supply input
 AC voltage input: 220-240V, 220/230V, and 110/115V.
 AC voltage frequency: 50/60±3Hz
 AC input power: 5KVA
Power supply output

Table 6.28 Power supply output
SN Name Rated Lower-level Usage Control
Output PCBA Description
1 A5V 5V/8A Digital 5V Controlled by
analyzer power
switch
2 A12V 12V/4.2A Light source Controlled by
operating software
3 B12V 12V/28A Reagent Controlled by main
refrigeration power switch
4 C12V 12V/7A 12V drive Controlled by
5 D12V 12V/0.3A Analog +12V analyzer power
switch
6 E12V -12V/0.3A Analog -12V
7 F12V 12V/30A Reagent Controlled by main
8 A24V 24V/1.3A ISE module Controlled by main
power switch
9 B24V 24V/21A 24V drive Controlled by
and heater analyzer power
switch

6Hardware Circuits
SN Name Rated Lower-level Usage Control

Output PCBA Description
10 24VFAN 24V/1A / Reserved Controlled by main
power switch
11 C24V 24V/6A Reagent Controlled by main
fan 1
Notes:
 Control by operating software means that the lamp voltage is controlled by the
operating software while the main power switch and analyzer power switch are
turned on.
 Control by analyzer power switch means that the power supply is controlled by the
analyzer power switch with the prerequisite that the main power switch is turned
on.
 Control by main power switch means that the power supply works normally when
the analyzer power switch is turned on, and vice versa.
6.6.3 BA40 Power Supply Assembly

The BA40 power supply assembly is composed of the 12V board, 24V board and conversion
board. Refer to the functional diagram of the power supply system for the internal structure of
the assembly. The functions and principles of the three boards are described on the following
pages.
12V Power Supply Board

The functional diagram of the board is as shown below.
Figure 6.39 Functional diagram of 12V power supply board
Is olate two-
tr ansis tor
forward
B12V
conver ter
DC/DC
EMC Rectifi- PFC Convert A5V
AC filter cation Up convert
390V
AC
5VCRL
Is olate single-
24VLMP
tr ansis tor
backward +14V
conver ter -14V
The 12V power supply board converts the AC input into the following outputs:
 B12V: used for powering the heatsinks.
 A5V: used for powering the PCBA and controlled by the analyzer power switch.
 24VLMP: outputs constant 24V, which is then converted into lamp voltage A12V in
the way of DC/DC through the power supply conversion board.
 ±14V: The two outputs are converted into ±12V (D12V and -12V) through the
voltage stabilizer on the power supply conversion board and then used for
powering analog circuits. The PCB layout of the 12V board is as shown below.
The PCB layout of the 12V power supply board is as shown below.
6-46
6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.40 12V power supply board PCB
The 12V power supply board is located inside the power supply box. Indicators D20, D21 and
D34 indicate voltage output during debugging and repairing of the PCBA and cannot be seen
from the outside of the instrument.
Indication of voltage outputs corresponding to LED:
Table 6.29 Indication of voltage outputs corresponding to LED:
LED Output Indication Status Controlled By
Voltage
D20 A5V When D20 is lit, it indicates Controlled by analyzer
that the PCBA outputs an power switch
A5V power.
D21 B12V When D21 is lit, it indicates Controlled by main power
that the PCBA outputs a switch
B12V power.
D34 A24V When D34 is lit, it indicates Controlled by main power
that the PCBA outputs an switch
A24V power.
Notes:
turned on.
on.

6Hardware Circuits
24V Power Supply Board

Figure 6.41 Functional diagram of 24V power supply board
Is olate two-
tr ansis tor
forward
B24V
conver ter
24VCRL
EMC Rect ifi- PFC
AC filter cation Up con vert 390V
AC
Is olate single-
A24V
tr ansis tor
backward
conver ter 24VFAN
The 24V board converts the AC input into the following outputs:
 A24V: used for powering the ISE module.
 24VFAN: used to power the reagent refrigeration fan.
 B24V: used for powering the moving parts, motors and heaters, and controlled by
the analyzer power switch.
The PCB layout of the 24V power supply board is as shown below.
Figure 6.42 24V power supply board PCB
6-48
6 Hardware Circuits
LED1, LED2 and LED3 in the figure above are indicators of the A24V, 24VFAN and B24V
outputs. Since located inside the power supply box, the three indicators cannot be seen from
the outside of the instrument. They are used to indicate the voltage output during debugging
and repairing of the PCBA. There are three indicators on the power supply conversion board,
and they are used for indicating the voltage outputs of the 24V board.
Indication of voltage outputs on the 24V board:
Table 6.30 Voltage output of the LED indicators
Voltage
LED1 A24V When LED1 is lit, it Controlled by main power
indicates that the PCBA switch
outputs an A24V power.
LED2 24VFAN When LED2 is lit, it Controlled by main power
indicates that the PCBA switch
outputs a 24VFAN power.
LED3 B24V When LED3 is lit, it Controlled by analyzer
indicates that the PCBA power switch
outputs a B24V power.
Notes:
turned on.
on.
Power Supply Conversion Board

Figure 6.43 Functional diagram of power supply conversion board
AC
(12V board)
A5V
(Control)
C12V
(control) Adjusting
voltage
AC
(24V board)

6Hardware Circuits
This board is used for:

 providing AC to 12V and 24V power supply board and AC1 and AC2.
 Stabilizing the ±14V output by the 12V board into D12V and -12V.
 Converting the 24VLMP output by the 12V board into controlled lamp voltage A12V.
 Dividing and shifting other DC inputs, and providing power supply interfaces for
other PCBAs.
The PCB layout of the power supply conversion board is as shown below.
Figure 6.44 Power supply conversion board PCB
LED Indicators
There are 9 voltage indicators on the power supply conversion board indicated by a dotted
frame. They are from left to right: D20, D11, D14, D10, D15, D12, D13, D9, and D21, which are
used to indicate the following voltage outputs.
Table 6.31 Voltage output of the LED indicators
Voltage
D20 D12V When D20 is lit, it indicates Controlled by analyzer
that the PCBA outputs a power switch
D12V power.
D11 B12V When D11 is lit, it indicates Controlled by main power
B12V power.
D14 -12V When D14 is lit, it indicates Controlled by analyzer
-12V power.

A12V power.
6-50
6 Hardware Circuits
D15 A24V When D15 is lit, it indicates Controlled by main power

that the PCBA outputs an switch
A24V power.
D12 C12V When D12 is lit, it indicates Controlled by analyzer
C12V power.
A5V power.
D9 B24V When D9 is lit, it indicates Controlled by analyzer
B24V power.
D21 24VFAN When D21 is lit, it indicates Controlled by main power
24VFAN power.
Notes:
turned on.
on.
The table below shows the status of the indicators when the main power switch and analyzer
power switch are turned on or off.
Table 6.32 LED status on the power supply conversion board
LED Output Control Description Main Main Main
Voltage Power ON Power ON Power
Analyzer Analyzer OFF
Power OFF Power ON
D11 B12V When the main power   
D15 A24V switch is ON,   
indicators D11, D15
D21 24VFAN and D21 are lit and   
only controlled by the
main power switch
rather than the
analyzer power switch.
D12 C12V The corresponding   
D13 A5V indicator is   
extinguished only
D14 -12V when the main power   
D20 D12V switch is ON. When the   
analyzer power switch
D9 B24V   
is ON, the
corresponding
indicator is lit and
controlled by both
switches.

6Hardware Circuits
D10 A12V Controlled by the main   

power switch and the
operating software
Turning on/off the lamp can be controlled through the operating
software.
Output connectors:
Table 6.33 Output connectors
No. Pins Symbol Output Description
J3 Pin1 ISE A24V+
Pin2 A24V-
J4 Pin1, 3, 5, 7 VALVE DRV C12V positive output
Pin9, 11, 12 B24V positive output
Pin2, 4, 6, 8, 10 B24V and C12V output GND
J7 / N AC input N
J8 / L AC input L
J9 Pin1 24VFAN+ 24VFAN positive output
Pin2 24VFAN- 24VFAN negative output
Pin3 C12VOUT C12V positive output
Pin4 / C12V output GND

J12 Pin1 D12V D12V output
Pin2 -12V -12V output
Pin4, 5 / D12V and -12V output GND
Pin3 5VOUT A5V positive output
Pin6 / A5V output GND
J13 Pin1 AC PUMP AC1 output, not used for BA80

Pin3 AC2 output, not used for BA80
Pin6, 8 AC input
J14 Pin1 5VOUT A5V output

Pin2, 3 B24VOUT B24V output
Pin4 C12VOUT C12V output
Pin9 D12V D12V output
Pin6, 7, 8 / A5V, B24V and C12V output GND
Pin10 / D12V and -12V output GND
J15 Pin1, 2, 3 B24VOUT B24V output
Pin4 5VOUT A5V output
Pin5 D12V D12V output
Pin7, 8, 9, 10 GND2 A5V and B24V output GND
Pin11, 12 DGND D12V and -12V output GND
6-52
6 Hardware Circuits
No. Pins Symbol Output Description

J16 Pin1 LAMP A12V output for lamp
Pin2 A12V output GND for lamp
Maintenance of BA40 Power Supply Assembly

Check the indicators on the power supply conversion board while the main power switch is
turned on and the analyzer power switch is off. In normal conditions, indicators D11, D15 and
D21 should be lit respectively indicating B12V, A24V and 24VFAN. If D11 is not lit, it indicates
that B12V output is abnormal and the 12V power board may go wrong; if D15 and D21 are not
lit, it indicates that 24VFAN output is abnormal and the 24V power board may go wrong; If the
three indicators are not lit, please check whether the AC voltage of the board is normal or it is
possible that both the 12V and 24V power board have gone wrong.
While the main power switch is turned on and the voltage input is normal, turn on the analyzer
power switch. In normal conditions, all indicators on the conversion board except for the A12V
indicator should be lit. If the B24V indicator is not lit, replug the load line; if the error remains,
replace the 24V board and then check if the B24V indicator is lit. If the A5V indicator is not lit,
perhaps it is short-circuited or the 12V board goes wrong. If the A5V indicator is lit but C12V or
D12V/-12V indicator is extinguished, replug the load line; if the error remains, check the
conversion board or replace the power supply board; if the error disappears when a new
power supply board is installed, it indicates that the original power supply board needs to be
repaired.
If the lamp A12V cannot be enabled through the operating software while the main power
switch and analyzer power switch are turned on and working normally, replug the power cord
of the lamp; if the error remains, troubleshoot the power supply conversion board by replacing
it with a new one.
6.6.4 Analog Power Supply Conversion Board

Functions
The BS-460 has one analog power supply conversion board, which is mainly used to:
Convert the +5V digital into +/-12V in the way of DC/DC, and then provide it for the main
control board to use as analog power for the AD collection board and pre-amplification board.
Description
The PCB layout of the analog power supply conversion board is as shown below.
Figure 6.45 Analog power supply conversion board PCB

6Hardware Circuits
Connectors
The analog power supply conversion board contains the following connectors:
J1: connector for DC power supply conversion board input.
Table 6.34 Connector for DC power supply conversion board input
Pin No. Signal
1 GND
2 A5V
3 NC
4 NC
J2: connector for main control board power supply output.

Table 6.35 Connector for main control board power supply output
Pin No. Signal
1 Analog +12V
2 Analog -12V
3 Digital +5V
4, 5 Analog GND
6 Digital GND
Indicators
The analog power supply conversion board contains the following indicators:
 -12V power supply indicator (D3): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the -12V
Test points
In the following positions of the analog power supply conversion board can signal tests be
performed.
 P12V: +12V power supply. Normal range: 12V±5%, that is, 11.4-12.6V.
 N12V: -12V power supply. Normal range: -12V±5%, that is, -11.4-12.6V.
 +5V: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the digital parts
of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75-5.25V.
 GND: digital grounding terminal of the PCBA.
 AGND and AGND1: analog grounding terminals of the PCBA.
6-54
6 Hardware Circuits
Installation Methods and Precautions
NOTE:
6.6.5 Maintenance of Power Supply System

The following summary is about the control relations of the power supply system and provided
to help service engineers to troubleshoot various failures.
For correspondence between the main power switch/analyzer power switch/hibernating
status and the power supply working status, refer to relevant sections on the previous pages.
Voltage timing control:
When the analyzer power switch is turned on, the A5V, C12V (D12V/E12V) and B24V are
controlled successively in the order of A5V – C12V (D12V/-12V) – B24V. That is, only when the
A5V is connected will the C12V (D12V/-12V) be provided, and this is the same for C12V and
B24V; if the A5V is not output, the C12V (D12V/-12V) and B24V will not be provided.

6Hardware Circuits
6.7 Wiring Diagram of Analyzer

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RE APPR
ECN DESCRIPTION DRAW CHECHK
V DATE
Computer
D D
Analog Power
Serial port
Supply
Conversion
Board
Main Control Board
C C
AD collection
ISE module board
3-carousel Drive Board 3-probe Drive Board
Power
supply
assembly
Reagent and Cleaning Fluid
Pre- Reagent and
sample Temperature Clog Detection
amplification Slip ring sample level
Bar code Collection Board
Board sense board
module Board
B B
Reaction Heater
Reagent carousel conversion Pump/Valve
refrigeratio temperature board of
n board collection reaction Drive Board
board carousel
MINDRAY
APPROVALS DATE
DESIGN
CHECK
A A
Main unit wiring diagram
CHECK
CONFIDENTIAL DISCLOSURE: This set of drawing(s) and all it's intellectual property rights (including copyright)
File： Bytes：
subsisting herein are property of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd. No use, copies or reproductions CHECK
should be made of this drawing or any part(s) thereof for whatever purpose nor shall any information, data, DWG NO.
KF-BA43-3-0083 REV 1.0
Date： Time： calculations, or other contents contained in this drawing be disseminated without prior written permission of Shenzhen R&D
Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd.
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 CHIEF ENG. SHEET 1 OF 13 SIZE A3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-56
6Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power jack
D and cables
Enclosure D
E Yellow and green
ground J3 1 +5V Re d J14
J12 J2 1 +12V J1
Power 2 +24V Yellow
1 6 J1
Main Power 1 6 2 -12V
jack 3 +24V Yellow
1 4 Red 3 6 3 6
N Light Switch J7 3 +5V 3 +5V
N Light 2 7 4 +12V Blue 2 7 1 1 3
blue 3-probe Drive 2 5 2 5 2 5
blue 1 4 5 -12V White Black 4 12VGND
Board 3 8 6 GND 2 4
3 8 6 GND Black 3 6 3 1 4 5 12VGND 1 4
2 5 051-001800-
L Brown 7 GND Black 4 9 6 GND
00 4 9 Co nnection wire fo r Main Control
8 GND Black Analog Power Supply Connection wire
power supply adapter
Co nversion Board for analog power
Board
5 10 9 +12VA Orang e 5 10 and analog power 051-001799-00
BA38-30-88342 supply adapter
J8 10 GND Black supply adapter and main control
Power jack and board
cables L Brown 1 4 3-probe dr ive boar d
5 power cor d
2
1 1 24VFAN+ Red 1
J8 1 +24V Yellow
J15 2 2 24VFAN- Black 2
1 7
2 +24V Yellow
J9 J12
1a B12VOUT 1 3 +24V Yellow 1 7 3 C12VOUT Yel low
1 3 3
4 +5V Blue 4 GND2 Gree
GND J2 2 8 2
Analyzing unit 2a 2
2 5 +12V White 8
4
n
Co nnection wire 1 for 4
C
switch 2b GND 3 9 6 -12V Brown reagent refrigeration Reagent C
3 9
3 7 GND Black board and power supply refrigeration
1b STCRL 3 4 10 4 10 board
Analyzing unit power 8 GND Black board
switch wire 5 11 9 GND Black
5 11 051-000052-00
10 GND Black P1 B12V Red
6 12 6 12
11 GND Black
P1 P1 B12V Red P1
1 A24VOUT 12 GND Black
1
ISE module J3 3-car ousel dr ive
2 GND board po wer cord
2
ISE module power cord 3-carousel Drive P2 GND Black
Board P2 P1 GND Black
P2
051-001801-00
Co nnection wire 2 for
reagent refr igeration
J1 1 Shielding Yellow J1 board and power supply
2 SIGN Black board
A12VOUT 1 2 1 2
1 1 3 GND Blue
Light source J16 3 4 4 SIGN Black
3 4
2 GND
2
5 6 6 SIGN Brown 5 6
Light source wire
B 7 8 Co ntrol wire for 3-disk 7 8 1 +12V B
board 2 GND J1
J4
J5 1 2 3 +12V 1 2
GND 1 4 GND
Power supply fan 1 12VOUT 2 1 4
3 4 5 +12V 3 4 Pump/Valve
5 6 6 GND Drive Board
3 7 +12V 5 6
GND 2 5 BA40-30-
7 8 8 GND 7 8
Power supply fan 2 12VOUT 4 9 10 9 +24V
9 10
61373
Power Supply 10 GND
Power supply fan wiring Conversion Board 11 12 11 +24V 11 12
12 +24V
051-000511-00 Cable connecting
Power Supply pump/valve drive
Conversion Board board and power
supply bo ard
051-000511-00
A
MINDRAY Wiring diagram of power
A
TITLE: supply board
File： Bytes：
DWG NO. KF-BA43-3-0083 REV 1.0
Date： Time：
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 2 OF 13 SIZE A3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-57
6Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D Pre-amplification Board D
051-001622-00
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
J2 J3
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 J1 1 2 3
Signal cable 2
SIG6 Orange
SIG2 Yellow
Orange
Yellow
AGND White
Green
White
Green
SGND Black
Signal cable 1 from from pre-
2 AGND Black
Black
Power cord from
Gray
Blue
Gray
Blue
Blue
Red
Red
Red
pre-amplification amplification AD collection
board to AD board to AD board to pre-
collection board collection amplification
board board
AGND
1 VDD
SGND
3 VSS
SIG1
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG1
SIG2
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
C C
1
8
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 J1 1 2 3
J2 J3
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
AD collection board
BA40-30-61365
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
P1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
B B
Connection wire for
10 DCP_CLK
18 AD_BUSY
11 DCP_DIN
19 AD_CLK
9 DCP_EN
6 AD_DIN
main control board
20 AD_RC
22 CH_A2
23 CH_A1
24 CH_A0
17 15GND
21 CH_A3
4 15GND
14 +15V
25 GND
13 GND
1 +15V
5 GND
15 -15V
12 NC
16 VCC
and AD collection
8 GND
2 -15V
3 VCC
7 NC
board
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
J8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A
Main control board
051-001799-00
MINDRAY A
Wiring diagram of pre-amplification
TITLE: board and AD collection board
File： Bytes：
DWG NO. A-BA38-30-036 REV 1.0
Date： Time：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-58
6Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3-probe Drive Board 3-carousel Drive Board

051-001800-00 051-001801-00
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
J27 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 J24 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
D D
21 FPGA_CONF_OE
Connection Connection wire
19 RSTCTL_REAC
wire for main for main control
RSTCTL_RP2
7 RSTCTL_AW
15 RSTCTL_RT
RSTCTL_RP1
11 RSTCTL_ST
RSTCTL_RM
26 SPI_CLOCK
3 RSTCTL_TC
RSTCTL_SM
board and 3-
17 RXD_REAC
18 TXD_REAC
27 SPI_DATA
RSTCTL_SP
control board
30 NCONFIG
5 RXD_AW
NCONFIG
6 TXD_AW
TXD_RP2
13 RXD_RT
14 TXD_RT
RXD_RP1
RXD_RP2
23 REV2_O
RXD_RM
TXD_RP1
10 TXD_ST
carousel drive
TXD_RM
RXD_SM
9 RXD_ST
1 RXD_TC
TXD_SM
2 TXD_TC
REV1_O
REV2_O
REV3_O
REV4_O
22 REV5_I
and 3-probe
25 SPI_CS
RXD_SP
TXD_SP
REV5_I
REV6_I
31 ASDO
29 DCLK
32 DATA
ASDO
DCLK
board
12 GND
20 GND
24 GND
28 GND
DATA
34 NCE
33 NCS
16 GND
drive board
4 GND
8 GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
NCE
NCS
GND
GND
GND
11
29
31
33
13
21
23
25
27
10
34
17
14
30
32
19
12
20
24
28
15
26
22
18
3
2
9
1
16
6
4
8
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
J9 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 J10 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
C C
Main Control Board
051-001799-00
J8
J7 J2
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1
1 1
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
0 0
2
3
1
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9
5
6
4
2
Connection wire
1
5
4
6
for main control Connection wire
+12V
-12V
12VGND
12VGND
+5V
GND
Connection wire for main Connection wire for main for analog power
board and ISE control board and
control board and AD module supply adapter
collection board communication adapter and main control
board B
B
Red
7 PC_RESET
Yellow
10 DCP_CLK
White
11 DCP_DIN
18 AD_BUSY
Black
ISE COM
Blue
Blue
2 PC_RXD
19 AD_CLK
Red
3 PC_TXD
6 AD_DIN
9 DCP_EN
20 AD_RC
1
22 CH_A2
23 CH_A1
24 CH_A0
17 12GND
21 CH_A3
Red
4 12GND
14 +12V
25 GND
13 GND
5 GND
1 +12V
NC
5 GND
15 -12V
12 NC
8 GND
16 VCC
2 -12V
3 VCC
10 NC
7 NC
1 NC
4 NC
6 NC
8 NC
9 NC
ISE_TXD
3
2
3
1
ISE_RXD
J2
4
5
6
4
NC J3
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 5 1
GND 2 4 6 8 Analog Power Supply
J61 6 0 Conversion Board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 NC 1 3 5 7 9
7 BA38-30-88342
ISE_CTS
8
AD collection board BA40- ISE_RTS
30-61365 NC
9 Serial port
10
NC
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: Wiring diagram of main control
board
File： Bytes：
Date： Time：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-59
6Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Connection wire for Connection wire for

sample level sense reagent level sense
board board
Sample level sense Reagent level
board sense board
D D
J2 051-000362-00 J3 051-000363-00 J2
J3
1 2 3 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
4 RXD_SP_L Brown 3
2 RXD_RP_L Brown 3
3 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2
3 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2
2 LEVEL Green 3
2 LEVEL Green 3
3 TXD_SP_L White
1 TXD_RP_L White
Red 4
Red 4
Black 1
4 GND Black 1
Over-the-air
Over-the-air
Over-the-air
connection
connection
connection
Over-the-air
connection
1
1 +12V
1 +12V
4 GND
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Signal cable for
J40 J37 J39 clog detection
board
1 VPP Red
J24 2 VEE J3
5 Brown B- 4 Brown 1 2 3 CLOG_YES 1 2
1
5
C Connection wire 4 CLOG_MAY C
4 Orang e B+ 3 Orang e 3 4 3 4
for 3-probe 4
2
5 NO_SAM
J4
board and 2 2 Yellow A- 2 Yellow 5 6 5 6
6 INT_CON
3
reagent probe 7 8 7 8
vertical motor 1 1 Red A+ 1 Red
1 7 INT_EN 1
4
9 0 9
3-probe Drive 8 GND 0
9 RES_CLG_I
5 Brown
Board
1
Connection wire 5 B- 4 Brown
for 3-probe 10 RES_CLG_O
4 Orang e B+ 3 Orang e
051-001800-00 Clog Detection
2
board and 4
Board
J5
reagent probe 2 2 Yellow A- 2 Yellow
3
051-000218-00
horizontal
1 1 Red A+ 1 Red 1 VPP Red
4
motor
J17 2 VEE J2
3 RXD_CLG
1
5 Brown B- 4 Brown 1 2 1 2
Connection wire 5
B+
4 TXD_CLG 3 4
3 Orang e 3 Orang e 3 4
2
for 3-probe board 3 5 PSEN_CLG

J6
and reagent 5 6 5 6
3
probe syringe 4 4 Yellow A- 2 Yellow 6 RST_CLG

7 8 7 GND 7 8
motor 2 2 Red A+ 1 Red
4
8 GND
Serial cable for
B B
clog detection
board
J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J16
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 A+
1 1
2 Mixer
3 Orang e
3 Orang e
2 Yellow
2 Yellow
3 Orange
3 Orange
3 Orange
3 Orange
4 Brown
4 Brown
2 Yellow
2 Yellow
2 Yellow
2 Yellow
4 Brown
4 Brown
4 Brown
4 Brown
B+
1 Red
1 Red
head
1 Red
1 Red
1 Red
1 Red
3 3
motor 1
4
Serial cable for
B+
A+
B+
A+
B-
A-
B-
A-
B+
A+
B+
A+
B+
A+
B+
A+
B-
A-
B-
A-
B-
A-
B-
A-
mixer head motor 1
A-
3 Orange
4 Orange
4 Yellow
3 Yellow
4 Orange
4 Orange
4 Orange
3 Orange
2 Yellow
3 Yellow
3 Yellow
2 Yellow
5 Brown
6 Brown
6 Brown
6 Brown
5 Brown
4 Brown
2 Red
1 Red
Mixer
1 Red
1 Red
1 Red
1 Red
2 2
head
B- 3 motor 2
5
3
4
2
6
4
3
1
6
4
3
1
6
4
3
1
5
4
2
1
4
3
2
1
4 4
A
Connection wire for
3-probe board and
sample probe
Connection wire for
3-probe board and
sample probe
Connection wire
for 3-probe board
and sample probe
Connection wire for
3-probe board and
mixer vertical motor
Connection wire for
3-probe board and Connection wire for
mixer horizontal 3-probe board and
mixer head motor
MINDRAY A
vertical motor horizontal motor syringe motor motor Wiring diagram of 3-probe
TITLE:
drive board
File： Bytes：
Date： Time：
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 5OF 13 SIZE A3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-60
6Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
400ul reagent probe

Sample Probe Assembly
assembly
Black
Black
Red
C C
Red
Connection Connection
wire for wire for
sample level Connection wire for reagent level
2 SIGN
2 SIGN
1 GND
1 GND
sense board reagent level sense sense board
board
J1 1 2 J1 1 2
Sample level sense Reagent level
board sense board
J2 051-000363-00 J3 051-000363-00 J2
J3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
2 RXD_RP_L Brown 3
3 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2
3 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2
4 RXD_SP_L Brown 3
3 TXD_SP_L White 1
1 TXD_RP_L White 1
2 LEVEL Green 3
2 LEVEL Green 3
Connection wire for
Over-the-air
Over-the-air
Black 1
R ed 4
R ed 4
connection
connection
Over-the-air
Connection wire
Over-the-air
connection
Black 1
connection
3-probe board and
for 3-probe board
reagent level sense
and sample level
1 +12V
1 +12V
board
4 GND
sense board
4 GND
B B
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J40 J37 J39
3-probe Drive
Board
051-001800-00
A
MINDRAY A
Wiring diagram of level sense
TITLE:
board
File： Bytes：
Date： Time：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-61
6Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sample bar code Reagent bar code

assembly assembly
BA40-30-61994 BA40-30-61986
D Connection wire D
Red
Red
Connection wire for 3-disk board
10 Shielding
10 Shielding
for 3-disk board and reagent bar
GND
GND
8 TRIG
8 TRIG
RXD
RXD
TXD
TXD
7 RTS
7 RTS
VCC
VCC
and sample bar
6 CTS
6 CTS
9 NC
9 NC
NC
NC
code reader
code reader
1
5
2
5
2
3
3
4
4
J11 J12
1 1
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
0 0
5 4 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9
Brow B- Brow
1
5 n4 3
n
Reaction 4
Orang B+ Orang
2
e e
carousel s rotating
J3
2 2
2 Yel lo A- Yel lo
3
motor w w 1 RXD_TC
1 1 Red A+ 1 Red
J24 2 TXD_TC
J6
4
3 RSTCTL_TC
4 GND
6 4 1 2 5 RXD_RES 1 2
1
Brow B- Brow
6 n4 3
n
6 TXD_RES
3 4 3 4
7 RSTCTL_RES
2
Orang B+ Orang
C Reagent carousel s 4 C
J4
e
3 e
2 5 6 8 GND 5 6
rotating motor 9 RXD_ST
3
3 Yel lo A- Yel lo
7 8 7 8
w w 10 TXD_ST
1 1 Red 1 Red 11 RSTCTL_ST
4
A+ 9 10 9 10
Main control board

12 GND
BA38-30-88044
6 11 12 13 RXD_RT 11 12
4
Wiring diagram -00 of 3-
1
6
Brow B- Brow 13 14 14 TXD_RT 13 14
n4 3 15 RSTCTL_RT
n
carousel drive board
2
Orang B+ Orang 15 16
4 16 GND 15 16
J5
Sample carousel s e e
3 2
051-001801-00 17 RXD_REAC
3
17 18 17 18
rotating motor 3 Yel lo A- Yel lo
18 TXD_REAC
w w
19 20 19 RSTCTL_REAC 19 20
4
1 1 Red A+ 1 Red
21 22 20 GND 21 22
5 21 FPGA_CONF_OE
4
23 24 22 REV5_I
1
Brow B- Brow 23 24
5 n4 3
n 23 REV2_O
25 26 25 26
Vertical motor for 4
Orang B+ Orang
2 24 GND
J6
e
2 e
2 27 28 25 SPI_CS 27 28
washing 26 SPI_CLOCK
3
2 Yel lo A- Yel lo
w w 29 30 27 SPI_DATA 29 30
1 1 Red 1 Red
4
A+
31 32 28 GND 31 32
29 DCLK
5 33 34 33 34
4 30 NCONFIG
1
Brow Brow
5 B- 31 ASDO
B n3 3
n B
32 DATA
2
Orang B+ Orang
3
J7
Wash syringe e
4 e
2 33 NCS
J8 34 NCE
3
motor 4 Yel lo A- Yel lo

J1
w w
Connection wire for
4
2 2 Red A+ 1 Red
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 J22 3-carousel drive
7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 board and main
control board
4
1
Power cord of 3-
COOL_FAN
Control wire for Connection wire
AD_FAN
disk board and
Yellow
GND
3-disk board and
Brown
Brown
White
White
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
1 Shielding Yellow
Black
Black
VCC
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
for 3-carousel
Blue
Blue
power supply power supply drive board and
board board slip ring
11 GND
12 GND
1 +24V
10 GND
2 +24V
3 +24V
GND
SIGN
SIGN
SIGN
SIGN
SIGN
5 +12V
6 -12V
9 GND
7 GND
8 GND
4 +5V
GND
MINDRAY
1
3
2
3
4
6
7
8
5
A A
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 Wiring diagram 1 of 3-carousel drive
TITLE: board
J14
4 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8
File： Bytes： Reagent
J15 Power supply board J1 refrigeration board DWG NO. KF-BA43-3-0083 REV 1.0
Date： Time： 051-000511-00 051-000052-00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-62
6Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Reaction carousel Heater conversion board of

reaction carousel
temperature collection board BA38-30-87927
10
12
14
16
18
20
2
8
J1
J5
D
19
11
13
15
17
D
1
2 24V
9
7
1
2
8
1
3
1
1
0
1
1
1
7
1
4
4 CTRL
1 24V
3 CTRL
Connection wire Home position sensor
for 3-carousel of c uvette wash
drive board and

Slip ring syringe
BA40-21-
E
C
+
-
slip ring
REACC_PHO 4 White
3 Green
1 Red
2 Black
Heat_dish1
Connection wire
DOUT_AD_REA
Heat_dish2
BUSY_AD_REA
Heat_dish3
1 SYNC_AD_REA
CLK_AD_REA
DIN_AD_REA
for cuvette wash
GND
GND
VCC
+24V
syringe sensor
+24V
AGND
A_REA
B_REA
+12V
NC
GND
Connection wire for
10
6
2
5
4
5
7
3
4
5
8
9
4
6
7
2
disk position sensor
3
1
Connection wire for 1 VCC 1 Red
cleaning fluid 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 2 AW_PHO 4 White +
3 5 7 9 C Mixer vertical zero
temperature control 3 GND 2 Black
- position sensor
2 4 6 8 10 7 8 9 10 4 GND 3 Green
E
C 1 2
board and 3-disk drive J10 J26 C
board 5 VCC 1 Red
+
3 4 3 CS# 1 J21 J15 6 AW_V_PHO 4 White
C Mixer vertical
BA38-30-88228
A 1 2 7
2
2 GND 2 Black
1
10 - collision sensor
control board
Cleaning fluid
temperature
5 6 3 8 GND 3 Green E
3 4
4
3
7 8 12 B 4 9 1 Red
VCC
6 CLK 5 5 6 10 RT_PHO 4 White
+
C Sam ple carousel zero
6
5
9 10 6 11 2 Black
J5 7 8 GND - position sensor
7 J20 1 12 GND 3 Green E BA40-21-
8 10 12 14
7
11 12
5 DOUT 8 9
13 14 9 1 10 13 VCC 1 Red
9 11 13
14 RTC_PHO 4 White + Sam ple carousel coder
15 16 2 GND 10 1
1 2
1 15 GND 2 Black C sensor
11 +12V 11 -
3-carousel Drive 3 16 GND 3 Green BA40-21-
17 18 13 AGND 12 1 4
1
E
19 20 Board 1 6
5 1 17 VCC 1 Red
+
18 ST_PHO 4 White
C Reaction carousel zero
051-001801-00 1 8
7 2 19 GND 2 Black - position sensor
20 GND 3 Green E BA40-21-
0
9 2
2
2 2
1 2 21 VCC 1 Red
+
22 STC_PHO 4 White
C Reaction carousel coder
3
2 4
2 23 GND 2 Black - sensor
24 GND 3 Green E BA40-21-
1
5 6
7
2 2
2 8
7 25 VCC 1 Red
2
3 +
8
26 REAC_PHO 4 White Reagent carousel zero

1 Red 1 C
B Cleaning fluid heater 2
CA_W_1
J9 9 0
3 3 27 GND 2 Black -
position sensor B
3
2 White VCC
9 10 11 12
28 3 Green BA40-21-
1 2
GND E
1 Red 5 3 3 29 1 Red
4
CA_W_2 VCC
Cleaning fluid heater 2 White 6 VCC 3 4 30 REACC_PHO 4 White + Reagent carousel
Over-the- J2 J27 C
31 GND 2 Black -
5
coder sensor
air 32 GND 3 Green E BA40-21-
Connection wire for cleaning fluid connectio 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
13 14
11 12
6
9 10
7
5
3
1
n 33 NC
heater and temperature switch 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 34 NC
8
6
4
2
6 GND
17 OUT_PUMP
13 CON_A
14 CON_B
10 DILUET_A_EMPTY
19
30
31
8 DILUTE_B_FULL
12 LEV_SEN_RES
5 +5V
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
32
18
21
22
7 DILUTE_B_EMPTY
11 MAIN_VAL_CON
2 WATER_TANK_EMPTY
9 WATER_TANK_FULL
4 DILUET_A_FULL
1 H_CON_WASTE_POT
3 L_CON_WASTE_POT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connection wire
Connection wire for 3-carousel
for 3-carousel board and pump/
board and pump/ valve drive
valve drive board s board s level
pump/valve detection sensor
11
10
17
12
13
14
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
11
12
13
14
MINDRAY
19
30
31
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 A
3
1
1
1
9
7 8
5 6
3 4
1 2
A
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
TITLE: Wiring diagram 2 of 3-carousel
01
1
4
1
2
J2 drive board
File： Bytes： Pump/Valve Drive J3 J5
Board DWG NO. REV 1.0
Date： Time： KF-BA43-3-0083
051-000957-00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-63
6Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 SHIELD 1 1 SHIELD Brown (BRN) 2

D Reaction carousel 2 REF 2 D
sensor 1
2 J1 SHIELD
3 SENSOR
3 3 NC Red (RED) 3
1 2 5 GND Violet (VIO) 8

1 SHIELD 1 6 GND White (WHT) 10
3 4
Reaction carousel 2 REF J2
2 Reaction carousel 7 White-Black (WHT-BLK) 11
sensor 2 3 SENSOR
5 6
3 temperature 7 8 8 White-Brown (WHT-BRN) 12
collection board RST Orange (ORN) 4
9 10 9
J5 RXD
10 Yellow (YEL) 5
11 12
1 SHIELD 1
Reaction carousel 2 REF J3 13 14
11 NC Green (GRN) 6
2
sensor 3 3 SENSOR 15 16
12 TXD Black (BLK) 1
3
13 ISP Blue (BLU) 7 Cable connecting
C 17 18 C
14 White-Red (WHT-RED) 13 the slip ring to the
19 20 reaction carousel
15 GND White-Violet (WHT-VIO) 18
Use M3 pan head screw
Fix on the reaction 1
Blac
GND GND
temperature
k 1 16
carousel J4 collection board
Reaction carousel 2 17 VPP Gray (GRY) 9 and the reaction
earthing wire
18 VPP carousel heater
19 GND
20 GND
B Heater cable of B
Temperature reaction carousel
1
protection switch (for 1 24V White-Yellow (WHT-YEL) 15
J3 1
reaction carousel) 2
Heater conversion 2 24V White-Blue (WHT-BLU) 17
2
board of reaction J1 White-Orange (WHT-ORN) 14
3 CTRL
3
carousel 4 CTRL White-Green (WHT-GRN) 16
Reaction carousel 1
BA38-30-87927 4
J2
heater 2
A
MINDRAY A
Wiring diagram of reaction carousel
TITLE: temperature collection board
File： Bytes：
Date： Time：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-64
6Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
1 SHIELD 1
Wiring of wash solution 2 REF Connection wire for
temperature sensor
2 J1 cleaning fluid
3 SENSOR
3 temperature control
board and 3-disk
2
1
drive board
4
3
4 SYNC_ADT_AU 1
2
1
8 A_AU 2
3 3
6
5
DIN_ADT_AU
1 SHIELD 1 Cleaning fluid 10 4
4
3
B_AU
Wiring of cleaning fluid 6 5
8 10 12 14 16 18 20
7
CLK_ADT_AU
2 REF
J2 temperature 12 C_AU 6
6
5
2
temperature sensor 7 J20 3-carousel Drive
9 11 13 15 17 19
C SENSOR 7 BUSY_ADT_AU C
3 control board 5 8
8 10 12 14
7
DO UT_ADT_AU
3 J5 NC 9 Board
BA38-20-88228 13 10
9 11 13
GND
11 11
14
+12V
AGND 12 051-001801-00
NC 13
NC 14
B B
A
MINDRAY A
Wiring diagram of cleaning fluid
TITLE:
temperature control board
File： Bytes：
Date： Time：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-65
6Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Connection wire for reagent

refrigeration temperature Semi-conductive Semi-conductive Semi-conductive Semi-conductive
sensor cooler cooler cooler cooler
D BA30-21-15175
D
2 Black
2 Black
2 Black
3 Black connectors 2 Black
4 Black connectors 2 Black

1 Red
1 Red
1 Red
1 Red
1 Red
Patch cord for reagent
refrigeration sensor and Connection wire for
1 Black connectors
2 Black connectors
Control
Control
refrigeration board
Control
Control
semi-conductive peltier
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
2 Black
1 Red
5 Red
6 Red
7 Red
8 Red
Connection wire
1 for reagent 1 2 3 4 4 Red VCC 2 Red
1 2 Antifogging
refrigeration temperature
board and 5 6 7 8 3 1
4
power supply
J1 Connection wire for
switch
J3
3
1 24V board Red demisting circuit and
1
Power supply conversion board
J15
1 reagent refrigeration
2
2 FGND Black board
2 2
C J9 3 12VFAN Yellow
J12 2 2 C
Antifogging
1
051-000511-00
3 3
4 SGND Green 1 Black GND 1 Black heater
4 4
Reagent
1 12V Red 1
refrigeration board
P1 P1
2 12V Red 2 051-000052-00
051-001801-00
3-carousel drive
3 GND Black 1 4 VCC 1
1
4
P2 P2
board
4 GND Black 2 3 COOL_FAN 2
J22
3
Connection wire
J14
2 for reagent 2 AD_FAN 3
3
2
refrigeration
board and power
J13 J11 J8 J5 J6 1 GND 4
4
1
supply board
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2
Connection wire for 3-
B carousel drive board B
and fan blocking sensor
2 Yellow
2 Yellow
1 Black
1 Black
1 Black
1 Black
1 Black
3 Red
3 Red
2 Red
2 Red
2 Red
Patch cord 1 for Connection wire 2 Patch cord for
DATA
DATA
VCC
VCC
refrigeration fan for reagent
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC
VCC
VCC
light source
and reagent refrigeration
refrigeration board and power
fan
board supply board
2 Yellow
2 Yellow
1 Black
1 Black
3 Black
1 Black
1 Black
3 Red
3 Red
1 Red
2 Red
2 Red
PCB cooling
Refrigeration fan Refrigeration fan Light source fan PCB cooling fans
fans
A
MINDRAY A
Wiring diagram of Reagent
TITLE: refrigeration board
File： Bytes：
Date： Time：
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-66
C
A
B
D
File：
Date：
board
1
1
for 3-disk board

and pump/valve
Connection wire
J2
1 2 1 D_WATER_IN 1
2 DILUTE_VALVE 2
board and valve

3 4
Cable connecting
pump/valve drive
3 WAS_1_2 3
5 6 4 WAS_3 4
SV08 reagent probe exterior wash Red 12V 1 1 2
5 GND 5 1 2
Black V12S 2 7 8
valve 3 4 6 WAS_4 6
9 10 7 WAS_5
3 4
SV07 sample probe exterior wash Red 12V 5 7
Black V34S 6
5 6
8 WAS_6 8 5 6
Time：
Bytes：
valve 11 12
7 8 9 H_WASTE_OUT 9
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003

Red 12V 7 7 8
13 14 10 GND 10
SV10 sample mixer wash valve Black VRP 8 9 10 11 L_WASTE_OUT 11 9 10
15 16 12 WASTE_IN
Red 12V 9 11 12 12
Black V56S 10 13 VACUUM_RELEASE 11 12
J2
SV11 reagent mixer wash valve 17 18 13

13 14 14 VAC_TANK_WASTE_OUT 14 13 14
2
2
Red 12V 11 19 20 15 GND

15 16 15
SV01 water supply valve Black V SP 12
21 22 16 RES_VALVE1 16 15 16
J9
051-001801-00
Red 12V 15 17 18 17 RES_VALVE2 17

SV16 cuvette phase 3 injection 23 24 17 18
Black VOUT 16 19 RES_PUMP1 19
valve 19 20 30 VCC 30
3-carousel Drive Board
25 26 19 20
Red 12V 17 21 22 31 VCC 31
SV17 cuvette phase 4 injection 21 22
Black V12S 18 27 28
valve 23 24
Red 12V 19 29 30 23 24
SV18 cuvette phase 4 injection Black V34S 20 25 26
valve 31 32 25 26
Red 12V 21 27 28
SV15 cuvette phase 1/2 injection 27 28
Black VRP 22 33 34
valve 29 30
29 30
SV19 cuvette phase 6 injection Red 12V 23
31 32
Black V56S 24 31 32
valve 33 34
33 34
10 GND 20
3
3
11 VCC 32
12 D_WATER_PUMP 18
13 CON_WAS_PUMP 21
1 2 14 OUTER_VAC_PUMP 22
3 4
5 6
P11 cuvette phase 1/2 waste Red 12V 1
Black P23S 2 1 2 7 8
pump J31
Red 12V 3 3 4 9 10
Black P8S 4
Wiring of 3-
probe board
P15 cuvette phase 8 waste pump 5 6 11 12 1 2

and pump/valve
7 8 13 14 3 4
1 +5V 1
9 10 15 16 2 V_IN_COM 2 5 6
Red 12V 11 3 R1_VALUE_OUT 3
17 18 7 8
P14 cuvette phase 7 waste pump Black POUT 12 11 12 4 GND 4
4
4
9 10
J3
5
J12
13 14 19 20 5 R2_VALUE_OUT
P13 cuvette phase 5/6 waste Red 12V 13
6 GND 6
Black P45S 14 11 12
pump 15 16 7 S_VALUE_OUT 7
Red 12V 15 8 RM_VALUE 8 13 14
17 18
051-001800-00
P04 interior wash pump Black P67S 16 9 SM_VALUE 9

15 16
3-probe Drive Board
19 20
21 22 17 18
Red 12V 23 23 24 19 20
P12 cuvette phase 3/4 waste Black PIN 24
pump 25 26
Board
15 16
051-000957-00
13 14
Pump/Valve Drive
11 12
5
5
board and pump

Cable connecting
9 10
pump/valve drive
water pump
J7
8 7
Wiring of deionize d
6 5
1 +24V P03 deionized
1 H_CON_WASTE_POT 1 4 3 2 PUMP_2
FL01 water water circulating
tank is empty 2 GND 2 pump
1
2
2 1
3
4
5
6
1 WATER_TANK_EMPTY 3
FL04 water
7
tank is full 2 GND 4

9
8 10
1 L_CON_WASTE_POT
board level
FL06 diluted 5
J11
for 3-disk board
detection sensor
Connection wire
and pump/valve
6
6
wash solution 2 GND 6 14 CON_B

J27
14
tank is empty 13 14 13 13 CON_A
12 12 LEV_SEN_RES 13 14
11 12
FL11 low- 1 DILUET_A_FULL 7 11 11 MAIN_VAL_CON
11 12
concentration waste
9 10 10 10 DILUET_A_EMPTY
2 GND 8 9 9 WATER_TANK_FULL
collector is full
J5
8 7 9 10
8 8 DILUTE_B_FULL
6 5 7 7 DILUTE_B_EMPTY 8 7
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
1 DILUTE_B_EMPTY
6 GND
9
6
FL13 external high- 4 3
5 5 +5V
6 5
concentration 2 GND 10 4 DILUET_A_FULL
051-001801-00
2 1 4 4 3
waste tank is full 3 3 L_CON_WASTE_POT
2 1
3-carousel Drive Board
2 2 WATER_TANK_EMPTY
1 1 H_CON_WASTE_POT
TITLE:
7
7
DWG NO.
board level
detection sensor
Cable connecting
SHEET 13OF
pump/valve drive
Cable
and power
connecting
drive board
pump/valve
supply board
J4
12 +24V
11 12 11 +24V 11 12
13
9 10
10 GND
9 +24V 9 10
8 7 8 GND 8 7
7 +12V
6 5 6 5
J1
board
6 GND
KF-BA43-3-0083
4 3 5 +12V 4 3
drive board
Power supply
4 GND
BA40-30-61627
2 1 2 1
3 +12V
MINDRAY
8
2 GND
1 +12V
SIZE A3
Wiring diagram of pump/valve
REV 1.0
C
A
B
D
6-67
6Hardware Circuits
7 Hydropneumatic System
7.1 Overview
Main functions of the BS-430 hydropneumatic system are as follows:
 To provide deionized water for washing interior/exterior of probes and mixers via
the probe wash module.
 To provide deionized water and wash solution for cuvette auto wash module.
 To provide the whole unit with deionized water via the water supply module and to
discharge waste liquid via the drainage module.
This chapter describes the working principles and repairing methods of the BS-430's
hydropneumatic system.
7-1
7Hydropneumatic System
7.2 Fluidic Diagram

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MRSZ/R05N01.291.01（2.0） REV ECN DESCRIPTION DESIGN
Pipe label 1.0 / New Jiang Boshi
Deionized Diluted wash Vacuum 2.0 Changed the material code of auto wash syringe SY05 Ji ang Boshi
SV02 SY01 EBJ317
water solution
D11 D12 D13 D14 ZQ01
T311 T312 Concentrated ZQ02
T313 T314 T315 T316 Waste
PRE04 wash solution ZQ03
A ZQ04
ZQ05
ZQ06
SV03 SY02 ZQ07
D21 D22 D23 ZQ08
T321 T322 T323 T324
T302
T317 Reagent Reaction
NR
T325
NS MIXS MIXR Carousel ZZ30 ZZ29 ZZ28 ZZ27
Carousel
T414
D37
D03
D40
D43 D46 SV19
T208 T206 T210 T212
ZZ26 T413
B P04 D39 D36 D42 D45
T207 T205 T209 T211
D38 D35 D41 D44 SV18 T412
ZZ25 T411
ZZ24 SI1 SI2 SI3 SI4 SI5 SI6 SI7 SI8 T603 T602 T601
W06 W07
SV17 ZZ23
SV08 SV07 SV10 SV11 ZZ09 ZZ08 ZQ11 ZQ10 ZQ09
SV16
W03
W04 T608 T607 T606 T605 T604
ZQ16 ZQ15 ZQ14 ZQ13 ZQ12
T701 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11
ZZ22 ZZ21 ZZ20 ZZ19

ZQ21 ZQ20 ZQ19 ZQ18
W05
C D02
T703 T702 T410 T409
FL11
Low-conc. W09 W08
W02 W01 ZZ18 ZZ17 T506
Waste T610 T609
tank
(CAN08) T406Name: T408 ZQ23
ZZ16 ZZ15
T405 T407
ZZ14 T404 ZZ13
ZZ07 ZQ22
D34
PRE05 D33
D31 ZZ11 ZZ12
T121 T402 DI water T403
D32 preheat T505
T204
D J18
T203 Wash
ZQ17
T502 T503
T202 solution ZZ06
T401 ZZ03
T120 T201 preheat
T116 T117 SV15
MF03 CAN12 Legend
J15
Manifold J16
NO Three-way Restrictive
T115 ZZ05
T504
T118 ZZ02 COM NC solenoid valve valve Floater
J14
ZZ04
T114 Throt02 W10
T119
Wash well Filter
T301
Syringe
T113
J17
SY05
J02 Two-way
J13 Pressure IN
Pump OUT solenoid
E gauge valve
FL04 ZZ01
D01
J12 J11
P03 T111
FL01 T102
T112
T612
Water supply DI. Water tank SV01 T611
pump (CAN01)
T101 T704 T501
Security Classification:
DI water Low-conc. Dil Detergent Low-conc. High-conc. Confidential
Confidenti al
inlet waste outlet 1 inlet waste outlet 2 waste outlet
TITLE Schematic diagram of BS-430
DOC No. A1-115-036682-00
F Confidenti al: The diagram and al l its intellectual property rights (including the copyright) shall be owned by Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electroni cs Co., Ltd. Wi thout Mi ndray s prior w ritten permission, the content of this diagram (including but not limited to the information, DESIGN Jiang Boshi REV. 2.0
data and calculation resul ts i n the diagram) may not be used, copied or replicated by any means, whether whol ly or parti al ly.
Classified documents, This set of draw ing(s) and al l it's intel lectual property rights (including copyright) subsisting herein are property of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd. No disclosure,use,copies or reproductions should be made of this drawing or any part(s) P.CODE BA43 SIZE A3
thereof for w hatever purpose nor shall any i nformation, data, cal culati ons, or other contents contained in this drawi ng be disseminated wi thout prior written permission of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd
Software &Rev:
SHEET 1 OF 8
Microsoft visio 2003
7-2
1 2 3 4 5 6
MRSZ/R05N01.291.02（2.0）
Fluidic Port Panel

A
DI water Low-conc. Dil Detergent Low-conc. High-conc.
inlet waste outlet1 inlet waste outlet2 waste outlet
T10 T70 T50 T61 T61
1 4 1 2 1
J32 Water supply Low-level High-level

module
J43
(OP01) floater of
ZQ31 ZQ30
floater of
high-
diluted wash concentration
W11
ZZ50 solution waste
T13 FIL01
B 2 J44
T51 T61
0 3
FIL01 J42 ZZ51 FL06 FL13
T13 Waste
1
outlet
OUT1 OUT2 IN
Water unit J41 Dil Detergent tank High-conc. waste tank

(CAN2) (CAN10)
C
J31
External
water tank
Security Classification:
Confidential
Confidenti al
D
TITLE Schematic diagram of BS-430
Confidenti al: The diagram and al l its intellectual property rights (including the copyright) shall be owned by Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electroni cs Co., Ltd. Wi thout
Mindray s prior w ritten permission, the content of this diagram (including but not limited to the information, data and calculation resul ts i n the diagram ) may not be
DOC No. A1-115-036682-00
used, copied or replicated by any means, whether whol ly or parti al ly.
Classi fied documents, This set of draw ing(s) and al l it's intel lectual property rights (including copyright) subsisting herein are property of Shenzhen Mi ndray Bi o-
DESIGN Jiang Boshi REV. 2.0
medical Electronics Co.,Ltd. No disclosure,use,copies or reproductio ns should be made of thi s drawing or any part(s) thereof for w hatever purpose nor shall any P.CODE BA43 SIZE A4
information, data, cal culati ons, or other contents contained in this drawi ng be disseminated wi thout prior written permission of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical
Electronics Co.,Ltd 2 OF Software &Rev:
SHEET 8
Microsoft visio 2003
7-3
7.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System

The hydropneumatic system of the BS-430 is composed of the probe wash module, cuvette
wash station, and water supply/drainage module. See the figures below:
Hydropneu matic
subsystem
Probe/mixer wash Cuvette Wash Water inlet/ Optional Mod ules

module Module outlet module
Reagent probe c leaning
Sample probe cleaning
Water supply module

Whole unit water inlet
Cuvette dispensing
Cuvette aspirating
Manual diluting
Mixer cleaning
Waste draining
7.3.1 Probe Wash Module
The probe/mixer wash module consists of one sample probe, one reagent probe, two mixers
(collectively known as the four probes), and two syringes. The sample syringe is 250μl, and the
reagent syringe is 500μl.
This module is used for fixed-quantity sampling and probe/mixer cleaning.
 Fixed-quantity sampling is realized through cooperation of the syringes, sampling
valves and probes with the aim of delivering fixed-quantity reagent and sample.
 The washing of the interior of the sample probe and reagent probe is driven by the
same probe interior wash pump P04. The washing is completed respectively under
the control of the interior wash valve.
 The exterior of the four probes is washed through the deionized water circulating
pump P03, which is controlled by the exterior wash solenoid valve and adjusted by
the restrictive tube.
The schematic diagram of the probe wash module is as shown below.
7-4
Figure 7.1 Schematic diagram of probe wash module
SV02 SY01
PRE04
SV03 SY02
NR NS MIXS MIXR
P04
SV08 SV07 SV10 SV11
7.3.2 Cuvette Wash Module

The cuvette wash unit is divided into dispense module and aspirate module, which cooperate
with each other to clean the reaction cuvettes for 8 phases, making repeated use of cuvettes
possible.
Inlet module:
 In phase 1 and 2, the cuvette wash syringe (10ml) provides diluted wash solution
(alkaline); in phase 3 to 6, the deionized water circulating pump provides deionized
water; in phase 7 and 8, no liquid is injected.
 The diluted wash solution provided for phase 1 and phase 2 is obtained by diluting
the concentrated wash solution with deionized water at the ratio of 1:10 by the
users.
 The dispense action in phases 3 to 6 is driven by the deionized water circulating
pump, which is controlled by the auto wash solenoid valve and adjusted by the
restrictive tube.
Aspirating module
 Five waste pumps are used to discharge the waste fluid and wipe the cuvettes after
cleaning. High-concentration waste is generated during phase 1-2 and
low-concentration waste during phase 3-8. Wipe blocks are provided to absorb the
remaining wash solution inside cuvettes during phase 7-8.
 During cuvette cleaning, when the 8-phase wash probe assembly starts to lower to
the cuvette, the waste pumps P11 to P15 are opened to discharge the waste from
the cuvette to the outside of the instrument.
The schematic diagram of the module is as shown below.
7-5
Figure 7.2 Schematic diagram of cuvette wash unit
SV19
SV18
SI1 SI2 SI3 SI4 SI5 SI6 SI7 SI8
SV17
SV16
P15 P14 P13 P12 P11
DI water
preheat
Wash solution
preheat
SV15
CAN12
FIL03 SY05
Low-conc. Dil Detergent Low-conc. High-conc.

waste outlet 1 inlet waste outlet 2 waste outlet
7.3.3 Water Supply/Drainage Module

The water supply/drainage module includes the water supply part and waste drainage part.
The water supply module delivers water from outside the instrument into the internal water
tank, which is then transported by the deionized water pump to other modules. This module
has the following features:
 Auto water supply and detection of fluid level are supported.
 The deionized water circulating pump is adopted to supply water for each wash unit,
and the restrictive valve is used to adjust the water supply pressure.
 The water supply experiences two filtrations. The first filtration is executed before
water is transported from the water supply equipment to the internal water tank,
and the second filtration executed before the water is distributed by the deionized
water pump to each wash unit.
 A water supply module, used for transporting deionized water to the internal water
tank, is provided for optional configuration.
The drainage module allows discharging high-/low-concentration waste separately. The
high-concentration waste is directly discharged by the waste pump P11 to the external
high-concentration waste tank. The low-concentration waste 1 is collected by gravity to the
low-concentration waste tank and then discharged by gravity out of the instrument. The
low-concentration waste 2 is directly discharged by the waste pumps P12 and P13 out of the
instrument.
The low-concentration waste containers and the external high-concentration waste tank are
capable of detecting fluid level.
The high-concentration waste is produced during cuvette cleaning in phase 1-2.
Low-concentration waste 1 comes from the following sources:
 Cleaning interior/exterior of sample probe and reagent probes
 Cleaning exterior of sample mixer and reagent mixer
7-6
 Auto cuvette cleaning in phase 7-8
 Condensate water of the reagent carousels
 Overflowed fluid of the reaction carousel
Low-concentration waste 2 comes from the following sources:

 Auto cuvette cleaning in phase 3-6
The fluidic diagram of the module is as shown below.

Figure 7.3 Fluidic diagram of water supply/drainage module
Reagent Reaction
Carousel Carousel
FL11
Low-conc. Waste
tank (CAN08)
PRE05
MF03
Manifold
Throt02
FIL02
FL04
P03 FL01
Water supply pump DI. Water tank SV01
(CAN01)
DI water Low-conc. Low-conc. High-conc.

inlet waste outlet 1 waste outlet 2 waste outlet
7.3.4 Other
The Hydropneumatic system of BS-430 contains five external interfaces, as shown in the figure
below. Where,
 Three fluidic outlets. High concentration waste outlet, low concentration waste
outlet 1 and low concentration waste outlet 2.
 Two fluidic inlets. Used to connect the DI water tank and diluted wash solution tank.
 Two control cable connectors: Used for connecting the liquid level sensor of high
concentration waste and liquid level sensor of diluted wash solution.
7-7
Figure 7.4 External fluidic interfaces of the BS-430
No. Name
1 Low-concentration waste 1
2 Low-concentration waste 2 4 7
3 High-concentration waste
4 Deionized water
5 Diluted wash solution
6 Diluted wash solution sensor
7 High-concentration waste sensor
3 6
2 5
Waste Water
Legend
Wash Sensor
1
solution
7.4 Introduction of Fluidic Actions

7.4.1 Fluidic Initialization
The specific procedure is described below:
1 All pumps and valves are powered off and restored to the initial status.
2 Liquid waste of the primary vacuum container is discharged.
3 Check the status of the water tank, diluted wash solution tank, low-concentration
waste tank, primary vacuum container, external high-concentration waste tank, and
floater. If related alarm is removed, the system moves to the next step. If not, the
system gives out the alarm and the fluidic initialization fails.
4 Perform the exterior cleaning and priming of the probe and mixer (P03 is not closed
after this step is performed).
5 The phase 1-2 auto wash syringes are reset.
6 Prime the wash station for three times to remove air bubbles in the auto wash tube.
Notes:
The fluidic initialization is one part of the startup, system recovery and system wakeup
procedure.
7.4.2 Prime Wash Station

The specific procedure is described below:
1 Open auto wash waste pumps P11 to P15.
2 The wash station moves to the bottom of the cuvette.
3 Prime the wash station for three times.
7-8
4 After the prime, close the auto wash solenoid valve. The auto wash syringes are
reset. The wash station moves to the home position. Close waste pumps P11 to P15.
7.5 Removing and Reinstalling Hydropneumatic Components

This section describes removing and installation methods of the Hydropneumatic components,
and provides schematic diagrams and pictures of components for service engineers to refer.
7.5.1 Overview
When a software alarm is displayed on the BS-430 fully-automated biochemistry analyzer,
service engineers can analyze the instrument status and finally locate the failure source, and if
necessary, replace the failed part or component. Generally, service engineers are not
recommended to remove the electric devices, such as pumps, solenoid valves, clog detection
device, syringes, etc. Only when both hardware and software are confirmed normal but the
Hydropneumatic alarm still remains are service engineers suggested to remove the relevant
device and then analyze or replace it.
Prior to removing Hydropneumatic components, make sure that all pumps and solenoid valves
of the Hydropneumatic system have been turned off, and both the analyzer power switch and
main power switch have been placed to the OFF position.
Table 7.1 Necessary tools for removing/installing Hydropneumatic components
Name Requirement Quantity
Cross screwdriver / 1
Hexagon screwdriver / 1
Flathead screwdriver / 1
Cable tie / Several
Diagonal pliers / 1
Tube cutter / 1
7-9
7.5.2 Probe Wash Module

Figure 7.5 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Probe wash module-front view
Reagent wash Reagent mixer Sample mixer Sample probe
well wash well wash well wash well
Syringe T piece
Reagent probe Sample probe interior

interior wash valve wash valve
Syringe 250μl
Syringe 500ul
Clog detection T-
piece assembly
Figure 7.6 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Probe wash module-rear view
Probe/mixer exterior
wash solenoid valve
Interior
wash pump
7-10
1 Syringe 500ul (shared with the FRU
801-BA10-00022-00
BS-200)
2 801-BA38-00040-00 Syringe T-piece (FRU, shared with FRU
the BS-200)
3 FRU / Reagent
115-037053-00 Reagent valve assembly interior wash
valve
4 801-3101-00001-00 Syringe 250μl (FRU) FRU
5 115-022008-00 Clog detection T-piece assembly FRU
6 FRU / Sample
115-037054-00 Sample valve assembly probe interior
wash valve
7 BA30-21-15311 KNF diaphragm pump assembly FRU/Probe
interior wash
pump
8 115-022008-00 Clog detection T-piece assembly FRU
9 FRU/4-probe
082-002273-00 Valve LVMK21-6J cable exterior wash
solenoid valve
10 115-037307-00 Sample probe tubing assembly FRU
11 115-037308-00 Reagent probe tubing assembly FRU
12 043-006899-00 Wash well shell FRU
13 801-BA40-00221-00 Wash well (mould MR61463) FRU
Removing/Reinstalling fluidic pump

When to do
The pump does not work, that is, there is no flow or pressure.
The pump flow and pressure is low.
The pump has leaks.
Noise is produced when the pump is working.
Removing steps
1 Disconnect the pump’s power cord connector.

2 Mark the connection mode of the inlet and outlet tubes and prevent them from
being confused.
3 Remove the tubes and apply straps on their openings or place a container under it
to prevent liquid from entering the instrument.
4 Loosen the screws fixing the pump and then remove the pump.
Installation procedure
1 Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the marks and then tighten the tube
clamps.
2 Tighten the retaining screws to fix the pump.
3 Make sure that the power cord is connected correctly.
Verification steps
7-11
Refer to 8.11Hydropneumatic Unit Alignment.
NOTE:
Exercise caution to avoid confusing the inlet tube with the outlet tube.
Make sure that the power cord of the DC pump is connected to the correct positive and negative ends.
Figure 7.7 Structure of Fluidic Components on the Right Side
Probe interior
wash pump
Removing/Installing solenoid valves

When to do
When a solenoid valve cannot be turned on or has leaks, it needs to be removed and then
analyzed or replaced.
Removing steps
1 Disconnect the solenoid valve’s power cord connector.

2 Mark the installation direction of the valve and the connection mode of the inlet and
outlet tubes to prevent them from being confused.
3 Remove the tubes and apply strap on their openings to prevent liquid spraying.
4 Loosen the screws on the solenoid valve and then remove the solenoid valve.
1 Check the installation direction according to the marks, connect the inlet and outlet
tubes, and then tighten the tube clamps or straps.
2 Tighten the retaining screws to fix the solenoid valve.
3 Make sure that the power cord is connected to the correct positive and negative
ends.
Verification steps
7-12
Figure 7.8 Details of probe/mixer wash solenoid valve assembly
Figure 7.9 Details of cuvette wash solenoid valve assembly
Removing and reinstalling restrictive tube

When to do
Remove the restrictive tube for analysis or replacement if it is clogged with a result of
inadequate water flow in probe/mixer exterior wash or phases 3-6 dispense of cuvette wash.
Removing steps
1 Check the connecting position of the restrictive tube, and mark its inlet and outlet to
avoid confusion.
2 Remove one end of the restrictive tube and collect the residual water with a
container.
3 Unplug the other end of the restrictive tube and remove the tube mark on it.
1 Cut off a section of restrictive tube (082-001649-00) for the same length as the old
one.
2 Sleeve the tube mark and install the restrictive tube in the original position.
Verification steps
Refer to 8.11.5Fluidic Prime.
NOTE:
When removing or installing the restrictive tube, prevent misconnection and do not pull or bend it too much.
7-13
Figure 7.10 Tube connection diagram of flow restrictor for probe wash
Figure 7.11 Tube connection diagram of flow restrictor for auto wash
No. FRU No. or Part No. Part Name Remarks

14 082-001649-00 Tube.1/16"X1/8" FRU/Restrictiv
ND-100-65(ADF02002),Tygon e tube
7-14
7.5.3 Cuvette Wash Module

Figure 7.12 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Cuvette wash module(a) -right rear view
Phase 3-6 auto wash

Solenoid Valve
Preheating assembly
Phase 1-8 waste

pump
Phase 1-2 auto

wash syringe
Phase 1-2 auto
wash solenoid
valve
7-15
Figure 7.13 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Cuvette wash module(b) -front view
Wash probe assembly
Wipe block

1 Rotational diaphragm pump FRU/Phase 1-8
082-002420-00
assembly waste pump
2 FRU/Phase 3-6 auto
082-002273-00 Valve LVMK21-6J cable
wash solenoid valve
3 BA38-21-88190 WTB-3R-N4E three-way solenoid FRU/Phase 1-2 auto
valve cables wash solenoid valve
4 115-011901-00 10ml screw lever-driven syringe FRU/Auto wash
assembly syringe assembly
5 115-020528-00 Preheating assembly FRU
6 043-000422-00 Filter FRU
7 115-027921-00 Wash probe assembly FRU
8 041-005591-00 Wipe block FRU
9 BA38-30-88154 Wash phase probe assembly FRU
10 BA40-30-61934 Wipe phase probe assembly FRU
Removing/Reinstalling wash syringe assembly

When to do
Analyze or replace the wash syringe when it has abnormal sound, worse precision, leaking, or
other failures.
7-16
Removing steps
1 Disconnect the syringe motor cable and sensor cable.

2 Remove the tube from the barbed connector of the syringe.
3 Remove the four M3×12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers and
flat washers and remove the syringe.
1 Install the four M3×12 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washers and
flat washers and do not miss the shock pad.
2 Cut off a little from the tube's end and insert the tube to the barbed connector of the
syringe. If a strap has been applied, restore it.
3 Connect the syringe motor cable and sensor cable.
4 Power on the analyzer, log on the software with service user account, and then
select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Engineer -> Clear. If the cuvette
wash syringe is replaced, select the "Replace Cuvette Wash Syringe" item. Click OK
to zero the use count of the relevant syringe.
Verification steps
Replacing waste pump

When to do
The pump does not work, that is, there is no flow or pressure.
The pump flow and pressure is low.
The pump has leaks.
Noise is produced when the pump is working.
Removing steps
1 Disconnect the pump’s power cord connector.
2 Mark the connection mode of the inlet and outlet tubes and prevent them from
being confused.
3 Remove the tubes and apply straps on their openings or place a container under it
to prevent liquid from entering the instrument.
4 Loosen the screws fixing the pump and then remove the pump.
1 Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the marks and then tighten the tube
clamps.
2 Tighten the retaining screws to fix the pump.
3 Make sure that the power cord is connected correctly.
Verification steps
7-17
NOTE:
Exercise caution to avoid confusing the inlet tube with the outlet tube.
Make sure that the power cord of the DC pump is connected to the correct positive and negative ends.
Phase 1-8 waste pump
Removing/Reinstalling cuvette wash preheating assembly

When to do
 The heater is damaged.
 The temperature sensor is damaged.
 The temperature protection switch is damaged.
 The canister has leaks.
 The connectors are leaking.
Removing steps
2 Open the rear panel.
3 Mark the connection modes of the following parts: inlet/outlet tubes, heaters,
sensors and temperature protection switches for wash solution and deionized
water.
4 Disconnect the connectors of the heaters, sensors and protection switches.
5 Loosen the two hexagon socket head screws fixing the cuvette wash preheating
assembly.
6 Apply straps on the tube openings to prevent liquid from flowing out.
7 Disconnect the inlet and outlet tubes.
1 Prepare a new cuvette wash preheating assembly.
7-18
2 Connect the connectors according to the marks.
3 Connect the tubes according to the marks.
4 Use two M4×8 hexagon socket head screws to fix the preheating assembly.
5 Check if the installation is complete.
6 Restore the instrument.
7 Connect the power supply and perform fluidic prime before starting test.
Verification steps
Refer to 8.11Hydropneumatic Unit Alignment and 8.12Pyrology Unit.
NOTE:
Operate carefully to prevent liquid from entering the instrument.
Connect the tubes and connectors correctly.
Do not confuse the heater and sensor channel of wash solution with those of cleaning fluid.
Figure 7.14 Structure of cuvette wash preheating assembly
Wash solution
outlet
Wash solution
Wash
heater/sensor
solution inlet
Cleaning fluid
Cleaning heater/sensor
fluid inlet
Cleaning
fluid outlet
Replacing cuvette wash preheating assembly — heater

When to do
 The heater is damaged.
Removing steps

2 Disassemble the cuvette wash preheating assembly by referring to 7.5.3Cuvette
Wash Module-Removing/Reinstalling cuvette wash preheating assembly, and mark
properly.
3 Loosen the four M3×12 cross pan head screws on the wash preheating container.
4 Remove the heater.
1 Prepare a new heater.
2 Use four M3×12 cross pan head screws to fix the heater on the wash preheating
container.
3 Install the cuvette wash preheating container.
7-19
Verification steps
NOTE:
After replacement, perform fluidic prime to check whether there is any leakage on the wash preheating
assembly.
Cleaning fluid
heater
Cleaning fluid
heater
Replacing cuvette wash preheating assembly — temperature switch

When to do:
 The temperature protection switch is damaged.
Removing steps

properly.
3 Loosen the four M3×12 cross pan head screws on the wash preheating container.
4 Remove the temperature protection switch that needs replacing.
1 Prepare the new temperature protection switch, and apply KP97 thermal paste on
the text side of the temperature protection switch.
2 Use four M3×12 cross pan head screws to fix the heater on the wash preheating
container.
3 Install the cuvette wash preheating container.
7-20
Verification steps
NOTE:
After replacement, perform fluidic prime to check whether there is any leakage on the wash preheating
assembly.
Wash solution
temperature switch
Cleaning fluid
temperature switch
Replacing cuvette wash preheating assembly — temperature sensor

When to do
The temperature sensor is damaged.
Removing steps

properly.
3 Cut the cable tie that fixes the heater, and remove the temperature sensor that
needs replacing.
1 Prepare the new temperature sensor, and apply KP97 thermal paste on the sensor.
2 Install the sensor into the box spanner, and fix the sensor cable onto the heater
cable with a cable tie.
Verification steps
7-21
NOTE:
Wash solution
sensor
Temperature
switch sensor
Removing/Reinstalling filter
When to do
The filter should be maintained regularly.
Removing steps
1 Remove the rear panel of the analyzer. You will see the filter right below the fluidic
outlet assembly.
2 Remove the filter tube and the filter, and then apply straps on the tube opening to
prevent liquid inside the tube from spraying out.
1 Install the filter tube and apply a strap.
2 Install back the right panel assembly.
Verification steps
Figure 7.18 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Acetabular filter
Filter
7-22
Removing/Reinstalling wash probe assembly
When to do
When fluid overflows the cuvettes or the dispensed cleaning fluid is less than the normal
volume, probably a wash probe is clogged and needs to be removed and unclogged.
Removing steps
1 Manually loosen the retaining screws on the wash probe bracket.

2 Remove the wash probe assembly and place it in a container.
3 Turn on the dispense valves and vacuum valves, and then locate the clogged wash
probe.
4 Use a cleaning tool to unclog the probe.
1 Align the locating holes on the wash probe assembly with the stop studs on the
bracket, and then slightly tighten the retaining screws.
2 Lower the wash probe assembly, use an alignment tool or eyes to check the phase
7/8 wipe blocks corresponding to the cuvette wall, and then slightly adjust the wash
probe assembly to prevent the wash probes from colliding with the cuvettes.
3 After finishing the second step, completely tighten the retaining screws on the wash
probe assembly.
Verification steps
NOTE:
Operate carefully to prevent liquid from dropping into the reaction carousel and cuvettes.
7-23
7.5.4 Water Supply/Drainage Module

Figure 7.19 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Water supply/drainage module-front view
Water tank fluid level

sensor assembly
Pressure gauge
assembly
Deionized water
filter assembly
Water tank
assembly
Figure 7.20 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Water supply/drainage module-right rear
view
Restrictive valve
(self-made)
assembly
Low-concentration waste
Container assembly
Inlet valve assembly
Fluidic inlet/
Wash split outlet assembly
flow assembly
Panel connector +
Retaining nut
Deionized water
circulating pump
7-24
1 Pressure gauge assembly (with /
115-036803-00
connector)
2 Connector, quick connector, with Connector
082-002334-00
one-way valve, 3/8"NPT, PP (quick-change)
3 Connector
Connector, quick connector, with
082-002335-00 (quick female
one-way valve, L-type, 1/2"ID, PP
joint)
4 Stainless filter core, 316L, /
082-000371-00 100-mesh, refer to drawings for
dimensions customization
5 115-037309-00 Deionized water filter assembly /
6 Water tank fluid level sensor /
115-037311-00
assembly
7 115-036800-00 Water tank assembly /
8 Low-concentration waste /
115-036407-00
container assembly
9 115-037056-00 Flow splitting assembly /
11 115-024226-00 Inlet valve assembly (with /
connector)
12 009-002590-00 Deionized water pump cable /
13 115-006999-00 Restrictive valve (self-made) /
assembly
14 115-037049-00 Fluidic inlet/outlet assembly /
15 Connector. Panel-style /
082-001056-00
1/4-28UNF,1/8"ID,PP
16 Lock Nut,Panel Mount, /
M90-100012---
1/4-28UNF,White Nylon
Removing/Installing Water Tank

When to do
The water tank should be maintained regularly.
Removing steps
1 Disconnect the quick joint at the lower end of the water tank and drag out the water
tank about 1/3 position. Take out the liquid level sensor assembly and do not drag
the cable of the floater otherwise the cable may be damaged.
2 Drain about 3/4 water in the tank and remove the tube in the water tank.
2 Apply strap on the tube’s opening or place the tube in a container to prevent liquid
from entering the instrument.
3 Remove the water tank completely from the instrument and then clean it.
1 Insert the tube into the bottom of the water tank and adjust the tube to prevent
tangling.
2 Place the liquid level sensor assembly into the water tank and sort the cable. Do not
drag or pull the cable, joint or hose.
3 Connect the quick connector under the water tank.
7-25
Verification steps
N/A
NOTE:
Do not drag or pull the cable of the liquid level sensor otherwise bad contact may occur.
Removing/Installing Deionized Water Filter Assembly

When to do
When the stainless-steel filter core is regularly washed or replaced.
Removing steps
1 Disconnect the quick connector at the end of the deionized water filter assembly to
remove the deionized water filter from the bracket.
Figure 7.21 Replace the deionized water filter
Unscrew the filter

Fasten the filter
cap
Filter
core
Open the
connector
Remove the filter
core
2 Open the filter, and then clean it or replace the filter core.
1 Install the filter and fix it on the mounting bracket.

2 Install the quick connector on the upper end of the deionized water filter assembly.
7-26
Figure 7.22 Exploded view of deionized water filter
Filter core
O-shaped
sealing ring
Replacing Waste Container

When to do
When the containers have leaks or floater alarms or need to be maintained regularly.
Removing steps
1 Confirm and record all tubes connected with the container, and distinguish the inlet
tube from the outlet tube.
2 Remove the tubes, and then apply straps on the tube openings to prevent liquid
inside the tubes from spraying out.
3 Use a screwdriver to remove the container.
4 Replace or maintain the container.
1 Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the recorded connection mode, and
then tighten the tube clamps or straps.
2 Fix the container on the instrument.
Verification steps
N/A
7-27
7.5.5 External Modules

Water Supply Module (Optional)
Figure 7.23 Water supply module
Water inlet filter

assembly
Pressure Water
switch outlet
Water
inlet
5" tank
assembly Air vent
The external water supply module contains the following FRUs.

Table 7.5 FRU materials of the water supply module
1 801-BA40-00003-00 Diaphragm pump, 10W 24V FRU
0.68MPa
2 801-BA40-00274-00 Pressure switch material pack FRU
(FRU)
3 801-BA40-00194-00 5" tank assembly of external FRU
water supply module
4 115-021998-00 Water inlet filter assembly FRU
External High-concentration Waste Tank Cap Assembly

The external high-concentration waste tank cap assembly contains one FRU.
Table 7.6 High-concentration waste tank cap assembly (FRU)
1 115-037348-00 Cap of the waste tank FRU
Cap Assembly of the External Diluted Wash Solution Tank

The cap assembly of external diluted wash solution tank contains one FRU.
Table 7.7 High-concentration waste tank assembly (FRU)
1 115-037347-00 Wash buffer tank cap assembly FRU
7-28
8 Alignment
8.1 Basic Operation

8.1.1 Utility - Maintenance
Table 8.1 Utility - Maintenance
SN Functions
1, 2 Maintenance and Diagnostics: used to maintain and diagnose the system at user
end.
3 Alignment: used to align all mechanical positions, and the hydropneumatic,
pyrology and ISE units.
4 Parameters: used to inquire and configure parameters, and to export
parameters of each unit.
5 SPT: provides basic performance tests for the system, including photometer
test, precision test (dye), precision test (weight), cuvette residue test, and
carryover test.
7 Export parameters:Export alignment parameters of the mechanical positions.
8-1
8Alignment
Figure 8.1 Maintenance screen
NOTE:
Before replacing the main control board, you must export the alignment parameters to a local folder on the
Parameter Configuration window. After finishing the replacement, import the parameters to the software.
Otherwise, the system, when started up, will give an alarm indicating key parameters not configured and cannot
be restored. Also change the parameter of fluidic prime status.
8.1.2 Alignment Fixtures

Table 8.2 Alignment fixtures
SN PN Name Image/Precision Quanti
ty
1 BA2K-J12 BA2K cuvette alignment 2
fixture
2 043-000644-00 20ml reagent bottle 3

(BA31: brown)
043-002208-00 40ml brown reagent 3
bottle
BA43-J10 Reagent probe aspirate 6
position alignment
fixture
8-2
8 Alignment

ty
3 BA48-J10 Sample position 9
alignment tool
4 BA60-J07 Pseudo probe 2
5 BA49-J09 Mixer alignment tool 1
6 BA49-J05 Mixer alignment lever 2
7 BA2K-J04-001 BA2K mixer horizontal 2

position alignment
cuvette
8 BA49-J20 Mixer motor stopper 1
alignment tool
9 BA2K-J09 Wash station position 2

alignment cylinder
(BA2K-J09-001)
10 BA60-J21 Mixer wrench 2
11 BA43-J03 Wash probe position 1

alignment cylinder
(open)
12 BA48-J12 Sample probe wash well 2

alignment tool
8-3
8Alignment

ty
13 BA43-J01 Reagent carousel bar 1
code reader alignment
tool
14 BA43-J02 Reagent carousel 1

alignment tool
(T-shaped)
15 BA43-J05 Sample carousel bar 1

code reader alignment
tool
16 115-036803-00 Deionized water 1

pressure gauge
assembly (with
connector).
17 / Cylinder 5mL 1
18 / Clearance gauge 0.05mm 1
8.1.3 Mechanical Reset

Alignment methods and procedure:
1 Install the pseudo probe (BA60-J07), and block the collision sensor with folded
thick paper.
2 Access the Alignment window and select Mech Reset to reset the mechanical parts
of the system.
8-4
8 Alignment
8.2 Alignment Procedure

Figure 8.2 Alignment Procedure
Start icon
Down load midd le-

Install the operating
Preparation Powerin g On and low er-layer un it
software
program
Phot ometer u nit Signal Collecting Phot oelectric gain

Lamp Bright ness Adjustment Optimum position s ettings
align ment Position Adjust ment adjust ment
Reagent mixer rotary to Adju stin g positions of reagent Adju stin g positions of that from sample mixer motor to Adju stin g positions of sample
Mixer un it p arameter
horizontal position of mixer motor stopp er and horizontal position of reaction carou sel and from mixer motor stopp er and
debugging
reaction carousel sensor samp le/reagent mixer to wash position sensor
Mixer rotation speed

inspection
Bar code not

Parameter Rad ial position Circumferenti al positi on provided Circumferential position Circumferential position
debugging for adjust ment of probe adjustment of inner ring adjustment of middle ring adjustment of outer ring
samp le carousel u nit to reaction carousel of sample carousel of sample carousel of sample carousel
Bar code
provided
Bar Cod e Unit Print and attachin g of Sample Bar C ode Sample bar code stab ility Reagent b ar code reader Reagent b ar code
(Optional) bar code labels Reader Ad justment test adjust ment (BA43-J02) stability t est
Circumferential Circumferential
Reagent C arousel
Parameter Position Adjust ment Position Adjust ment
Outer Ring Reversed
debugging for of Reagent P rob e to of Reagent P rob e to
Stop Position
reagent carousel u nit Reagent C arousel Reagent C arousel
Compensat ion
Outer Ring Inner Rin g
Parameter Horizontal and vertic al Sample Prob e Rotary to Sample Prob e Rotary to
Sample P rob e Rotary to
debugging for position s of sample probe Sample C arousel Inn er Sample C arousel Mid dle
Cuvette
samp le probe u nit to wash well Rin g Rin g
Sample P rob e Rotary to ISE Sample P rob e Rotary to

Sample Prob e Rotary to ISE
Vertical Extreme Height Sample Prob e Cu vette Height Sample C arousel Out er
(Optional)
(Optional) Rin g
Parameter Reagent P robe Rotary

Reagent P robe Rotary Reagent Probe Rotary Reagent Probe C uvette Reagent Probe Bottle
debugging for to Wash Well an d
to Cu vette to Bottle Height Height
reagent probe un it Home
Bar code provid ed

aft er main un it
Perform according t o the bar code scanning
Alignment of C uvette debugging
Cuvette Wash Station Home Cuvette Wash Station Heigh t process. Reagent Bar Code Reader
Wash Un it
Adju stment (BA43-J01 align ment)
Inspection of
Hydropn eumatic u nit Preparations before Checking floater an d
proportion of mixture Syringe Ch eck
align ment Alignment valve status
of diluted wash solution
Adju stment of D I Water

Wash flow test Fluidic P rime
Pump Pressure
Parameter Reaction
Parameter Reaction Wash solution Reagent Fill in the p arameter
configuration for Carousel Fan status
debugging for temp erature temp erature refrigeration configuration form
reaction carousel Temperature inspection
pyrology unit curve curve debugging and test record form
sensor Test
En d
8.3 Photometer Unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Photometer Unit. The screen is as shown below.
8-5
8Alignment
8.3.1 Lamp Brightness Adjustment

Alignment index: The lamp voltage is within the target voltage 11.10V - 12.00 V.
1 Select Index Setup to display the Photoelectric Gain Adjustment: Index Setup
window. Set the Lamp Voltage as 11.80V. The indices are as shown below:
2 Select Save and then select Exit to close the window.

3 Select Lamp Brightness Adjustment, and then check if the current lamp voltage is
within the target voltage range. If yes, select Cancel; otherwise, select Next to adjust
the brightness.
8-6
8 Alignment
4 After finishing the adjustment, a message pops up indicating adjustment succeeded.
select OK.
8.3.2 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment

Alignment index:
1 The best photoelectric collecting position is in the middle of the two border lines.
2 The waveforms of all channels are uniform.
1 Find the position sensor behind the reaction carousel coder, and loosen the three
screws with an M3 hexagon wrench. Put the sensor in the middle of the adjustable
range, slightly tighten a screw, and then select Signal Collecting Position Adjustment
to display the alignment window.
Reaction
carousel
position
sensor
2 Make sure the lamp has been turned on for over 1 minute. If not, wait for 1 minute,
and then select Start to proceed to the next step.
3 A window pops up to prompt you to add 200µl DI water with pipette in the
designated cuvette (which include the best position for signal collecting and the 4
positions on its left and right). Select Next.
8-7
8Alignment
4 Observe the waveforms in the upper part of the window and check if the
photoelectric signal meets the alignment requirement. See the figure below. If not,
adjust the photocoupler.
 To adjust the photocoupler, loosen the three M3 hexagon screws on the bracket, adjust
the photocoupler clockwise to move the waveform leftwards or adjust it
counterclockwise to move the waveform rightwards. Slightly tighten a screw and select
Readjust. The software will test the photoelectric signal again.
 If the 340nm waveform is vertically beyond the display range, select Done, re-set the
AD Range, select Reset, and then select Start to readjust the signal collecting position.
 If the photocoupler is in a proper position, select Done without any adjustment.
5 After confirming the signal collecting position, select Start at the bottom of the
window to test photoelectric signal of all channels.
6 Check that the waveforms of all channels are uniform and then tighten the retaining
screws. If not, check if the relevant channel has output and is connected correctly.
8-8
8 Alignment
8.3.3 Photoelectric Gain Adjustment

Alignment index:
 The water blank AD value of each channel is within 48000-54000.
 The dark current of all channels is within 1-200.
 The photoelectric gain is no less than 85 for 340nm, and no less than 40 for other
channels.
Alignment methods and steps:
1 Select Photoelectric Gain Adjustment.

2 Make sure that the lamp has been turned on for over 3 minutes. If it has, select Done;
otherwise, wait for 3 minutes.
3 Check the 5 cuvettes for deionized water according to Step 4 on the screen. If there
is, continue with the next step.
4 The photoelectric gain is adjusted automatically. When adjustment is complete,
select Done.
5 Select Continue to test the dark current and the water blank AD of each channel.
6 If the water blank AD is greater than 54000, decrease the target voltage and
readjust the lamp brightness. Decrease the target voltage by 0.1V for each excessive
2000 in the AD value. For instance, the water blank AD of 340nm is 56000, decrease
the target voltage from 11.80V to 11.70V. Readjust the photoelectric gain till it
complies with the index.
7 Select Continue to finish the alignment and exit the procedure.
NOTE:
Ensure that the screws on the sensor bracket have been tightened.
Alignment parameters can be saved only after each procedure is complete. Another
alignment is required if a procedure is terminated. If the parameter is not
successfully configured or out of range, the parameter range will be displayed by
the alarm message and re-perform the alignment.
8.4 Sample Carousel Unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Sample Carousel. The screen is as shown below.
8-9
8Alignment
8.4.1 Radial Position Adjustment of Probe to Reaction Carousel

Alignment index:
The sample probe and reagent probe (fixture BA60-J07 pseudo probe) can pass through the
through-hole on the cuvette alignment fixture (BA2K-J12).
Operation methods and steps:
1 Select Radial Position Adjustment of Probe to Reaction Carousel and then operate
according to the screen prompts.
2 Select Continue to reset all mechanical parts of the whole unit.
3 Follow the screen prompts and the parameter values displayed at the lower left
corner, place a cuvette alignment fixture (BA2K-J12) in 35# position and R best
alignment position of the reaction carousel.
4 To adjust the sample probe's radial position to the reaction carousel, use an M3
hexagon wrench to loosen the screw on the probe arm, and manually rotate the arm
to move the probe to the top of the reaction carousel. Click the up and down arrow
buttons to stop the probe at the visually nearest position, rotate the probe arm till
the probe tip is circumferentially aligned with the fixture (or adjust parameters to
remove the deviation in following operation), and then tighten the arm screw.
Tighten the 3 screws of the probe in the radial direction. Click the up and down
arrow buttons, and check if the probe tip can pass through the fixture's central hole
without interference. If not, loosen the screws and try again.
5 Select Continue. Adjust the R best alignment position of probe in the same way as
step 4.
6 Select Continue. The alignment is complete. Select Exit to close the window.
NOTE:
The alignment tools will be used in following alignment. Leave them aside.
The left arrow button is equivalent to rotating clockwise and the right arrow button
rotating counterclockwise.
8-10
8 Alignment
When selecting Large Step, you can set up the concrete steps according to the
reference range.
Once the probe arm length is determined, it must not be adjusted during alignment
of probes and carousels.
If the probe arm length is changed, the probe and carousel units should be aligned
again.
After the radial position of the sample probe is determined, you can compare and
determine the relative position between the probe radial position and the sample
carousel sensor position to avoid repeated alignment. If the sample probe is tilted
inside in the radial direction, the position of the sample sensor needs to be adjusted
leftwards.
When adjusting the sample carousel position in the circumferential direction, adjust
the inner ring first, and then the middle and outer rings.
8.4.2 Sample Carousel Inner Ring Circumferential Position

Alignment index:
The sample probe (Fixture: BA60-J07 pseudo probe) can pass through the central hole of the
sample position alignment tool (BA48-J10) in E1#, S1# and C2# positions of the sample
carousel outer ring.
1 Select Sample Carousel Inner Ring Circumferential Position, and then operate
according to the screen prompts.
2 Place a sample position alignment tool BA48-J10 in positions #E1, #S1 and #C2 of
the sample carousel, and then select Continue.
The probe tip can

pass through the
central hole of the
alignment tool.
BA48-J10
3 Loosen the arm screw a little so that the probe arm cannot rotate freely but can be
rotated by hands. If the arm rotates freely, the adjusted position will be inaccurate.
Do not move the motor when rotating the probe arm. If the motor moves, exit the
window and access again.
4 Manually rotate the probe arm to E1# position of the sample carousel outer ring,
and click the up and down arrow buttons to stop the probe at the visually nearest
position above the fixture. Check if the probe tip is aligned with the middle of the
through-hole. If it is not, manually rotate the arm to the crossing point in
circumferential direction of the sample carousel inner ring, and click the left and
right arrow buttons to adjust the probe's circumferential position on the inner ring,
so that the probe tip can pass through the central hole of the fixture in E1# position.
8-11
8Alignment
The 4 arrows are

used to control the
probe.
The 2 arrows are

used to control the
carousel.
5 Adjust the sample probe in S1# and C2# positions of the sample carousel outer ring
according to step 3.
8.4.3 Sample Carousel Middle Ring Circumferential Position

Alignment index:
The sample probe (fixture: BA60-J07 pseudo probe) can pass through the central hole of the
sample position alignment tool (BA48-J10) in 35#, 46# and 57# positions of the sample
carousel middle ring.
1 Select Sample Carousel Middle Ring Circumferential Position.

2 Place a sample position alignment tool BA48-J10 in position #35, #46 and #57 of
3 Adjust the sample probe in 35#, 46# and 57# positions of the sample carousel
middle ring according to step 4 of Sample Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential
Position.
8.4.4 Sample Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential Position

Alignment index:
The sample probe (fixture: BA60-J07 pseudo probe) can pass through the central hole of the
sample position alignment tool (BA48-J10) in 1#, 12# and 23# positions of the sample
carousel outer ring.
8-12
8 Alignment
1 Select Sample Carousel Outer Ring Radial Position.
2 Place a sample position alignment tool BA48-J10 in position #1, #12 and #23 of the
sample carousel, and then select Continue.
3 Adjust the sample probe in 1#, 12# and 23# positions of the sample carousel outer
ring according to step 4 of Sample Carousel Outer Ring Circumferential Position.
NOTE:
When the alignment is complete, there is no need to take out the alignment tool.
8.5 Reagent Carousel Unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Rgt Carousel. The screen is as shown below.
8.5.1 Circumferential Position Adjustment of Reagent Probe to Reagent Carousel Outer

Ring
Alignment index:
Probe pseudo probe BA60-J07) can pass through the central hole of the reagent bottle position
alignment fixture (BA43-J10) in 1#, 16# and 31# positions of the reagent carousel outer ring.
1 Select Circumferential Position Adjustment of Reagent Probe to Reagent Carousel

Outer Ring.
2 Place the alignment fixture with its outer ring hole corresponding to 1#, 16# and
31# positions of the reagent carousel outer ring, and then select Continue.
8-13
8Alignment
3 Loosen a little the arm screw of the reagent probe so that the probe arm cannot
rotate freely but can be rotated by hands. If the arm rotates freely, the adjusted
position will be inaccurate.
4 Manually rotate the reagent probe arm to 1# position of the reagent carousel outer
ring, and click the up and down arrow buttons to stop the probe at the visually
nearest position above the fixture. Check if the probe tip is aligned with the middle
of the outer ring through-hole. If it is not, manually rotate the arm to the crossing
point in circumferential direction of the reagent carousel outer ring, and click the
left and right arrow buttons to adjust the probe's circumferential position on the
outer ring, so that the probe tip can pass through the central hole of the fixture in
1# position.
5 Adjust the reagent probe in 16# and 31# positions of the reagent carousel outer
ring according to step 4.
Align the probe tip

with the center of
the bottle cover.
8.5.2 Circumferential Position Adjustment of Reagent Probe to Reagent Carousel Inner

Ring
Alignment index:
alignment fixture (BA43-J10) in 47#, 62# and 77# positions of the reagent carousel inner ring.
1 Select Circumferential Position Adjustment of Reagent Probe to Reagent Carousel

Inner Ring.
2 Place the alignment fixture with its inner ring hole corresponding to 47#, 62# and
77# positions of the reagent carousel inner ring, and then select Continue.
3 Adjust the reagent probe in 47#, 62# and 77# positions of the reagent carousel
inner ring according to step 4 of Probe Circumferential Position on Reagent
Carousel Outer Ring.
8-14
8 Alignment
8.5.3 Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Reversed Stop Position Compensation

Alignment index:
alignment fixture (BA43-J10) in 1#, 16# and 31# positions of the reagent carousel outer ring.
1 Select Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Reversed Stop Position Compensation.
3 Adjust the reagent probe in 1#, 14# and 27# positions of the reagent carousel outer
ring according to step 4 of Probe Circumferential Position on Reagent Carousel
Outer Ring.
NOTE:
alignment is required if a procedure is terminated.
If the parameter is not successfully configured or out of range, the parameter range
will be displayed by the alarm message and re-perform the alignment. If the
parameter is out of range, adjust the position of the sensor. Perform the alignment
procedure again.
8.6 Sample Probe Unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Sample Probe. The screen is as shown below.
8.6.1 Sample Probe Rotary to Cuvette

Alignment index:
8-15
8Alignment
The sample probe (fixture: BA60-J07 pseudo probe) can pass through the through-hole on the
cuvette alignment fixture (BA2K-J12).
1 Select Sample Probe Rotary to Cuvette.

2 Place the cuvette alignment fixture (BA2K-J12) in 35# position of the reaction
carousel, and then select Continue.
3 Select the down arrow button to lower the sample probe to above the alignment
fixture so that it can align with the central hole.
4 Adjust the circumferential position of the probe arm and ensure that the sample
probe can enter the central hole on the fixture. Press the probe arm and tighten the
screws on it. If error exists, click the left and right arrow buttons to adjust the probe
till it meets the requirement.
BA2K-J12
5 Select Continue and verify the alignment with the up and down arrow buttons. If the
index is not satisfied, return to the previous step and try again.
6 Select Continue to save parameters and exit the window.
8.6.2 Sample Probe Rotary to Wash Well and Home

Alignment index:
 Alignment of the horizontal position should satisfy the following two conditions: ①
The sample probe tip can enter the central hole on the wash well alignment tool
(BA48-J12). ② The gap between the sample probe wash well and the fixture shell is
even.
 Vertical position: When reaching the bottom of the central hole on the wash well
alignment fixture (BA48-J12), the sample probe is lifted for 0.15mm, which means
that the clearance gauge can pass with 0.15mm through the gap between the sensor
plate and the arm base and it cannot pass with 0.20mm.
1 Select Sample Probe Rotary to Wash Well and Home.

2 According to Step 2 on the screen, place a wash well alignment tool (BA48-J12) in
the sample probe wash well, and then select Continue.
3 Select the up/down and left/right arrow buttons to move the sample probe till it
lowers into the center on the alignment fixture. If the sample probe is greatly
deviating from the alignment tool, use a big cross screwdriver to loosen the two
screws on the wash well, adjust the wash well till the sample probe can enter into
the central hole on the alignment tool and the gap between the wash well and the
fixture shell is even, and then tighten the screws.
8-16
8 Alignment
Use the clearance gauge to

BA48-J12 measure the gap here and keep
it away from the slit on the
photocoupler side. The
soldering lug is deformable and
may affect the measurement.
Criteria: The clearance gauge
can pass with 0.15mm and
cannot pass with 0.2mm.
4 Confirm the alignment result. If the requirements are not met, return to Step 3.
5 Adjust the sample probe's vertical position above the wash well by using the up and
down arrow buttons. Check that the clearance gauge can pass with 0.15mm and
cannot pass with 0.20mm.
6 Check the vertical position. If the requirements are not met, return to Step 5.
7 Remove the alignment tool according to screen prompts.
8.6.3 Sample Probe Rotary to Sample Carousel Outer Ring

Alignment index:
The sample probe tip can enter the central hole of the alignment fixture (BA48-J10) in 1#, 12#
and 23# positions of the sample carousel outer ring.
1 Select Sample Probe Rotary to Sample Carousel Outer Ring.
2 Place a sample position alignment tool (BA48-J10) in position #1, #12 and #23 of
3 Select the up/down and left/right arrow buttons to move the sample probe so that
it can enter into the central hole on the alignment tool.
8.6.4 Sample Probe Rotary to Sample Carousel Middle Ring

Alignment index:
The sample probe tip can enter the central hole of the alignment fixture (BA48-J10) in 35#,
46# and 57# positions of the sample carousel inner ring.
1 Select Sample Probe Rotary to Sample Carousel Middle Ring.

2 Place a sample position alignment tool (BA48-J10) in position #35, #46 and #57 of
8.6.5 Sample Probe Rotary to Sample Carousel Inner Ring

Alignment index:
The sample probe tip can enter the central hole of the alignment fixture (BA48-J10) in E1#,
S1# and C2# positions of the sample carousel inner ring.
8-17
8Alignment
1 Select Sample Probe Rotary to Sample Carousel Inner Ring.

2 Place a sample position alignment tool (BA48-J10) in E1#, #S1 and C2# positions of
8.6.6 Sample Probe Cuvette Height

Alignment index:
When reaching the cuvette bottom, the sample probe is lifted for 0.15mm, which means that
the clearance gauge can pass with 0.15mm through the gap between the sensor plate and the
arm base and it cannot pass with 0.20mm.
1 Select Sample Probe Cuvette Height.

2 Check that cuvettes are loaded in 35#, 4# and 66# positions of the reaction
carousel.
3 Adjust the sample probe over the 3 cuvette positions, and ensure that the lifting
height meets the requirement.
8.6.7 Sample Probe Rotary to ISE (Optional)

Alignment index:
The sample probe has its tip above the ISE sample injection port but deviates slightly from the
central hole. The probe tip should not contact with the inwall of the sample inject port.
1 Ensure the ISE has been installed.

2 Select S Probe Rotary to ISE.
3 According to Step 3, select the down arrow button to lower the sample probe to
above the ISE sample injection port. Select the left/right arrow buttons to adjust the
sample probe radially till it is 1mm away from the center of the sample injection
port or deviating slightly from the central hole. The probe tip should not contact
with the inwall of sample inject port.
4 If the sample probe fails by adjusting parameters, loose the screws fixing the ISE
module on the chassis, and then move it till requests are met.
5 If the problem still remains, use a cross head screwdriver to loosen the screws on
the ISE module and move it till requests are met.
6 The operation in Step 3 is verified in Step 4. If requirements are not met, return to
Step 3.
8.6.8 Sample Probe Rotary to ISE Vertical Extreme Height (Optional)

Alignment index:
The sample probe has its tip level with the third transition line in the sample injection cup.
8-18
8 Alignment
1 Check if the S Probe Rotary to ISE Horizontal Position alignment has been
completed.
2 Select S Probe Rotary to ISE Vertical Height
3 According to Step 3 on the screen, select the up/down arrow buttons to make the
probe tip level with the third transition line inside the sample injection cup. (You
can see three transition lines, and the probe tip shall be level with the one at the
bottom, as shown in the figure below.)
Step 3.
Probe tip level with

this line
NOTE:
Alignment of each position is verified the next step.
alignment is required if a procedure is terminated.
If the parameter is not successfully configured or out of range, the parameter range
will be displayed by the alarm message and re-perform the alignment.
8.7 Reagent Probe Unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Reagent Probe Unit. The screen is as shown
below.
8-19
8Alignment
8.7.1 Reagent Probe Rotary to Cuvette

Alignment index:
The reagent probe (fixture: BA60-J07 pseudo probe) can pass through the through hole of the
cuvette alignment fixture (BA2K-J12) in the reagent probe best alignment position, without
interfering with the cuvette wall in the forward and reversed maximum deviating positions.
1 Select Reagent Probe Rotary to Horizontal Position of Reagent Carousel.

2 Place the cuvette alignment fixture (BA2K-J12) in the best alignment cuvette
position of the reaction carousel, and then select Continue.
3 Select the down arrow button to lower the reagent probe to above the alignment
fixture so that it can align with the central hole.
4 Adjust the probe arm circumferentially till the probe can enter the central hole on
the alignment tool. Press the probe arm and tighten the screws on it. If there is
deviation when the screws are tightened, select the left/right arrow buttons to
adjust the parameter till requirements are met.
5 Check the alignment result. If the requirements are not met, return to the previous
step and adjust again.
6 Ensure that the forward and reversed maximum deviating positions displayed on
the screen are holding cuvettes. Check that the probe does not interfere with the
cuvette wall when it moves to the center of the forward maximum deviating cuvette
position. Select Continue to go to the next step.
7 When the probe moves to the reversed maximum deviating cuvette position, check
that it does not interfere with the cuvette wall. Select Continue to go to the next
step.
8.7.2 Reagent Probe Rotary to Wash Well and Home

Alignment index:
 Alignment of the horizontal position should satisfy the following two conditions: ①
The reagent probe can enter the central hole on the wash well alignment tool
(BA48-J12). ② The gap between the reagent probe wash well and the fixture shell
is even.
8-20
8 Alignment
 Vertical position: When reaching the bottom of the central hole on the wash well
alignment fixture (BA48-J12), the reagent probe is lifted for 0.15mm, which means
that the clearance gauge can pass with 0.15mm through the gap between the sensor
plate and the arm base and it cannot pass with 0.20mm.
1 Select Reagent Probe Rotary to Wash Well and Home.

2 According to Step 2 on the screen, place a wash well alignment tool (BA48-J12) in
the reagent probe wash well, and then select Continue.
3 According to Step 3 on the screen, select the up/down and left/right arrow buttons
to move the reagent probe so that it can lower into the center on the alignment tool.
If the reagent probe is greatly deviating from the alignment tool, use a big cross
screwdriver to loosen the two screws on the wash well, adjust the wash well till the
reagent probe can enter into the central hole on the alignment tool and the gap
between the wash well and the fixture shell is even, and then tighten the screws.
Step 3.
5 According to Step 5, adjust the reagent probe's vertical position above the wash well
by using the up and down arrow buttons. Check that the clearance gauge can pass
with 0.15mm and cannot pass with 0.20mm.
6 The alignment is verified in Step 6. If requirements are not met, return to Step 5.
8.7.3 Reagent Probe Rotary to Bottle

Alignment index:
Probe (pseudo probe BA60-J07) can pass through the central hole of the reagent bottle
position alignment fixture (BA43-J10) in 1#, 16# and 31# positions of the reagent carousel
outer ring, and 47#, 62# and 77# positions of the reagent carousel inner ring.
1 Select Reagent Probe Rotary to Bottle.
3 Follow the software prompts to adjust the reagent probe's position in 1#, 16# and
31# positions of the reagent carousel outer ring. Select the down arrow button to
lower the reagent probe to the top of the fixture so that it can align with the hole.
Select the left/right arrow buttons to adjust the reagent probe circumferentially till
it can enter the central hole of the fixture.
4 After adjusting the reagent probe's position on the reagent carousel outer ring,
place the fixture with its inner ring hole corresponding to 47#, 62# and 77#
positions of the reagent carousel inner ring. Then, adjust the reagent probe's
position on inner ring according to step 3.
8.7.4 Reagent Probe Cuvette Height

Alignment index:
When reaching the cuvette bottom, the reagent probe is lifted for 0.15mm, which means that
the clearance gauge can pass with 0.15mm through the gap between the sensor plate and the
arm base and it cannot pass with 0.20mm.
8-21
8Alignment
1 Select R Probe Cuvette Height.
2 According to Step 3, select the up/down arrow buttons to adjust the reagent probe's
lifting height till a 0.15mm clearance gauge can pass through and a 0.2mm cannot.
3 In Steps 4 and 5, adjust the vertical extreme position of the probe in the remaining
two positions according to Step 3.
8.7.5 Reagent Probe Bottle Height

Alignment index:
When reaching the bottle bottom, the reagent probe is lifted for 0.15mm, which means that the
clearance gauge can pass with 0.15mm through the gap between the sensor plate and the arm
base and it cannot pass with 0.20mm.
1 Select Reagent Probe Bottle Height. The reagent probe resets mechanically.
2 According to Step 2, place empty reagent bottles in #1, #16 and #31 positions of the
reagent carousel outer ring.
3 According to Step 3, select the up/down arrow buttons to adjust the reagent probe's
lifting height till a 0.15mm clearance gauge can pass through and a 0.20mm cannot.
4 Adjust the vertical extreme position of the probe in the remaining two positions
according to Step 3.
8.8 Mixer Unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Mixer Unit. The screen is as shown below.
8-22
8 Alignment
8.8.1 Reagent Mixer Rotary to Horizontal Position of Reaction Carousel

Alignment index:
 The reagent mixer (mixer alignment lever BA49-J05) can pass the through hole of
the mixer horizontal position alignment cuvette (BA2K-J04-001) in position 90# of
the reaction carousel.
 When the mixer motor stopper contacts with the inner side of the alignment tool
(BA49-J20), it does not interfere with the alignment tool to jam as you rotate it
manually. (No fixture is needed on the other side of the stopper.) When you remove
the fixture and rotate the stopper, the stopper does not interfere with the
photocoupler on its two sides.
1 Install the reagent and sample mixer alignment fixture BA49-J05, and then select
Mixer to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel.
2 Place the mixer horizontal position alignment fixture (BA2K-J04-001) in position
90# of the reaction carousel body.
3 In Step 3, select the up/down arrow buttons to lower the alignment lever (BA49-J05)
to the top of the mixer horizontal position alignment fixture (BA2K-J04-001). Use an
M3 hexagon wrench to loosen the retaining screw as shown in the following figure,
align the lever with the center of the alignment tool, and then slightly press the arm
to tighten it in the sequence as shown in the following figure. If the lever is not
radially enough, use a cross head screwdriver to adjust the motor till the lever align
with the alignment tool.
4 If the lever is not correct horizontally, select the left/right arrow buttons in Step 4 to
adjust so that it can align with the alignment tool.
Step 4.
6 Select Continue, remove the fixture and store it properly.
7 As shown in 8.2, adjust the positions of the reagent mixer motor blocker and the
sensor.
8-23
8Alignment
Alignment lever
(inserted to the end)
8.8.2 Adjusting Positions of Mixer Motor Stopper and Sensor

Alignment index:
When the mixer motor stopper contacts with the inner side of the alignment tool (BA49-J20), it
does not interfere with the alignment tool to jam as you rotate it manually. (No fixture is
needed on the other side of the stopper.) When you remove the fixture and rotate the stopper,
the stopper does not interfere with the photocoupler on its two sides.
Tip: This procedure should be performed after the alignment of Mixer Rotary to Cuvette is
done. If the motor position has been adjusted, perform this procedure.
1 Insert the alignment tool into the slot of the sensor and the slot of the tool faces
outward.
2 Manually rotate the motor stopper to the groove on the alignment fixture. The
stopper should contact the groove when being opposite to the sensor, and it should
not interfere with the fixture to jam as you rotate it manually. If not, adjust the
screws on the sensor bracket till the requirements are met. (When adjusting the
stopper on the other side, do not use the alignment fixture but rotate it to avoid
interfering with the photocoupler.)
3 After alignment, remove the alignment tool and check that the stopper can be
rotated opposite to the sensor without deviation or interference. If not, adjust again
until the requirements are met.
8-24
8 Alignment
BA49-J20 mixer motor

stopper alignment tool
Front and back

adjustable screws on
the sensor
Mixer motor
stopper
Up and down
adjustable screws
Photocoupler on the sensor
sensor
Insert the fixture into

the groove of sensor
The blocker needs to

be directly facing the
sensor without
inclination or optical
coupling interference.
8.8.3 Sample Mixer Rotary to Horizontal Position of Reaction Carousel

Alignment criteria: The mixer (mixer alignment lever BA49-J05) can enter the through hole of
the mixer horizontal position alignment cuvette (BA2K-J04-001) in position 81# of the
reaction carousel.
1 Make sure that the mixer alignment fixture BA49-J05 is installed, and then select
Mixer to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel.
2 Place the mixer horizontal position alignment fixture (BA2K-J04-001) in position
81# of the reaction carousel body.
3 In Step 3, select the up/down arrow buttons to lower the alignment lever (BA49-J05)
to the top of the mixer horizontal position alignment fixture (BA2K-J04-001). Use a
cross head screwdriver to adjust the motor till the lever align with the alignment
tool in radial direction.
4 If the lever is not correct horizontally, select the left/right arrow buttons in Step 4 to
adjust so that it can align with the alignment tool in circumferential direction. Also
make sure that the reagent mixer does not interfere with the wash well.
Step 4.
8-25
8Alignment
6 Select Continue. Make sure that the sample mixer does not interfere with the wash
well. Then, remove the fixture from the sample mixer position.
7 Select Continue, and properly place the reaction carousel.
8 As shown in 8.8.2, adjust the positions of the sample mixer motor blocker and the
sensor.
8.8.4 Run Mixer Motor

Alignment index: When the mixer motor is running, no abnormal rotation alarm is given and
the motor stopper should not interfere with the photocoupler.
Select Run mixer motor, and check that the reagent and sample mixers can rotate normally
without alarms.
8.8.5 Reagent Mixer Height

Alignment index: The lever lowers into the cuvette, the gap between which the go gauge of the
mixer alignment tool (BA49-J09) can pass and the no-go gauge cannot.
1 Select Reagent Mixer Height. Make sure the reagent mixing position is holding a
cuvette instead of alignment tool.
2 Select Continue. After the system resets mechanically, the reagent mixer moves into
the cuvette.
3 Select the up/down arrow buttons, and insert the alignment tool (BA49-J09)
between the mixer's straight-knurled column and cuvette edge. Gently push the
alignment tool to observe if the Go Gauge can easily pass while the No-go Gauge
cannot.
The Go Gauge (thinner

side) can easily pass while
the No-go Gauge (thicker
side) cannot.
Step 2.
8.8.6 Sample Mixer Height

Alignment index: The lever lowers into the cuvette, the gap between which the go gauge of the
mixer alignment tool (BA49-J09) can pass and the no-go gauge cannot.
8-26
8 Alignment
1 Select Sample Mixer Height. Make sure the sample mixing position is holding a
cuvette instead of alignment tool.
2 Select Continue. After the system resets mechanically, the sample mixer moves into
the cuvette.
3 Select the up/down arrow buttons, and insert the alignment tool (BA49-J09)
between the mixer's straight-knurled column and cuvette edge. Gently push the
alignment tool to observe if the Go Gauge can easily pass while the No-go Gauge
cannot (see the preceding figure).
Step 2.
8.8.7 Replacing Mixer

Methods and procedure:
1 Replace the alignment tool mixer with the actual mixer, and use two BA60-J21 tools
to fix it properly.
Insert the mixer

to the bottom
Fasten the
nut
Wrench position
for fastening the
mixer
Two BA60-J21 tools:

1. Manually screw the mixer onto the motor shaft. Make sure the mixer is inserted to
the bottom properly.
2. Stuck the small opening of a wrench at the wrench position of the mixer, stuck the
large opening of the other wrench at the position for nut fastening. Rotate the two
wrenches in opposite directions until the nut is fastened (evenly apply force to avoid
the motor shaft from being bent). Note: Do not touch the mixer during nut fastening.
Otherwise, the mixer may deform.
8.9 Alignment of Cuvette Wash Unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Cuvette Wash Station. The screen is as shown
below.
8-27
8Alignment
8.9.1 Cuvette Wash Station Home

Alignment index:
The wipe blocks can move smoothly in the hole of the wash station position alignment rod
(BA2K-J09-001), phase-1 wash probe can enter into the hole on the wash probe position
alignment cylinder (open) (BA43-J03), and wash probes of other phases are in the center of the
cuvettes.
1 Select Cuvette Wash Station Home.
2 Remove cuvettes under the wash probes of phases 1, 7 and 8, and place alignment
tools instead, including two alignment rods (BA2K-J09-001) and one auxiliary
alignment tool (BA43-J03). Make sure the alignment tool under phase-1 wash probe
faces the probe with its opening. Select Continue.
3 According to Step 3 on the screen, use an M4 hexagon wrench to loosen the two
screws on the wash probe conversion board, adjust the wash probes till the wipe
blocks can move vertically in the hole of the alignment rod, and the wash probes of
other phases are in the center of the cuvettes. When requests are met, tighten the
two screws gradually. Exercise caution to prevent deforming the probes. Then
remove the phase 1 probe and align it with the alignment tool. Place the cuvette
properly and move the wash station with your hand. Ensure the wipe block of the
wash station align with the center of the tool and other wipe blocks align with the
center of the cuvettes. The wipe blocks can move vertically in the hole of the
alignment tool and no interference is found. If the wipe block interferes with the
alignment tool, realign till the requirement is met. Click Continue.
Step 3.
5 In Step 5, the reaction carousel rotates to the forward maximum deviating cuvette
position. Click the up and down arrow buttons to move the wash station so that the
wipe blocks and wash probes are in the center of the cuvettes and can move
smoothly.
6 In Step 6, the reaction carousel rotates to the reversed maximum deviating cuvette
position. Click the up and down arrow buttons to move the wash station so that the
wipe blocks and wash probes are in the center of the cuvettes and can move
smoothly.
8-28
8 Alignment
8 Remove the alignment tools and restore cuvettes.
8.9.2 Cuvette Wash Station Height

Alignment criteria: When the wash station lowers to the vertical washing position, the wash
probes bounce for 0.6 to 0.8mm, which means that the clearance gauge can pass with 0.6mm
through the gap between the anti-collision blocks and the wash station bracket and it cannot
pass with 0.8mm.
1 Select Cuvette Wash Station Height.

2 Check if the wipe blocks can insert into the center of each cuvette. Select Continue.
3 When the wash probes move vertically to the bottom of the cuvettes, make them
contact the cuvette bottom. Select Small Step or Large Step and click the up/down
arrow buttons to adjust the probes, and measure the lifting height with a 0.6mm
and 0.8mm clearance gauge. Make sure the gap between the anti-collision blocks
and the wash station bracket can let go the 0.6mm clearance gauge and cannot let
go the 0.8mm one.
4 Verify Step 3. If requests are not met, return to Step 3, and select the up/down
arrow buttons to adjust the mixer till requests are met.
8.10 Bar Code Unit (Optional)

8.10.1 Bar Code Sticking Requirements
1 The bar code label should be clear, and not vague, dirty or scratched.
2 The sample bar code label should be stuck upright and plane and 9mm away from
the tube bottom.
Area for attaching the bar code
Sample cup
9mm
3 The reagent bar code label should be stuck in the front side below the bottle
opening, and in the middle of the vertical and horizontal directions.
8-29
8Alignment
Do not stick to the

corner
Do not stick to the

corner
8.10.2 Sample Barcode Unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Sample Barcode.
8.10.3 Sample Bar Code Reader Adjustment

Alignment index:
8-30
8 Alignment
 The light beam transmitted from the bar code reader can pass through the slit on
the bar code reader alignment tool (BA43-J05) of the sample carousel.
 2 The bar code in 1- 5# and 35 - 39# positions of the sample carousel can be
identified correctly and completely and displayed on the screen.
1 Select Sample Bar Code Reader Adjustment.

2 Place a sample bar code reader alignment tool (BA43-J05) in position 35# of the
sample carousel middle ring, and then select Continue.
3 If the light does not go through the fixture slit, loosen the two screws on the bar
code reader to adjust the incident angle. If the light beam is wider than the fixture
slit, adjust the bar code reader to allow the left of the light beam (counter-clockwise)
to go through the slit. If the light beam is not vertical, adjust the two screws on the
small bracket till requests are met. Tighten the screws.
Reagent bar code reader

Sample bar code reader
During alignment, place a

BA43-J05: with the piece of white paper at the
slot side facing back of the scanner. Adjust
inward the scanner position and
let the light pass through
the gap of the tool. If the
light on the white paper is
a vertical red line, the
alignment is successful.
(The position of white
paper shown in the figure
is for reference only.)
4 In Step 3, if the light is slightly deviating in circumferential direction, use the

left/right arrow buttons to rotate the sample carousel till requests are met.
5 Remove the alignment tool in position 35#, and place bar-coded sample tubes in
position 1-5 and 35-39. (The bar code label must be clean without dirt or scratches,
and 13mm away from the tube bottom with inclination angle less than 5º.) When
scanning is finished, check if the identified bar code is correct. If some bar code
cannot be read, replace the relevant tube with another one having complete bar
code. Repeat this step.
6 If all bar code cannot be read, check if the light direction meets the requirement and
the bar code reader works normally.
8-31
8Alignment
8.10.4 Sample Bar Code Stability Test

Alignment index:
 When the sample carousel rotates for several circles, the bar code identified in the
same position should be the same.
 The bar code in 1-68# positions of the sample carousel can be identified correctly
and completely and displayed on the screen.
1 Place bar-coded sample tubes in 1# to 34# positions on the outer ring and in 35# to
68# positions on the middle ring of the sample carousel.
2 Select Sample Bar Code Stability Test, set the scan circle as 10, and select Start.
3 After scanning, check if the identified bar code meets the requirement. If different
bar code is read in the same position, the position will be indicated in red.
4 If the stability test fails, find the reasons and take actions according to the following
probabilities:
 Check if the failed bar code meets the printing standard, the bar code label is not tilting,
dirty or damaged and has been applied in correct position.
 Check if the glass scanning window is clean without contamination.
 The scanning window is not blocked by the sponge cushion.
 If none of the above happens, replace the bar code reader, adjust it properly and do the
test again.
 Generally, the three methods above are enough to troubleshoot the problem.
5 When the test is finished, select Close.
8.10.5 Reagent Barcode Unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Rgt Barcode.
8.10.6 Reagent Bar Code Reader Adjustment

Alignment index:
 The light beam transmitted from the bar code reader can pass through the slit on
the bar code reader alignment tool (BA43-J01) of the reagent carousel.
8-32
8 Alignment
 The bar code in 1-5# and 47-51# positions of the reagent carousel can be identified
correctly and completely and displayed on the screen.
1 Select Reagent Bar Code Reader Adjustment.
2 Click the left and right arrow to adjust reagent carousel position until the alignment
tool(BA43-J02) can easily insert the groove between the 2# and 3# position on the
outer ring of the reagent carousel. Before fine tuning the parameter, ensue the
alignment tool has been removed, otherwise the reagent carousel may be damaged.
Check if the reagent carousel alignment tool can easily insert into the slot and
remove it. Note: If proper position can not be adjusted through the adjustment of
parameters. Please re-fix the reagent carousel coder sensor in the middle position.
BA43-J02, with
round holes
facing upwards
3 Place a bar code alignment tool (BA43-J01) of reagent carousel in the slot between
position 2# and position 3# on the outer ring of the reagent carousel. If the light
does not go through the fixture slit, loosen the two screws on the bar code reader to
adjust the incident angle. If the light beam is wider than the fixture slit, adjust the
bar code reader to allow the left of the light beam (counter-clockwise) to go through
the slot and fall in the laser receiving area. If the light beam is not vertical, adjust the
two screws on the small bracket till requests are met. Tighten the screws.
During alignment, place a

piece of white paper at the
back of the scanner. Adjust
the scanner position and
let the light pass through BA43-J01, with
the gap of the tool. If the the slot side
light on the white paper is facing inward
a vertical red line, the
alignment is successful.
(The position of white
paper shown in the figure
is for reference only.)
4 In Step 3, if the light is slightly deviating in circumferential direction, use the

left/right arrow buttons to rotate the reagent carousel till requests are met.
5 Remove the alignment tool, and place bar-coded reagent bottles in positions 1#-5#
and 47#-51#. When scanning is finished, check if the identified bar code is correct.
If some bar code cannot be read, replace the relevant tube with another one having
complete bar code. Repeat this step.
8-33
8Alignment
6 If all bar code cannot be read, check if the light direction meets the requirement and
the bar code reader works normally.
NOTE:
Check that the sponge cushion seals the bar code reader completely without
blocking the scanning light. Otherwise, adjust the bar code reader again.
8.10.7 Reagent Bar Code Stability Test

Alignment index:
 When the reagent carousel rotates for several circles, the bar code identified in the
same position should be the same.
 The bar code in all positions of the reagent carousel can be identified correctly and
completely and displayed on the screen. Randomly choose 3 bar codes on the outer
ring and inner ring, and check that the bar code displayed on the screen is same as
that on the bar code label.
1 Place bar-coded reagent bottles in positions 1#-46# on the outer ring and in
positions 47#-92# on the inner ring of the reagent carousel.
2 Select Reagent Bar Code Stability Test, set the scan circle as 10, and select Start.
3 After scanning, check if the identified bar code meets the requirement. If different
bar code is read in the same position, the position will be indicated in red.
4 If the stability test fails, find the reasons and take actions according to the following
probabilities:
 Check if the failed bar code meets the printing standard, the bar code label is not tilting,
dirty or damaged and has been applied in correct position.
 Check if the glass scanning window is clean without contamination.
 The scanning window is not blocked by the sponge cushion.
 If none of the above happens, replace the bar code reader, adjust it properly and do the
test again.
Generally, the three methods above are enough to troubleshoot the problem.
5 When the test is finished, select Close.
8-34
8 Alignment
NOTE:
Check that the sponge cushion seals the bar code reader completely without
blocking the scanning light. Otherwise, adjust the bar code reader again.
After alignment, check if the screws on the bar code reader and conversion board
have been tightened.
8.11 Hydropneumatic Unit Alignment

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Hydro Unit.
8.11.1 Preparations Before Alignment

1 Check if all tubes have been connected correctly.
2 Check if the wash tubes on the 8-phase wash probes assembly have been connected
properly. If not, first connect the 8-phase aspirating tubes. Visually check that the
8-phase aspirating tubes are inserted with the same depth and not twisted, and all
tubes are smooth without crossover or protrusion.
3 Check if the solenoid valves have been connected to the correct cables.
4 The diluted wash solution tank holds sufficient diluted wash solution.
Cuvette Type Dilution ratio of diluted wash solution 1
Plastic Cuvette 10:1 (water:concentrated wash solution)
Glass Cuvette 50:1 (water:concentrated wash solution)
5 Fill the water tank with sufficient water.
6 Connect the water supply module to the water tank and analyzer, and connect the
high-/low-concentration waste tanks.
7 Check if the inlet filter assembly has been installed.
8 Remove the 3 pseudo probes from the sample probe arm and reagent probe arms,
and install the real probes instead.
8-35
8Alignment
Installation requirements: ① Gap between the probe plate and the arm surface is
not allowed. Otherwise, check the retaining bolt and tube, because the tube's
elasticity will also affect the probe's bouncing; ② Install the earthing wire of the
reagent probes; ③ A washer has been applied on the retaining bolt, and the nut has
been tightened; ④ After fixing the probe with bolt and spring, manually lift the
probe and release it, and check that the probe can bounce back freely through the
spring; ⑤ Adjust the level sense board and the relative positions of the probe plate
and photocoupler so that the probe plate is in the middle of the photocoupler.
8.11.2 Confirming Diluted Wash Solution

1 Select Hydro Unit. In the displayed dialog box, check whether the portion of diluted
wash solution is consistent with the prompt. If yes, select OK.
8.11.3 Checking Floater and Valve Status
Manually switch the floater status one by one according to the table below, and then select
Query to refresh the floater status. Check if the actual fluid level of each container is the same
as the status displayed on the screen.
Tank Name Floater Status Screen Display
8-36
8 Alignment
Tank Name Floater Status Screen Display

Deionized water tank Low-level floater (high level) Full
High-level floater triggered
(high level)
Deionized water tank Low-level floater triggered Not empty
(high level)
High-level floater not
triggered (low level)
Deionized water tank Low-level floater not Empty
Deionized water tank Low-level floater not Error
triggered (high level)
Diluted wash solution
Floater triggered (high level) Not empty
tank
Diluted wash solution Floater not triggered (low
Empty
tank level)
High-concentration
Floater triggered (high level) Full
waste tank
High-concentration Floater not triggered (low
Not Full
waste tank level)
8.11.4 Syringe Check

1 Select Syringe Check.
2 Click Phase 1/2 Wash syringe. No alarm means that the syringes are OK.
8.11.5 Fluidic Prime

1 Fill the water tank with deionized water for half.
2 Select Fluidic Prime.
3 In Step 2, select Continue. After water tank priming, select OK. Wait for 60 seconds
to discharge the air from the DI water circulating pipeline and fill the DI water
circulating pump P03 with the DI water in the water tank. In this way, the priming
will succeed.
8-37
8Alignment
4 Run Step 3. Select Continue to prime the probe exterior and check if the cleaning
liquid is sprayed out continuously for 30 seconds without bubbles from the four
wash wells. Select OK and Continue to go to the next step. Note: After priming, close
the water in the four wash wells in the sequence of sample probe wash well, reagent
probe wash well, sample mixer wash well, and reagent mixer wash well.
If the low-concentration waste tank becomes full during the priming, the following
message will appear. Check if the low-concentration waste tube is unobstructed.
Wait for 3 minutes and then select OK to repeat this step.
5 According to the screen prompts, remove the wash station and put it in an
appropriate open container for collecting the residual liquid.
6 Select Start to prime the phase 1-2 wash probes for 100 times, and check the
water-spraying of the wash probes. If they can spray out water continuously
without bubbles, select Stop to end the priming. Then select OK.
Note: Before priming, make sure that the water inlet tube of phase 1-2 is immersed
under the liquid in the diluted wash solution tank. Otherwise, the priming efficiency
will be affected.
7 Select Continue to prime the phase 3-6 wash probes. A countdown dialog box will
display before the priming starts. Check the dispense probes of phase 3-6 till they
spray clear water continuously without bubbles. When the priming is over, observe
if the phase 3 to 6 wash probes are stopped in order. If yes, select OK; otherwise,
select OK and then select Stop at the lower-right corner. Troubleshoot the error and
prime the probes again.
8 Lift the 8-phase wash probe above the liquid level. Select Continue. The waste pump
of the 8-phase wash probe will open. Touch the 8-phase wash probe to feel the
suction force. If the suction force can be felt, it is acceptable. Keep that for 10
seconds.
9 Restore the 8-phase wash probe back.
8-38
8 Alignment
10 Select Continue to perform probe interior wash. Observe the water flow. When
water continuously flows out from the sample probe and the reagent probe, select
OK. Check whether the prime is closed in the sequence of "sample probe
interior→reagent probe interior". If yes, go to the next stop. If no, exit the priming
process, check the pipe connection, and perform priming again.
11 When performing probe interior wash, you need to manually remove the probe and
reagent syringes, pull and push the sample syringe plunger back and forth until
there is no air bubbles in the syringe and T pieces. After bubbles are removed from
the two syringes, stop probe interior wash, and install back the syringes in
sequence. Note to make the V-shaped slot level align to scale 7.5 of the sample
syringe, and scale 15 of the reagent syringe. Select OK to go to the next step.
Note: When manually draining the air, keep the instruction for probe interior wash
running. Do not install the syringe when the instruction is running.
12 Select Continue to reset the mechanical parts for 3 times. Check that the mechanical
parts are moving normally.
13 Select Continue.
14 Select Exit to finish the alignment procedure. Select Maintenance -> Parameters ->
Wash Station to check if the value of Fluidic Prime Complete is 1. If yes, the prime is
successful.
8.11.6 Adjustment of Deionized Water Pressure

Alignment index:
Adjust the deionized water pump pressure to be within 17.5 - 21.5kPa. (Try to keep the
pressure at around 19.5kPa for the following flow test.)
Deionized water restrictive valve: Turn

the valve clockwise to increase the
pressure and turn it counterclockwise to
decrease the pressure. After adjustment,
screw the stopper plate tight to keep the
pressure unchanged.
1 Select Adjustment of Deionized Water Pressure. Select Continue. Spin the regulating
valve knob in the back of the analyzer to make the reading on the DI water pressure
gauge within the index range. When the pressure is correct, tighten the knob and
ensure the pressure remains unchanged during the process. Select OK. (Note: Try to
adjust the pressure to the middle of the index range.)
2 Check the deionized water pressure reading according to the screen prompts.
3 Select Continue to exit the procedure.
8-39
8Alignment
NOTE:
After adjusting the deionized water pressure regulating valve, you must perform a
flow test as instructed in the next section.
8.11.7 Deionized Water Flow Test

Test index: (If the deionized water pressure is changed, measure the following 3 flows.)
 Exterior wash flow of sample probe and reagent probe: 240-280ml/min
 Phases 3-4 auto wash flow: 73.2 - 94.8 ml/min
 Phases 5-6 auto wash flow: 67.2 - 91.2 ml/min
Test methods and procedure:
1 Select Wash Flow Test.
2 Operate according to the screen prompts, and observe the water flow of the two
probe wash wells and the two mixer wash wells according to the exterior wash
order. Check that the probe wash wells are neither spilling and overflowing water
nor blocked, the probe wash height is ≥ 6mm, and the reagent wash height is ≥ 5mm;
check that the mixer wash wells spray out water through the middle hole with an
1-2mm convex.
Height for washing Sample probe/

Mixer (for probe) 5mm Reagent probe
Liquid
Convex
Liquid
3 Select Exit.
8.12 Pyrology Unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit. The screen is as shown below.
8-40
8 Alignment
8.12.1 Sensor Configuration

1 Select Sensor Configuration.
2 According to the sequence number on the temperature sensor, contact the
headquarters to find the resistance of rated temperature points (0, 37 and 100),
select sensor 1 and input the resistance for each temperature point, and then select
Calculate.
3 When a dialog box pops up indicating qualified sensor, select Configure to configure
the parameters to the relevant sensor. Configure sensor 2 and 3 in the same way as
sensor 1.
4 Observe the△AD value of PCB, and input it in the edit boxes at lower-right corner of
the window for sensor 1, 2 and 3. Select Configure, and then select Search to verify
them.
5 When configuration is complete, select Exit.
8-41
8Alignment
8.12.2 Observe Temperature Curve

Alignment index:
Reaction carousel temperature curve is within 36.7℃-37.3℃.
1 Select Reaction Carousel Temperature Curve.
2 Select Turn On Heater.
3 Select Sensor Temp Curve, and then select Start. Observe the reaction carousel
temperature curve and check if the curve of each sensor is straight and stable with
average value within 37.0±0.3℃.
4 Select Stop. Select Exit to close the window.
8.12.3 Wash Solution Temperature Control

Alignment index:
The temperature of cleaning fluid and wash solution is within 43℃-45℃.
1 Select Wash Station on the Parameter Configuration window, and check that the
value of Fluidic Prime Complete is 1. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment ->
Pyrology Unit -> Wash Solution Temp Curve.
2 Select Deionized Water Heater and Wash Solution Heater, and then select Turn On.
3 Select Start in the temperature curve area, and then observe if the temperature
curves of cleaning fluid and wash solution are straight and steady (for 5 minutes
according to the computer time). Check that the average temperature of cleaning
fluid and wash solution is within 43℃-45℃.
4 Select Stop. Select Exit to close the window. to close the window.
8-42
8 Alignment
8.12.4 Fan Status Query

The Fan Status Query option is used to inquire the current status of each fan.
8.12.5 Reagent Refrigeration Alignment

Methods and procedure:
1 Check whether the heatsinks are functional. Make sure that the machine has been
started for at least 30 minutes. Touch the heatsinks in the reagent carousel to feel
whether the refrigeration is normal. If not, check the circuit by referring to the
following table.
LED LED Function Descriptions Classification
Classific
Network Indicator
ation On Off
Identifier Color
12V power supply is 12V power supply is
12V Green
Power working not working
supply 12VFAN_L 12V fan power supply is 12V fan power supply
Green
working ED working is not working
status 5V power supply is 5V power supply is not
5V Green
working working
8-43
8Alignment
LED LED Function Descriptions Classification

Classific
Network Indicator
ation On Off
Identifier Color
24V power supply is 24V power supply is
24V Green
working not working
Heatsin
k Heatsink is not
D9, D11 Green Heatsink is working
working working
status
GREEN_LE Refrigeration is
Green Refrigeration is normal
D faulty/not connected
Refriger
Refrigeration
ation YELLOW_ Refrigeration
Yellow temperature is not too
tempera LED temperature is too low
low/not connected
ture
range Refrigeration
Refrigeration
RED_LED Red temperature is not too
temperature is too high
high/not connected
8-44
9 Proactive Maintenance
9.1 Overview
Proactive maintenance is a preventive measure taken by service personnel of Mindray or
authorized by Mindray with the aim of eliminating hidden troubles to ensure system reliability
and achieve best performance during operation. The proactive maintenance cycle for the
chemistry analyzer is one year and for ISE module, half a year. The maintenance includes
changing, cleaning or checking the parts as shown in the table below.
Table 9.1 Maintenance items to be performed by service personnel
Category Maintenance Item Name When to do
Replacement Replace Cuvette Wash Connection More than 1 year
items Tube
Replace Online Filter More than 1 year
Replace Filter Core More than 3 months
Replace Sample Syringe over 100,000 times
Replace Reagent Syringe over 300,000 times
Replace Calibrator Tube(ISE More than 1 year
configured)
Replace Pump Tube(ISE configured) More than half year
Replace Probe Washer More than 1 year
Cleaning Photometer Lens Maintenance When needed
items Cleaning the dust screen When needed
De-dust cooling fan When needed
Cleaning the wash wells When needed
Clean Cuvette Wash Station When needed
Clean ISE Injection Port (ISE When needed
Configured)
Clean DI Water Tank When needed
Clean Sample/Reagent Compartment When needed
Clean Analyzer Panels When needed
Special Wash When needed
9-1
9Proactive Maintenance
Clean Sample/Reagent Probes When needed
Exterior
Clean Mixers When needed
Check Item Pump Calibration (ISE Configured) When needed
Air Bubble Detector Calibration(ISE When needed
configured)
Cuvette Check When needed
Photometer Check When needed
Check auto wash syringe More than 1 year
9.2 Maintenance Tools

Table 9.2 Maintenance tools
Too Name Applicable Maintenance
Philips-head screwdriver φ3.3×100 Removing the system enclosure and the
cooling fans
Philips-head screwdriver φ4.7×100 Installing and removing the probes and
lamp
Slot-head screwdriver φ4.7×100 Removing probe and pipe hoop
Round-head cleaning tool, Unclogging the probes
0.25+/-0.01mm×125mm round tip
Hair brush Cleaning filter core and dust screens
Gauze clean probe/mixer exterior and
sample/reagent compartment
Cotton swabs Cleaning the wash wells
Suction cleaner Cleaning fans and dust screens
Tweezers Removing/Installing probes and syringe
washers
Beaker Maintaining wash station
Pipette clean ISE sample injection port
Ethanol Cleaning photometer, probes, mixers and
wash station
NaClO (0.5% sodium hypochlorite Cleaning the wash wells
solution)
9.3 Maintenance Procedure

Among the proactive maintenance items of BS-430, some of them are performed with the main
power switched off, while the other are performed through the maintenance window on the
operating software, where maintenance logs are recorded. To improve the efficiency and
shorten the field maintenance time, you are recommended to follow the procedure below:
Table 9.3 Execution order of maintenance items
SN Maintenance Item Name Maintenance Tools Operations
1 Clean Analyzer Panels Ethanol and gauze Wipe
2 Cleaning the dust screen Hair brush, suction Remove
cleaner dust
9-2
SN Maintenance Item Name Maintenance Tools Operations

3 De-dust cooling fan Hair brush, suction Remove
cleaner dust
4 Photometer Lens Maintenance Ethanol and tissue Wipe
for wiping lens
5 Replace Online Filter Filter Replace
6 Replace Filter Core Filter core Replace
7 Clean DI Water Tank / Washing
8 Replace sample/reagent syringe Sample/reagent Replace
syringes
9 Replace Probe Washer Washer Replace
10 Check auto wash syringe / Execute
11 Replace Cuvette Wash Connection Tube Replace
Tube
12 Replace Pump Tube(ISE configured) Pump Tube Replace
13 Replace Calibrator Tube(ISE Calibrator Tube Replace
configured)
14 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes Exterior Ethanol and gauze Wipe
15 Clean Mixers Ethanol and gauze Wipe
16 Cleaning the wash wells NaClO solution and Wipe
cotton swabs
17 Clean Cuvette Wash Station Ethanol and cotton Wipe
swab
18 Clean Sample/Reagent Compartment Ethanol, Disassemble
gauze,cotton swab and wipe
19 Clean ISE Injection Port (ISE Ethanol and cotton Wipe
Configured) swab
20 Pump Calibration (ISE Configured) / Execute
21 Air Bubble Detector Calibration(ISE / Execute
configured)
22 Special Wash Concentrated wash Execute
solution
23 Cuvette Check / Execute
24 Photometer Check / Execute
9.3.1 Steps
Cleaning the analyzer panels
1 Open the upper protective shield of the analyzer.
2 Use clean gauze moistened with ethanol to clean the analyzer panels and carousel
covers.
3 Use wash solution to clean the monitor screen and keyboard.
4 Restore the upper protective shield.
5 After maintenance, open the logs and record related information.
9-3
Cleaning the dust screen

1 Switch off the analyzer power.
2 Open the front door of the analyzer.
3 Remove the dust screen. For the procedure, refer to 5.2.4Removing and Reinstalling
Left and Right Dust Screens.
4 Tidy and clean the dust screens.
5 Dry the dust screens in air.
6 Restore the dust screens.
7 Close the front door of the analyzer.
De-dusting the cooling fan

1 Refer to 5.1.9 Cleaning Fans.
Photometer lens maintenance

1 Refer to 5.9.8Photometer Lens Maintenance.
9-4
Replacing the online filter

1 Check the maintenance log and when the online filter maintenance interval is more
than 1 year, change it.
2 Refer to 7.5.3Cuvette Wash Module-Removing/Reinstalling filter.
Replacing the filter core

1 Check the maintenance log and when the maintenance interval of the filter Core is
more than 3 months, change it.
2 Refer to 7.5.4Water Supply/Drainage Module-Removing/Installing Deionized Water
Filter Assembly.
Cleanign the DI water tank

1 Refer to 7.5.4 Removing/Installing water tank in chapter 7 for the removing and
installing steps.
Replacing the sample/reagent syringe

1 Check the using count of the syringe on the status screen. When the sample syringe
has been used for 300,000 times, change it. When the reagent syringe has been used
for 300,000times, change it.
2 Prepare a new syringe plunger assembly and washer, put the plunger head in the
deionized water beaker to remove air from the syringe, and then moisten the
washer in the deionized water.
3 Place the analyzing unit power to the OFF position.
4 Open the front door of the analyzer. You will see two syringes. The left one is
reagent syringe and the right one is sample syringe as shown in the figure below.
5 Loosen counterclockwise the four retaining screws on top of the syringe, and then
remove the screws and the fixing blocks.
6 Loosen counterclockwise the retaining screw at the bottom of the syringe and then
remove it.
7 Hold the T piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other hand.
Loosen the syringe counterclockwise and then remove the washer.
8 Loosen the plunger guide cap counterclockwise, hold the plunger head and pull it
slightly to remove the plunger assembly from the syringe.
9-5
9 Insert the plunger head of the new plunger assembly into the bottom of the syringe,
and then tighten the retaining screw to fix the plunger head. Tighten the plunger
nut clockwise.
10 Soak the new syringe connector in the deionized water beak, pull gently the
plunger head to aspirate half syringe of deionized water, and then push the plunger
head to remove the air.
11 If no washer is found in the T piece, put the new washer in the T piece. Hold the T
piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other hand, and then screw
the T piece clockwise.
12 Install the syringe on the bracket.
13 Install the fixing blocks and 4 retaining screws while having the retaining screws
not tightened.
14 Align the plunger head to the retaining screw at the bottom of the syringe, and then
tighten clockwise the retaining screw.
15 Pinch the plunger guide cap to adjust the syringe height. For the sample syringe,
make the syringe head over the upper fixing block for 7.5 scales; for the reagent
syringes, make the syringe head over the upper fixing block for 15 scales.
16 Tighten the four retaining screws on the fixing blocks.
17 After finishing replacement, switch on the analyzer power.
18 Perform the Home maintenance procedure. Check the new syringe for leak and
bubbles. If leak occurs, check the syringe and the connector.
19 Close the front door of the analyzer.
20 The procedure is completed. Write the maintenance log and input the maintenance
information and clear the using count of the syringe.
Replacing the probe washer

1 Check the maintenance log. When the sample/reagent probe washer has been used
for 1 year and change it.
2 Remove the sample/reagent probe and remove the washer.
3 Install the washer and install back the sample/reagent probe.
4 Run the operating software, and select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance-
Biochemistry Maintenance and then select Probe interior clean and prime.
Auto wash syringe check

1 Check the maintenance log. When auto wash syringe has been used for over one
year, check the auto wash syringe.
3 Run the operating software, and select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance ->
Biochemistry Maintenance, and then select Auto Wash Prime to prime the diluted
wash solution.
4 During priming, check for abnormal sound and leakage of the auto wash syringe.
Replacing the cuvette wash connection tube

1 Check the maintenance log. When the cuvette wash connection tube has been used
for more than 1 year, please change it.
9-6
2 The analyzing unit should be powered off, or in failure mode or in standby status.
3 Open the upper protective shield of the analyzer. Loosen the installation button of
the wash station, and then remove the wash station.
4 Remove the connecting tube that needs replacing.
5 Insert the thin end of the connecting tube into the fixture, insert the fixture into the
wash tube, insert the thick end of the connecting tube into 9-11mm of the wash
tube, and then insert the thin end into the nozzle of the wash probe. Make the end of
the tube and the nozzle remain in the middle of the connecting tube and keep a
distance between the two ends. The installation steps as shown in the figure below.
Thin end Fixtures
Keep a distance
Insert the fixture into

the wash tube
Insert the thick end of

the connection tube
into the wash tube
Insert the thin end of the

connection tube into the wash
probe nozzle
6 Reinstall the wash station.

7 Execute Prime Wash Station on the Biochemistry Maintenance window. Deionized
water flows through the tube, removing air bubbles from it.
8 Restore the upper protective shield of the analyzer.
Replacign the pump tube (ISE configured)

1 Check the maintenance log. When Pump Tube has been used for half year, change it.
2 Refer to 5.10.4Replacing Pump Tube.
9-7
Replacing the calibrator tube (ISE configured)
1 View the maintenance log. When the Calibrator Tube has been used for more than 1
year, change it.
2 Refer to 5.11.5 in chapter 5 for Replace Calibrator Tube.
Cleaning sample/reagent probes exterior

2 Lift gently the probe to the utmost height and move it to the position convenient for
maintenance.
3 Use gauze soaked with ethanol to gently wipe the probe exterior. Clean the probe tip
until it becomes clear without stain. Use gauze moistened with deionized water to
clear the ethanol on the probe. Do not pull the probe vertically to prevent probe
damage.
4 After the procedure, restore the upper protective shield of the analyzer. Power on
the analyzing unit and select Home.
Cleaning mixers
2 Lift gently the mixer to the utmost height and move it to the position convenient for
maintenance.。
3 Use gauze soaked with ethanol to gently wipe the mixer exterior. Clean it until it
becomes clear without stain. Use gauze moistened with deionized water to clear the
ethanol on the mixer. Do not pull the mixer vertically to prevent probe damage.
4 After the procedure, Restore the upper protective shield of the analyzer. Power on
the analyzing unit and select Home.
Cleaning the wash wells

2 Move the probe and mixer away from the wash well for the convenience of
maintenance.
3 Use clean cotton swabs moistened with NaClO to clean the wash wells.
4 After the procedure, switch on the analyzer power.
5 ExecuteHome command or Check Probes/Mixers/Wash Wells maintenance
command. Check if the wash wells have a normal water flow.
Cleaning the cuvette wash station

1 The analyzing unit should be powered off, or in failure mode or in standby or
incubation status.
2 Open the upper protective shield of the analyzer. Remove the wash station, and use
gauze moistened with ethanol to clean the nozzles and wipe blocks.
3 Use the gauze soaked with DI water to clear the ethanol left on the nozzles.
4 Install back the wash station and close the upper shielding cover of the analyzer.
5 Execute the Prime Wash Station maintenance command.
9-8
Cleaning the sample/reagent compartment
1 The analyzing unit should be powered off, or in failure mode or in standby or
incubation status.
2 Remove the carousel cover and carousel, and then store them properly.
3 Use clean gauze soaked with deionized water or ethanol to clean the interior of the
compartment. If necessary, you can use gauze moistened with neutral wash
solution.。
4 Use clean gauze soaked with deionized water or ethanol to clean the carousel body
and bar code scanning window, and then use cotton swabs dipped with ethanol to
clean the sample or reagent positions.
5 Install the sample/reagent carousel and the carousel cover.
Cleaning the ISE injection port (ISE configured)

1 Make sure that the system status is Incubation or Standby.
2 Enter ISE maintenance screen and select Clean ISE injection port.
4 Open the cover of the ISE module on the analyzer’s front panel.
5 Use clean cotton swab soaked with ethanol to wipe the sample injection port
(interior of the sample injection cup of the ISE module) until it is clean; then use a
clean cotton swab soaked with DI water to wipe the interior and periphery of the
sample injection port.
6 Enter the ISE Maintenance window and execute purge A and purge B each for three
times.
7 Restore the cover of the ISE module on the analyzer’s front panel. Restore the upper
protective shield of the analyzer.
Pump calibration (ISE configured)

1 Make sure that the system status is Incubation or Standby.
2 Enter ISE maintenance screen and click Pump Calibration.
3 Fill a sample cup with 500μl DI water, and place it in the W position on the sample
carousel.
4 Continue the procedure until it is completed.
5 After the procedure is completed, the calibration results are displayed. If calibration
is successful, the procedure is completed. If not, ISE enters error status.
Air bubble detector calibration (ISE configured)

1 Ensure ISE is standby.
2 Enter ISE maintenance screen, and select Air Bubble Detector Calibration. The
procedure is performed automatically.
3 After the procedure is completed, the calibration results are displayed. If calibration
is successful, the procedure is completed. If not, ISE enters error status.
Special wash
9-9
2 Load over 50ml concentrated wash solution in position D on the reagent carousel
and over 5ml sodium hypochlorite solution (above 10%) in position D2 on the
sample carousel.
3 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Biochemistry Maintenance and
select special wash.
4 Confirm if cuvette check is needed after the concentrated wash. If it is, mark the
checkbox in front of Check Cuvettes.
5 Select Continue. The system starts cleaning the sample probe, reagent probes,
mixers, cuvettes and wash station. When special wash is finished, the system
performs cuvette check automatically.
6 Select Done.
7 Restore the upper protective shield of the analyzer.
Cuvette check
1 Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- Biochemistry Maintenance and then select
Cuvette check.
2 After check, check the cuvette check results for yellow indication. Record the
cuvettes highlighted in yellow and perform the Clean Cuvettes or Replace Cuvettes
procedure.
Photometer check
1 Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- Biochemistry Maintenance and then select
Photometer Check
2 If the result is Normal, the system will give no alarms, otherwise the following alarm
will be given.
 If the alarm indicates the lamp is off, check if the lamp has been turn on.
 If the alarm light too strong is given, please perform photometric unit alignment or
check if the photometric unit is normal.
 If the alarm indicates light intensity too weak, replace the lamp.
Phases 5 to 8 aspirate tube check

1 Make sure the system is powered off. Remove the wash probe assembly from the
cuvette wash station.
2 Check if the phase 5-8 Teflon tubes with white wipe block are discolored or blocked.
If not, go to the next step. If so, cut new Teflon tubes to replace old ones. The tube
length should be same as the that of the old ones. Replace the band at the same
place on the tubes. Install the phase 5-8 tubes in the correct order.
3 Observe the probes and wipe blocks of the wash station. If they are blocked, use the
cleaning tool to unclog them.
4 Use ethanol-moistened gauze to wipe the wash probes and wipe block. Use gauze
moistened with deionized water to clear the ethanol on the wash probes and wipe
block.
5 Restore the cuvette wash station.
Waste tube check

1 Make sure the analyzer is powered off. Remove the back panel and observe the high
and low concentration waste tubes and check if they are clogged or waste are
accumulated in the tubes. Pay special attention to the low-concentration waste
collector, High/low concentration waste discharge valve and waste pump outlet.
9-10
2 Use beaker or cylinder to hold 50-100ml DI water to pour gently into the sample
wash well, reagent wash well and mixer wash well respectively and check if there is
obvious liquid accumulation in the waste tube especially the tube between the wash
well and waste collector.
3 If the waste tube is clogged or obstructed, fill a beaker or a measuring cylinder with
50-100ml wash solution, pour it slowly into the sample probe wash well, reagent
probe wash wells and mixer wash wells and leave it in the waste tube for 30-40
minutes. Then fill the beaker or measuring cylinder with 50-100ml deionized water
and pour it slowly into the above-mentioned wash wells. Check if the clogging or
obstruction is removed. Repeat the above steps for 1-2 times, and if the clogging or
obstruction still remains, replace the waste tube.
Pump check
1 Run the operating software. Select Maintenance -> Alignment -> Hydro Unit and
select Pump Check as shown below.
2 Select P03 and turn on.

3 Check Pump P03 in the front of the analyzer to see if the pressure is within
15-24kpa. If the pressure is abnormal, the pump may go wrong or other causes lead
to this error. Check the system again.
4 For deionized water pressure adjustment, refer to 8.11.6Adjustment of Deionized
Water Pressure.
Check fluid level in cuvette

1 Remove the cover of the reaction carousel. Make sure there is no liquid in the
cuvettes.
2 Enter alignment and select Pyrology Unit-Reaction Carousel Temperature Curve as
shown below. Enter 6 cycles for auto wash and click start.
9-11
3 The system starts auto wash for 6 times and stops.

4 Find the 6 cuvettes with liquid in them and use the tweezers to remove them on the
clean table top.
5 Use the ruler to measure the liquid height in the 1 to 6 phases cuvettes and the
height is about 20mm. In normal condition, it should not be less than 20mm. If the
liquid height is obviously low, the dispense tubes or restrictive tubes may be
blocked. Check the tubes and confirm the liquid height again.
6 Exit the alignment screen.
7 Install back the cuvettes and the reaction carousel cover.
8 Home the system and execute special wash cuvette to dry the liquid in the cuvettes.
Check probes/mixers exterior wash flow

1 Open the upper cover of the analyzer and home the system.
2 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance, then select Biochemistry
Maintenance.
3 Select Probes/Mixers Exterior, and then select Continue.
4 Liquid flows out of the probe and mixer wash well automatically. Observe the liquid
flow of the 3 probe wash wells and 2 mixer wash wells. Spillage, overflow or no
liquid flow should not occur. The probe wash height should be no less than 5mm.
The liquid in the mixer wash well should flow out of its center and form a convex
with a height of 1-2mm.
9-12
Height for washing Sample probe/

Mixer (for probe) 5mm Reagent probe
Liquid
Convex
Liquid
5 Repeat the above steps for more than 3 times to check if the probe/mixer flow is
normal. If not, check the exterior wash tubes. (First check if the restrictive tube at
the exterior wash valve's outlet is clogged.) Check the flow again after solving the
problem.
6 Select Done.
7 Close the maintenance window.
9-13
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter provides methods to locate and troubleshoot the errors and problems. Read this
chapter thoroughly to achieve the best performance of the instrument.
10-1
10 Troubleshooting
Table 10.1 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
Error Component Event Problem Description Flag Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Class
A00006 Instrument Error Main control unit E2PROM / E2PROM read/write error. Switch off the analyzing unit power
instructions reading or writing error. and switch on it again. Recover
cannot be failure by performing the Home
executed. maintenance procedure. If this
message appears for 3 times,
contact our customer service
department or your local
distributor.
A01006 Sample Probe Error Sample probe vertical / Sample probe vertical movement error Sample probe vertical movement
Unit movement error 1. Sensor status error. error
1. Sensor status is Belt or belt pulley is loose. 1. Sensor status error.
incorrect. 2. Failed to find the zero position. Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
2. Failed to find the zero 1) Assembly is jammed; tighten them if so;
position. 2. Failed to find the zero position.
2) Driving circuit error;
3. Collision occurs during 1) Remove obstacle or replace with
3) Vertical motor error;
operation other than a new assembly;
aspirating. 4) Vertical sensor error;
2) Replace PCB;
4. Collision error remains. 5) Belt pulley is loose;
3) Replace motor;
5. Moving vertically is not 3. Collision occurs during operation
other than aspirating. 4) Replace sensor;
allowed in current
1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 5) Tighten properly;
horizontal position.
failure; 3. Collision occurs during operation
6. Losing steps when
2) Collision sensor is not blocked when other than aspirating.
passing the zero position
vertically assembling the sample probe; 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
3) Incorrect sample probe positioning; 2) Reassemble;
Sample probe horizontal 4) Incorrect sample carousel 3) Rotate the positioning sensor to
movement error positioning. remove dust or adjust the probe to
4. Collision error remains. be vertical; if problem remains,
1. Sensor status is
adjust the positioning parameters;
incorrect. 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable
failure; 4) Adjust sample carousel
2. Failed to find the zero
positioning parameters.
position. 2) Collision sensor is not blocked when
assembling the sample probe; 4. Collision error remains.
3. Collision occurs during
horizontal movement. 3) Collision sensor is not blocked due to 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
4. Moving horizontally is deformation of blocking plate’s driving 2) Reassemble;
10-2
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
not allowed in current spring. 3) Mount the spring of blocking
vertical position. 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in plate again;
5. Losing steps when current horizontal position. 5. Vertical movement is not
passing the zero position Software error. allowed in current horizontal
horizontally 6. Losing steps when passing the zero position.
position vertically: Reset the whole unit or the sample
Sample syringe movement 1) The zero position sensor is loose or probe unit.
error faulty. 6. Losing steps when passing the
1. Sensor status is 2) The moving part collide with other zero position vertically:
incorrect. parts or is blocked. 1) Check whether there is dust
2. Failed to find the zero deposit on the sensor and whether
position. the sensor is loose. If yes, clean the
Sample probe horizontal movement
3. Syringe losing steps dust and fasten the sensor.
error
when passing the zero 2) Remove obstacle or replace with
1. Sensor status error.
position a new assembly.
Belt or belt pulley is loose.
2. Failed to find the zero position.
Sample probe horizontal movement
1) Driving circuit error; error
2) Motor error; 1. Sensor status error.
3) Home position sensor error; Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
4) Belt pulley is loose; tighten them if so;
3. Collision occurs during horizontal 2. Failed to find the zero position.
movement. 1) Replace PCB;
1) Driving circuit error; 2) Replace motor;
2) Motor error; 3) Replace sensor;
3) Home position sensor error; 4) Tighten properly.
4) Belt pulley is loose; 3. Collision occurs during horizontal
4. Horizontal movement is not allowed movement.
in current vertical position. 1) Replace PCB;
Software error. 2) Replace motor;
5. Losing steps when passing the zero 3) Replace sensor;
position horizontally:
4) Tighten properly;
1) The zero position sensor is loose or
4. Horizontal movement is not
faulty.
allowed in current vertical
2) The moving part collide with other position.
10-3
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
parts or is blocked. Reset the whole unit or the sample
probe unit.
Sample syringe movement error 5. Losing steps when passing the
1. Sensor status error. zero position horizontally:
Belt or belt pulley is loose. 1) Check whether there is dust
deposit on the sensor and whether
the sensor is loose. If yes, clean the
1) Assembly is jammed; dust and fasten the sensor.
2) Driving circuit error; 2) Remove obstacle or replace with
3) Motor error; a new assembly.
4) Sensor error;
5) Belt pulley is loose; Sample syringe movement error
3. Syringe losing steps when passing the 1. Sensor status error.
zero position: Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
1) The zero position sensor is loose or tighten them if so;
faulty. 2. Failed to find the zero position.
2) The moving part collide with other 1) Remove obstacle or replace with
parts or is blocked. a new assembly;
2) Replace PCB;
3) Replace motor;
4) Replace sensor;
3. Syringe losing steps when passing
the zero position:
1) Check whether there is dust
dust and fasten the sensor.
2) Remove obstacle or replace with
a new assembly.
A01007 Sample Probe Warning Sample probe vertical / Sample probe vertical movement error Sample probe vertical movement
Unit movement error 1. Collision occurs during aspirating. error
1. Collision occurs during 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 1. Collision occurs during
aspirating. failure; aspirating.
2) Collision sensor is not blocked 1) Replace sensor or PCB or
10-4
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
when assembling the sample probe; cable;
3) Incorrect sample probe positioning; 2) Reassemble;
4) Incorrect sample carousel 3) Rotate the positioning sensor
positioning. to remove dust or adjust the probe
to be vertical; if problem remains,
4) Adjust sample carousel
positioning parameters.
A01021 Sample Probe Error Clog detection board / Check if connection between clog 1. Check relevant cable for any
Unit communication error detection board and wash control is signs of fray or loose cable, or
normal; disconnection, or short circuit;
2. Clog detection board malfunction 2. Check if the power indication
light for clog detection board is on
properly; check if clog detection
board is working correctly.
3. Replace clog detection board if
malfunction has been identified.
A01024 Sample Probe Warning Sample probe fails to / 1. No sample is loaded on the 1. Check if there is sufficient
Unit detect liquid level when designated position. sample, and run the test again;
aspirating 2. Insufficient sample. 2. If there are level detection
1. The sample probe fails 3. Sample probe level detection error. error, check sample probe, level
to detect liquid level on detection board and connecting
sample carousel when cable; replace if any abnormity is
aspirating. identified.
2. The sample probe fails
to detect liquid level on
reaction carousel when
aspirating.
A01027 Sample Probe Error Sample probe aspirates / 1. No sample is loaded on the 1. Check if there is sufficient
Unit nothing. designated position. sample, and run the test again;
1. Sample probe aspirates 2. Insufficient sample. If level detection error is
nothing on the sample 3. Sample probe level detection error. identified, check sample probe,
carousel. Clog detection error. level detection board and
2. Sample probe aspirates connecting cable; replace if any
nothing on the reaction abnormity is identified.
If clog detection error is identified,
10-5
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
carousel. check if there is loose connection
or liquid leakage in sample probe
hydro system.
A01028 Sample Probe Error Sample probe fails to / 1. No DI water or hydro error; Check if hydro is normal;
Unit detect liquid level during 2. Sample probe level detection error. troubleshoot if there is any
cleaning abnormity;
1. Reagent probe does not If level detection error is
detect liquid level in wash identified, check sample probe,
well when reset. level detection board and
2. Reagent probe does not connecting cable; replace if any
detect liquid level in wash abnormity is identified.
well during cleaning.
A01029 Sample Probe Warning Sample probe is clogged / Sample contains clots or insufficient 1. Check if the sample has been
Unit when aspirating sample; pre-processed properly, or contains
Sample probe hydro error. foreign matters such as clot, or is
Clog detection system error. too viscous, or is sufficient.
2. Clean the sample probe with
special wash solution. If the
problem remains, remove the
sample probe and unclog it.
3. Check if the fluidics are normal,
especially if there is any air
bubbles in clog detection pressure
sensor.
Check clog detection board and
clog detection pressure sensor, if
previous two possible causes have
been eliminated.
A01030 Sample Probe Error Sample probe is clogged / Sample probe is clogged; 1. Clean the sample probe with
Unit during cleaning Sample probe hydro error. special wash solution. Remove the
sample probe and unclog it.
2. Check if sample probe tubing,
pump and valve for interior wash is
normal;
3. Check clog detection board and
clog detection pressure sensor.
10-6
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
A01033 Sample Probe Warning Sample probe fails to / 1. There is no reagent or insufficient 1. Check if R1 volume is sufficient
Unit detect liquid level on reagent in the cuvette; and the reagent bottle is free of air
reaction carousel when 2. Incorrect vertical extreme position bubbles, and then try again;
dispensing. parameter for sample probe on reaction 2. Check if the vertical extreme
carousel; position parameter for sample
3. Sample probe level detection error. probe on reaction carousel is
correct;
3. If there are level detection
error, check sample probe, level
detection board and connecting
cable; replace if any abnormity is
identified.
A01036 Sample Probe Error Sample probe level / 1. Cable error for communication Check relevant cable for any signs
Unit detection board data between level detection board and of fray or loose cable, or
receiving error smart modules disconnection, or short circuit.
A01037 Sample Probe Error Sample probe level / 1. Cable error for communication 1. Check relevant cable for any
Unit detection board self between level detection board and signs of fray or loose cable, or
calibrating failed smart modules; disconnection, or short circuit;
2. Sample probe error, or connection 2. Check if sample probe is
error between sample probe and level installed correctly; check if sample
detection board; probe is bent, cracked or loose;
3 Sample probe level detection board 3. Check if level detection board is
error. normal; replace it if not.
A01038 Sample Probe Error Sample probe interior / The sample probe interior pressure is 1. Check if the solenoid valve cable
Unit wash is abnormal. low. is disconnected and the voltage is
1. SV02 is not turned on or goes wrong. normal. Replace the valve if
2. SV03is not turned off completely. necessary.
3. The sample wash tube and connector 2. Check the pipe connection.
are leaking. Replace the pipe if necessary.
4. The pressure detection board goes 3. Check if the clog detection board
wrong. is normal. If not, replace it.
A02006 Reagent probe Error Reagent probe vertical / Reagent probe vertical movement error Reagent probe vertical movement
unit movement error 1. Sensor status error. error
1. Sensor status is Belt or belt pulley is loose. 1. Sensor status error.
10-7
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
position. 2) Driving circuit error; 2. Failed to find the zero position.
3. Collision occurs during 3) Vertical motor error; 1) Remove obstacle or replace
operation other than 4) Vertical sensor error; with a new assembly;
aspirating. 2) Replace PCB;
5) Belt pulley is loose;
4. Collision error remains. 3) Replace motor;
3. Collision occurs during operation
5. Moving vertically is not other than aspirating. 4) Replace sensor;
allowed in current
1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 5) Tighten properly;
horizontal position.
failure; 3. Collision occurs during operation
2) Collision sensor is not blocked other than aspirating.
when assembling the reagent probe; 1) Replace sensor or PCB or
vertically
3) Incorrect reagent probe cable;
positioning; 2) Reassemble;
Reagent probe horizontal
4) Incorrect reagent carousel 3) Rotate the positioning sensor
movement error
positioning. to remove dust or adjust the probe
1. Sensor status is
4. Collision error remains. to be vertical; if problem remains,
incorrect.
1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable adjust the positioning parameters;
failure; 4) Adjust reagent carousel
position.
2) Collision sensor is not blocked positioning parameters
3. Collision occurs during
when assembling the reagent probe; 4. Collision error remains.
horizontal movement.
3) Collision sensor is not blocked due 1) Replace sensor or PCB or
4. Moving horizontally is
to deformation of blocking plate’s cable;
not allowed in current
driving spring; 2) Reassemble;
vertical position.
5. Vertical movement is not allowed in 3) Mount the spring of blocking
current horizontal position. plate again;
horizontally Software error 5. Vertical movement is not
6. Losing steps when passing the zero allowed in current horizontal
position vertically: position.
Reagent syringe
movement error 1) The zero position sensor is loose or Reset the whole unit or the reagent
faulty. probe unit.
1. Sensor status is
incorrect. 2) The moving part collide with other Reagent probe horizontal
parts or is blocked. movement error
position. 6. Losing steps when passing the
Reagent probe horizontal movement zero position vertically:
3. Syringe losing steps
when passing the zero error 1) Check whether there is dust
10-8
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
position 1. Sensor status error. deposit on the sensor and whether
Belt or belt pulley is loose. the sensor is loose. If yes, clean the
2. Failed to find the zero position. dust and fasten the sensor.
1) Driving circuit error; 2) Remove obstacle or replace with
a new assembly.
2) Motor error;
3) Home position sensor error;
Reagent probe vertical movement
error
3. Collision occurs during horizontal
movement.
Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
tighten them if so;
2) Motor error;
1) Replace PCB;
2) Replace motor;
4. Horizontal movement is not allowed
3) Replace sensor;
in current vertical position.
Software error
3. Collision occurs during horizontal
5. Losing steps when passing the zero
movement.
position horizontally:
1) Replace PCB;
faulty. 2) Replace motor;
2) The moving part collide with other 3) Replace sensor;
parts or is blocked. 4) Tighten properly;
Reagent syringe movement error allowed in current vertical
position.
Reset the whole unit or the reagent
Belt or belt pulley is loose.
probe unit.
5. Losing steps when passing the
1) Assembly is jammed; zero position horizontally:
2) Driving circuit error; 1) Check whether there is dust
3) Motor error; deposit on the sensor and whether
4) Sensor error; the sensor is loose. If yes, clean the
5) Belt pulley is loose; dust and fasten the sensor.
3. Syringe losing steps when passing the 2) Remove obstacle or replace with
a new assembly.
10-9
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
zero position:
1) The zero position sensor is loose or Reagent syringe movement error
faulty. 1. Sensor status error.
2) The moving part collide with other Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
parts or is blocked. tighten them if so;
1) Remove obstacle or replace
with a new assembly;
2) Replace PCB;
3) Replace motor;
4) Replace sensor;
the zero position:
a new assembly.
A02007 Reagent probe Warning Reagent probe vertical / Reagent probe vertical movement error Reagent probe vertical movement
unit movement error 1. Collision occurs during aspirating. error
1. Collision occurs during 1) Collision sensor or circuit or cable 1. Collision occurs during
aspirating. failure; aspirating.
2) Collision sensor is not blocked 1) Replace sensor or PCB or
when assembling the reagent probe; cable;
3) Incorrect reagent probe 2) Reassemble;
positioning; 3) Rotate the positioning sensor
4) Incorrect reagent carousel to remove dust or adjust the probe
positioning. to be vertical; if problem remains,
4) Adjust reagent carousel
positioning parameters
A02023 Reagent probe Warning Reagent probe fails to / 1. There is no reagent or insufficient 1. Check if the reagent is
detect liquid level on
10-10
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
unit reagent carousel reagent on the reagent position. sufficient, and then try again.
2. Reagent probe level detection error. 2. If level detection error is
identified, check the reagent
probe, level detection board and
connecting cable; replace if any
abnormity is identified.
A02026 Reagent probe Error The liquid level is not / 1. No DI water or hydro error; 1. Check if tubing, pump and valve
unit detected during reagent 2. Reagent probe level detection error. for exterior wash of the reagent
probe cleaning. probe is normal..
2. If level detection error is
identified, check if the reagent
connecting cable are normal;
replace if any abnormity is
identified.
A02027 Reagent probe Warning Water residues exist in the / DI water residual exists in cuvette. Check if the aspirating tubing,
unit cuvette solenoid valve, and waste pump of
wash station is normal.
A02030 Reagent probe Error Reagent probe level / 1. Cable error for communication Check relevant cable for any signs
unit detection board data between level detection board and of fray or loose cable, or
receiving error smart modules disconnection, or short circuit.
A02031 Reagent probe Error Reagent probe level / 1. Cable error for communication 1. Check relevant cable for any
unit detection board self between level detection board and signs of fray or loose cable, or
calibrating failed. smart modules; disconnection, or short circuit;
2. Reagent probe error or level 2. Check if the reagent probe is
detection board connection error; installed correctly; check if the
3. Reagent probe level detection error. reagent probe is bent, cracked or
loose.
3. Check if level detection board is
normal; replace it if not.
A02032 Reagent probe Warning Reagent probe aspirates / Air bubbles exist in the reagent bottle. 1. Check if the reagent bottle
unit no reagent on the reagent contains air bubbles, and then try
carousel. again.
2. Check if the reagent bottle
meets requirements.
10-11
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
A02033 Reagent probe Warning The liquid level cannot be / 1. The reagent is insufficient, or air 1. Check if the reagent is sufficient
unit detected after reagent bubbles exist in the reagent bottle. and the reagent bottle contains air
probe dispensing. 2. Reagent probe level detection error. bubbles, and then try again.
2. If level detection error is
identified, check the reagent
connecting cable; replace if any
abnormity is identified.
A04006 Mixer Unit Error Sample mixer vertical / Sample mixer vertical movement error Sample mixer vertical movement
movement error 1. Sensor status error error
1. Sensor status is Belt or belt pulley is loose. 1. Sensor status error
position. 2. Failed to find the zero position.
3. Moving vertically is not 1) Remove obstacle or replace
3) Vertical motor error;
allowed in current with a new assembly;
horizontal position. 4) Vertical sensor error;
2) Replace PCB;
4. Losing steps when 5) Belt pulley is loose;
3) Replace motor;
passing the zero position 3. Vertical movement is not allowed in
current horizontal position. 4) Replace sensor;
vertically
Software error 5) Tighten properly;
4. Losing steps when passing the zero 3. Vertical movement is not
Sample mixer horizontal
position vertically: allowed in current horizontal
movement error
position.
1. Sensor status is 1) The zero position sensor is loose or
faulty. Reset the whole unit or the
incorrect.
relevant unit.
2. Failed to find the zero 2) The moving part collide with other
parts or is blocked. 4. Losing steps when passing the
position.
zero position vertically:
3. Moving horizontally is Sample mixer horizontal movement
error 1) Check whether there is dust
not allowed in current
vertical position. 1. Sensor status error
4. Losing steps when Belt or belt pulley is loose. dust and fasten the sensor.
passing the zero position 2. Failed to find the zero position. 2) Remove obstacle or replace with
horizontally 1) Driving circuit error; a new assembly.
2) Motor error;
3) Home position sensor error; Sample mixer horizontal movement
10-12
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
4) Belt pulley is loose; error
3. Horizontal movement is not allowed 1. Sensor status error
in current vertical position. Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
Software error tighten them if so;
4. Losing steps when passing the zero 2. Failed to find the zero position.
position horizontally: 1) Replace PCB;
1) The zero position sensor is loose or 2) Replace motor;
faulty. 3) Replace sensor;
2) The moving part collide with other 4) Tighten properly;
parts or is blocked.
allowed in current vertical
position.
Reset the whole unit or the
relevant unit.
4. Losing steps when passing the
zero position horizontally:
a new assembly.
A04007 Mixer Unit Error Sample mixer rotation / The mixer is blocked or the rotational 1. Replace the motor, or relevant
error speed sensor of the mixer goes wrong. cable, or circuit.
2. Adjust the mixer or replace the
assembly.
3. Replace the sensor, or relevant
cable, or circuit.
A04008 Mixer Unit Error Reagent mixer rotation / The mixer is blocked or the rotational 1. Replace the motor, or relevant
error speed sensor of the mixer goes wrong. cable, or circuit.
2. Adjust the mixer or replace the
assembly.
cable, or circuit.
10-13
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
A04009 Mixer Unit Error Abnormal rotation speed / The mixer motor, relevant cable or 1. Replace the motor, or relevant
of sample mixer or reagent drive circuit is faulty. cable, or circuit.
mixer 2. Adjust the mixer or replace the
assembly.
cable, or circuit.
A06006 Reaction Error Reaction carousel / Reaction carousel movement error Reaction carousel movement error
Carousel Unit movement error 1. Failed to find the home position 1. Failed to find the home position
1. Failed to find the home Home position sensor error Replace sensor or cable
position 2. The coder missed steps. 2. The coder missed steps.
2. The coder missed steps. 1) Assembly is jammed; 1) Remove obstacle or replace
3. The reagent carousel 2) Driving circuit error; with a new assembly;
inner ring missed steps 2) Replace PCB;
3) Motor error;
when moving to the home
4) Sensor error; 3) Replace motor;
position.
5) Belt pulley is loose; 4) Replace sensor or cable;
3. The reagent carousel inner ring 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
missed steps when moving to the home assembly;
position. 3. The reagent carousel inner ring
Home position sensor error missed steps when moving to the
home position.
Replace sensor or cable
A07006 Sample Error Sample carousel / Outer sample carousel movement error Outer sample carousel movement
Carousel Unit movement error 1. Failed to find the home position error
1. Failed to find the home Home position sensor error 1. Failed to find the home position
position 2. The coder missed steps. Replace sensor or cable
2. The coder missed steps. 1) Assembly is jammed; 2. The coder missed steps.
3. The reagent carousel 2) Driving circuit error; 1) Remove obstacle or replace
inner ring missed steps with a new assembly;
3) Motor error;
when moving to the home 2) Replace PCB;
position. 4) Sensor error;
5) Belt pulley is loose; 3) Replace motor;
3. The reagent carousel inner ring 4) Replace sensor or cable;
missed steps when moving to the home 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
position. assembly;
3. The reagent carousel inner ring
10-14
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
home position.
A07009 Sample Error Sample bar code reader / Due to the system error, the sample bar Recover the failure. If the error
Carousel Unit does not work normally code reader can not work normally. If remains, initialize the sample bar
the error repeats and cannot be code reader. If initialization cannot
removed, then the bar code reader has be performed, check if bar code
not performed the initialization reader is connected properly. If the
normally or the communication cables error remains, then replace the bar
are disconnected. code reader or the control drive
If bar code reader is not available, board.
please try again.
A07010 Sample Warning Received bar code / Sample bar code reader does not work Initialize the sample bar code
Carousel Unit contains no ending normally due to communication error. reader and try again. If the
character. problem still remains, check the
cable of the bar code reader or
replace the bar code reader or the
control drive board.
A07011 Sample Error Bar code sending buffer is / Sample bar code sending buffer is full Recover the failure or reboot the
Carousel Unit full. due to communication error. analyzing unit.
A09006 Reagent Error Reagent carousel fails to / Reagent carousel outer ring movement Reagent carousel outer ring
Carousel Unit find home position error movement error
Reagent carousel 1. Failed to find the home position 1. Failed to find the home position
movement error Home position sensor error Replace sensor or cable
1. Failed to find the home 2. The coder missed steps. 2. The coder missed steps.
position 1) Assembly is jammed; 1) Remove obstacle or replace
2. The coder missed steps. 2) Driving circuit error; with a new assembly;
3. The reagent carousel 3) Motor error; 2) Replace PCB;
inner ring missed steps 3) Replace motor;
4) Sensor error;
when moving to the home
5) Belt pulley is loose; 4) Replace sensor or cable;
position.
3. The reagent carousel inner ring 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
missed steps when moving to the home assembly;
position. 3. The reagent carousel inner ring
home position.
10-15
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
A09011 Reagent Error Bar code reader does not / Reagent bar code reader connection Recover the failure. If the error
Carousel Unit work normally. error due to system failure. If the error remains, initialize the sample bar
repeats and cannot be removed, then code reader. If initialization cannot
the bar code reader has not performed be performed, check if bar code
the initialization normally or the reader is connected properly. If the
communication cables are error remains, then replace the bar
disconnected. code reader or the control drive
If bar code reader is not available, board.
please try again.
A09012 Reagent Warning Received bar code / Communication error. Reagent bar code Initialize the sample bar code
Carousel Unit contains no ending instruction buffer is full. reader and try again. If the
character. problem still remains, check the
cable of the bar code reader or
replace the bar code reader or the
control drive board.
A09014 Reagent Error Bar code sending buffer is / Reagent bar code reader does not work Recover the failure or reboot the
Carousel Unit full. normally due to communication error. analyzing unit.
A11005 Wash unit Error Wash station movement / Wash station movement error Wash station movement error
error 1. Sensor status error 1. Sensor status error
0. Home position is not Belt pulley is loose; Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
found. 2. Home position is not found. tighten them if so;
1. Sensor status is 1) Driving circuit error; 2. Home position is not found.
incorrect. 1) Replace PCB;
2) Motor error;
2. The wash station 2) Replace motor;
collides with an obstacle
4) Belt pulley is loose; 3) Replace sensor;
when moving.
3. The wash station collides with an 4) Tighten properly;
3. Movement is forbidden
in current status. obstacle when moving. 3. The wash station collides with an
1) Wash probes are not vertical; obstacle when moving.
passing the zero position 2) Reaction carousel positioning is 1) Align wash probes;
vertically deviated; 2) Align reaction carousel
3) Collision sensor or circuit error positioning;
4. Losing steps when passing the zero 3) Replace sensor, cable or PCB
position vertically: 4. Losing steps when passing the
10-16
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
1) The zero position sensor is loose or zero position vertically:
faulty. 1) Check whether there is dust
2) The moving part collide with other deposit on the sensor and whether
parts or is blocked. the sensor is loose. If yes, clean the
a new assembly.
A11012 Wash unit Warning Water supplying is too / The water unit goes wrong. 1. Check the water unit.
slow The water supply valve goes wrong. Check if the water supply ball valve
The water supply ball valve is not is opened and the handle is
opened. (The handle is horizontal when horizontal.
it is opened) Check if the water supply ball valve
The water supply ball valve goes wrong. is blocked.
5. The low-level floater of the water 4. Check if water supply valve can
tank goes wrong. be turned on and off normally.
6. The water supply tube is bent. 5. Check if low-level floater signal
7. The outlet filter of the water supply is correct.
tube is clogged. 6. Check if the water supply tube is
smooth.
7. Check if outlet filter of water
supply tube is clogged.
A11013 Wash unit Error Water tank is empty / The water unit goes wrong. 1. Check the water unit.
The water supply valve goes wrong. 2. Check if water supply valve can
3. The low-level floater of the water be turned on and off normally.
tank goes wrong. 3. Check if low-level floater signal
4. The water supply tube is bent. is correct.
5. The outlet filter of the water supply 4. Check if the water supply tube is
tube is clogged. smooth.
5. Check if outlet filter of water
supply tube is clogged.
A11015 Wash unit Error Insufficient diluted wash / 1. The diluted wash solution is to be 1. Check if the diluted wash
solution exhausted. solution is exhausted and the
2. The low-level floater of the diluted floater status is Empty. If yes, fill
wash solution tank goes wrong. more diluted wash solution.
2. Check diluted wash solution
10-17
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
low-level floater.
A11019 Wash unit Error Low concentration waste / 1. The low-concentration waste drain 1. Check if the low-concentration
collector is full tube is bent. waste drain tube is smooth.
2. The low-concentration waste outlet 2. Check if the low-concentration
is too high. waste outlet is of normal height.
A11020 Wash unit Error High concentration waste / The high concentration waste tank is Check the high-concentration
tank is full full waste tank. If the tank is full,
The floater of the high concentration replace it. Cover the full tank and
waste tank goes wrong. dispose of the waste properly.
Check if high-concentration waste
goes wrong.
A11028 Wash unit Error Water tank floater logic / 1. The high-/low-level floaters of the 1. Check if the high-/low-level
failure water tank go wrong. floater signal of the water tank is
correct.
A11034 Wash unit Error Cuvette wash syringe / Cuvette wash syringe movement error. Wash station movement error
movement error. 1. Sensor status error 1. Sensor status error
1. Sensor status is Sensor is not connected or is damaged. If the problem remains after
incorrect. 2. Home position is not found. resetting, check the sensor
2. Failed to find the 1) Driving circuit error; connection or replace it.
mechanical zero position. 2. Home position is not found.
2) Motor error;
3. Losing steps when Check if the component resistance
passing the zero position is too high. If it is, replace the
4) Component jam.
component.
3. Syringe losing steps when passing the
zero position:
a new assembly.
2) Replace PCB;
faulty.
3) Replace motor;
2) The moving part collide with other
parts or is blocked. 4) Replace sensor;
5) Tighten properly.
the zero position:
10-18
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
a new assembly.
A12005 Temperature Warning Reaction carousel T1 1. The ambient temperature is out of 1. Reproduce failure.
control unit temperature is out of range. 2. Check whether the ambient
range 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. temperature is out of range.
(component error, cable error) 3. Temperature sensor error: check
3. The temperature protection switch for any signs of short circuit or
goes wrong. (component error, cable broken circuit; check if connections
error) are secure.
4. The heater goes wrong. (component 4. Temperature protection switch
error, cable error) error: check if protection switch is
5. PCB error shut and connections are secure.
6. Parameters are lost. 5. Heater error: check if resistance
7. Electromagnetic interference exists. under normal temperature is
correct, and connections are
secure.
6. PCB error
7. Parameters are lost: check if
temperature control parameters
are correct.
8. Electromagnetic interference
A12006 Temperature Warning Temperature of wash / 1. The ambient temperature is out of 1. Reproduce failure.
control unit solution for cleaning range. 2. Check whether the temperature
cuvettes is out of range 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. is out of range.
error) are secure.
10-19
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
secure.
6. PCB error
are correct.
A12007 Temperature Warning Temperature of fluid for / 1. The ambient temperature is out of 1. Reproduce failure.
control unit cleaning cuvettes is out of range. 2. Check whether the temperature
range 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. is out of range.
error) are secure.
secure.
6. PCB error
are correct.
A14011 Temperature Warning Reagent refrigerating fan / 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Reproduce failure.
control unit is abnormal 2. The fan is damaged. 2. Pull off and plug in fan socket.
3. The power supply goes wrong. 3. Check if power supply for fan is
normal.
4. Clean dust off the fan.
5. Replace fan.
A22001 ISE module Error 1. Slope of Na electrode is 1. Electrode is not installed correctly. 1. Remove and reinstall the
out of range. 2. Calibration is invalid. electrode.
2. Slope of K electrode is 3. Electrode is degenerated. 2. Replace the calibrator.
10-20
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
out of range. 4. Bubbles exist inside reference 3. Replace the failed electrode and
3. Slope of Cl electrode is electrode. run tests again.
out of range. 5. Reference electrode has been used 4. Remove the electrode, clap it to
4. Slopes of Na and Li for a long time. remove the bubbles, reinstall it,
electrodes are out of 6. Electrodes interfere with each other. and then run calibration.
range. 7. Module or fluidic temperature 5. Replace the reference electrode
5. Slopes of K and Li exceeds 32℃. and run tests again.
electrodes are out of 6. Replace electrode by different
range. combinations to troubleshoot the
6. Slopes of K and Na failed one.
electrodes are out of 7. Monitor the temperature. If the
range. ambient temperature is too high,
7. Slopes of Cl and Li move the instrument to another
electrodes are out of position.
range.
8. Slopes of Cl and Na
electrodes are out of
range.
9. Slopes of Cl and K
range.
10. Slopes of K, Na and Li
range.
11. Slopes of Cl, Na and Li
range.
12. Slopes of Cl, K and Li
range.
13. Slopes of Cl, K and Na
range.
14. Slopes of Cl, K, Na and
Li electrodes are out of
range.
10-21
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
A22002 ISE module Error Sample probe cannot 1. Sample is insufficient, or contains 1. and 2. Increase the sample
detect fluid level on the bubbles after being dispensed. volume. Place enough sample in
sample carousel due to 2. No or insufficient sample is dispensed the tube, at least 90μl for ISE
insufficient sample, or to the injection port. measurement.
sample is detected 3. Leaks exist due to improper 3. Electrode is not installed
containing bubbles in the installation of electrode. correctly. Reinstall it.
electrode channel. 4. Check the waste tube, and if
4. Waste pump tube is aging or broken.
necessary, replace it.
A22004 ISE module Error Communicating with the / 1. Power supply of ISE module goes 1. Replace the 24V power supply
ISE module failed. wrong. board of the ISE module.
2. Communication cable between ISE 2. Replace the communication
module and middle-layer unit goes cable.
wrong. 3. Replace the interface or pins.
3. Communication interface or pins go 4. Replace the main control board
wrong. of the ISE module.
4. Main control board of the ISE module
goes wrong.
A22005 ISE module Error ISE unit communication / 1. Communication cable between ISE 1. Replace the communication
response error module and middle-layer unit goes cable.
3. Main control board of the ISE module 4. Upgrade or reinstall the
goes wrong. software.
4. Software error.
A22006 ISE module Error Pure A/B failed according / 1. Leaks exist due to improper 1. Reinstall the electrode and
to the returned data of installation of electrode or O ring's check for the O ring.
last purge A and purge B. missing. 2. Use warm water to rinse the
2. Sample injection port of electrode sample injection port, and unclog
inside is blocked. the electrode tube. Check the
3. Calibrator in the reagent pack is inside of the reference electrode
exhausted. for salt buildup.
4. Purge cycle is not enough. 3. Replace the reagent pack.
5. Peristaltic pump tube is aging, 4. Increase the prime cycle.
blocked or broken. 5. Replace the pump tube.
10-22
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
6. Calibrator cannot be output due to 6. Use warm water to unclog the
the blocked wand tube. wand tube.
A22007 ISE module Warning Inventory of ISE reagent / Calibrator is exhausted. Replace the reagent pack with a
pack is 0. new one.
A22008 ISE module Error Voltage of Na electrode is 1. Electrode or reagent pack is invalid. 1. Replace the failed electrode or
out of range during B 2. Electrode is unstable. reagent pack.
calibration or sample 3. New reagent pack is unstable. 2. New electrode can become
measurement. stable only after 15 minutes since
4. Reference electrode has been used
Voltage of K electrode is for over 6 months. installation.
out of range during B 3. Multiple calibrations are
calibration or sample required after installing new
goes wrong.
measurement. reagent pack.
Voltage of Cl electrode is 4. Replace the reference
out of range during B electrode.
calibration or sample 5. Replace the main control board.
measurement.
Voltage of Na electrode is
out of range during B
calibration or sample
measurement.
Voltage of K electrode is
measurement.
Voltages of K and Na
range during B calibration
or sample measurement.
Voltage of Cl electrode is
measurement.
Voltages of Cl and Na
10-23
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
Voltages of Cl and K
Voltages of Cl, K and Na
out of range for
calibration A in two-point
calibration or serum
mode, or for calibration B
in urine mode.
out of range for
in urine mode.
10-24
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
out of range for
in urine mode.
out of range for
in urine mode.
out of range for
in urine mode.
range for calibration A in
two-point calibration or
serum mode, or for
calibration B in urine
mode.
out of range for
in urine mode.
serum mode, or for
mode.
10-25
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
serum mode, or for
mode.
serum mode, or for
mode.
serum mode, or for
mode.
serum mode, or for
mode.
serum mode, or for
mode.
10-26
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
serum mode, or for
mode.
A22009 ISE module Error Na electrode’s voltage / 1. Electrode or reagent pack is invalid. 1. Replace the failed electrode or
drift for calibration A or 2. Electrode is unstable. reagent pack.
slope drift for two-point 3. New reagent pack is unstable. 2. New electrode can become
calibration in urine mode. stable only after 15 minutes since
4. Reference electrode has been used
K electrode’s voltage drift for over 6 months. installation.
for calibration A or slope 3. Multiple calibrations are
drift for two-point required after installing new
goes wrong.
calibration in urine mode. reagent pack.
6. The ambient temperature is
Cl electrode’s voltage 4. Replace the reference
fluctuating greatly.
drift for calibration A or electrode.
slope drift for two-point 5. Replace the main control board.
calibration in urine mode.
6. Monitor the ambient
Na electrode’s voltage temperature and ensure the
drift for calibration A or fluctuation is within +/-4.
slope drift for two-point
K electrode’s voltage drift
for calibration A or slope
drift for two-point
K and Na electrodes’
voltage drift for
calibration A or slope drift
for two-point calibration
in urine mode.
Cl electrode’s voltage
drift for calibration A or
slope drift for two-point
Cl and Na electrodes’
voltage drift for
10-27
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
in urine mode.
Cl and K electrodes’
voltage drift for
in urine mode.
K and Na electrodes’
voltage drift for
in urine mode.
Cl and Na electrodes’
voltage drift for
in urine mode.
Cl and K electrodes’
voltage drift for
in urine mode.
Cl, K and Na electrodes’
voltage drift for
in urine mode.
Cl, K and Na electrodes’
voltage drift for
in urine mode.
A22010 ISE module Error Voltage of Na electrode / 1. Electrode is invalid. 1. Replace the electrode.
has noise during B 2. Temperature interference. 2. Relocate the instrument.
calibration or sample 3. Main control board of the ISE module 3. Replace the main control board
measurement. goes wrong. of the ISE module.
Voltage of K electrode has
10-28
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
noise during B calibration 4. Fluidic leaks exist, resulting in salt 4. Clean the tube and electrode.
or sample measurement. buildup around the electrode or tube.
Voltage of Cl electrode has
noise during B calibration
Voltage of Na electrode
has noise during B
measurement.
electrodes have noise
during B calibration or
sample measurement.
sample measurement.
sample measurement.
sample measurement.
sample measurement.
10-29
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
sample measurement.
sample measurement.
sample measurement.
has noise for calibration A
in two-point calibration or
serum mode, or for
mode.
noise for calibration A in
serum mode, or for
mode.
serum mode, or for
mode.
has noise for calibration A
in two-point calibration or
serum mode, or for
mode.
10-30
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
serum mode, or for
mode.
Voltage of K and Na
electrodes has noise for
in urine mode.
serum mode, or for
mode.
electrodes have noise for
in urine mode.
in urine mode.
in urine mode.
10-31
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
in urine mode.
in urine mode.
in urine mode.
in urine mode.
A22011 ISE module Error Calibrator B is detected / 1. Calibrator B is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a
containing bubbles in the 2. Calibrator B tube contains many air new one.
electrode channel, or is bubbles. 2. Perform purge B to remove air
exhausted. 3. Peristaltic pump B tube is aging, bubbles.
clogged and broken. 3. and 4. Replace the peristaltic
4. Waste pump tube is aging, clogged pump tube.
and broken. 5. Clean the sample injection port,
5. The sample injection port and fluidic or reinstall the electrode.
tube is blocked or leaking. 6. Replace the air bubble detector.
6. The air bubble detector is invalid.
A22012 ISE module Error Calibrator A is detected / 1. Calibrator A is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a
containing bubbles in the 2. Calibrator A tube contains many air new one.
electrode channel, or is bubbles. 2. Perform purge B to remove air
exhausted. 3. Peristaltic pump A tube is aging, bubbles.
clogged and broken. 3. and 4. Replace the peristaltic
4. Waste pump tube is aging, clogged pump tube.
10-32
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
and broken. 5. Clean the sample injection port,
5. The sample injection port and fluidic or reinstall the electrode.
tube is blocked or leaking. 6. Replace the air bubble detector.
A22013 ISE module Error Pump calibration result / 1. Peristaltic pump tube is aging. 1. Replace the pump tube.
error 2. Aspiration and dispensing of sample 2. Replace the sample probe.
probe goes wrong.
A22014 ISE module Error Air bubble detector error / 1. Air bubble detector board is eroded Replace the air bubble detector.
due to the leaks at the joint of sample
injection port and bubble detector.
A22015 ISE module Error Reading reagent pack chip / Reagent pack information cannot be 1. Install the reagent pack.
information error read, or the read volume of calibrator A 2. Install the reagent pack wand.
or B is less than that recorded in the
database.
A22016 ISE module Error Writing reagent pack chip / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install the reagent pack.
information error 2. Reagent pack wand is failed. 2. Install the reagent pack wand.
A22017 ISE module Error Wash solution is detected / 1. ISE wash solution is insufficient. 1. Place sufficient ISE wash
containing bubbles in the 2. Waste pump tube is aging, clogged solution.
electrode channel, or has and broken. 2. Replace the peristaltic pump
not been loaded to correct 3. The sample injection port and fluidic tube.
position on the sample tube is blocked or leaking. 3. Clean the sample injection port,
carousel. or reinstall the electrode.
4. Replace the air bubble detector.
A22018 ISE module Error The ISE tube has no liquid / 1. Waste pump tube is aging, clogged 1. Replace the peristaltic pump
or has leaks. and broken. tube.
2. The sample injection port and fluidic 2. Clean the sample injection port,
tube is blocked or leaking. or reinstall the electrode.
3. The air bubble detector is invalid. 3. Replace the air bubble detector.
A22019 ISE module Error Stored calibration value / 1. Communication cable between ISE 1. Replace the communication
error. module and middle-layer unit goes cable.
wrong.
10-33
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
3. Main control board of the ISE module of the ISE module.
goes wrong. 4. Upgrade or reinstall the
4. Software error. software.
A22021 ISE module Error Command format or / 1. Communication cable between ISE 1. Replace the communication
execution error module and middle-layer unit goes cable.
5. Software error.
A22022 ISE module Error Air exists in segment / 1. Waste pump tube is aging, clogged 1. Waste pump tube is aging,
and broken. clogged and broken.
2. The sample injection port and fluidic 2. The sample injection port and
tube is blocked or leaking. fluidic tube is blocked or leaking.
3. The air bubble detector is invalid. 3. The air bubble detector is
invalid.
A22023 ISE module Error Reagent module not / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install the reagent pack.
loaded 2. Reagent pack wand is failed. 2. Install the reagent pack wand.
A22024 ISE module Error Check digit in error code / 1. Communication cable between ISE 1. Replace the communication
returned by ISE module is module and middle-layer unit goes cable.
incorrect. wrong. 2. Replace the interface or pins.
5. Software error.
A22025 System Error Communication with / The serial cable is not connected; or the Check the serial port connection.
communication middle-/lower-layer units analyzer power is switched off. Replug the cable. Check if the
failed in home procedure. analyzing unit and rack feeder
system are powered on. Start the
initialization again. Restart the
computer and analyzing unit. If
three continuous attempts are
failed, contact our customer
10-34
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
service department or your local
distributor.
A22026 System Error Key parameters are not / Key parameters are not configured. Switch off the analyzing unit power
communication configured during home and switch on it again. If this
procedure. message appears for 3 times,
distributor.
A22027 System Error Fluidic prime is not / Fluidic prime is not performed. Switch off the analyzing unit power
communication performed during home and switch on it again. If this
distributor.
A22028 System Error Downloading key / Downloading key parameters failed, or Switch off the analyzing unit power
communication parameters failed during reading parameters from E2PROM and switch on it again. If this
home procedure. failed, or configuring parameters of message appears for 3 times,
low-layer unit failed. contact our customer service
distributor.
A22029 System Error Collecting dark current / Collecting dark current failed. Switch off the analyzing unit power
communication failed during home and switch on it again. If this
distributor.
A22032 System Error Floaters are found / Water tank low-level floater is full. Or 1. Check if the water unit and inlet
communication abnormal during fluidic Low level floater of the diluted wash tube are normal.
initialization of home solution tank is empty. Or 2. Check if the low-concentration
procedure. Low-concentration waste collector waste tube is normal.
floater is empty. Or 3. Check floaters of the water tank,
External high-concentration waste tank diluted wash solution tank,
floater is full. low-concentration waste
container, and external
high-concentration waste tank.
A22034 System Error Resetting cuvette wash / Resetting cuvette wash syringe failed. Switch off the analyzing unit power
10-35
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
communication syringe failed during and switch on it again. If this
fluidic initialization of message appears for 3 times,
home procedure. contact our customer service
distributor.
A22036 System Error Initializing sample bar / Initializing sample bar code reader Switch off the analyzing unit power
communication code reader failed during failed. and switch on it again. If this
home procedure. message appears for 3 times,
distributor.
A22037 System Error Initializing reagent bar / Initializing reagent bar code reader Switch off the analyzing unit power
communication code reader failed during failed. and switch on it again. If this
home procedure. message appears for 3 times,
distributor.
A22038 System Error Executing reagent bar / Scanning reagent bar code failed. Switch off the analyzing unit power
communication code scanning failed and switch on it again. If this
during home procedure. message appears for 3 times,
distributor.
A22039 System Error Software version does not / 1. Executing version query instruction Switch off the analyzing unit power
communication match during home failed. and switch on it again. If this
procedure. 2. Returned control software version message appears for 3 times,
and that stored in the operating contact our customer service
software does not match. department or your local
distributor.
A22041 Sample Probe Sample Sample probe special wash / 1. Sample probe vertical movement 1. Troubleshoot possible
Unit probe failure during home assembly fails movement-related problems by
special procedure 2. Drain tubes of sample probe wash referring to the solutions to sample
wash well are bent or have foreign objects probe movement errors.
failure inside 2. Arrange the drain tubes of
sample probe wash well and
remove foreign objects.
10-36
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
C00007 Operating Error CPU error / The CPU is too busy. Restart the computer and
system operating software. Check for
viruses or other software, or if
anti-virus software trusts the
BS-430 operating software.
C00011 Operating Error The operating software / The operating software is abnormal or After rebooting the software,
system has not been closed the analyzer is powered off perform the special wash
normally. accidentally. procedure.
C00012 Operating Warning Sound card failure / No sound card is installed. Sound card Reinstall the sound card or the
system failure. Incorrect sound card driver. sound card driver.
C01001 System Error Instrument cannot be / The serial cable is not connected; or the Check the serial port connection.
communication connected analyzer power is switched off. Replug the cable. Check if the
The track is powered off. analyzing unit and rack feeder
system are powered on. Start the
initialization again. Restart the
computer and analyzing unit. If
three continuous attempts are
failed, contact our customer
distributor.
C02001 Database Error Database initializing failed / Database software is not installed; Install database software;
database is not established; database re-establish database; if problem
system or database file is damaged or remains, contact our R&D
lost; database is opened exclusively department
C02002 Database Error Database upgrade failed / Database is severely damaged; database Install database software;
does not exist; database is not private re-establish database; if problem
for BS-600; database is opened remains, contact our R&D
exclusively department
C02004 Database Warning Data backup failed / Database record is being used. Database Back up database again; if problem
is locked. remains, contact our R&D
department
C02005 Database Warning Reading/Writing database / Cannot read or write necessary Check if database has been
failed information from or into database damaged; contact our R&D
department
C03001 Result Warning Response calculation error RCE Absorbance data for calculation is Investigate the cause of
10-37
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
calculation incomplete, or the dividend is 0. photoelectric data loss; contact our
R&D department
C03002 Result Warning Absorbance out of range ABS The absorbance measured at the Check the sample for foreign
calculation primary and secondary wavelength is matters or interferents; check if
greater than 3.3A. the reagent is qualified and placed
in the correct position; check the
cuvette is clean; check if the
photometric system is working
normally.
C03003 Result Warning R1 blank absorbance out of RBK The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is Check if cuvette is clean or
calculation range not clear; the reaction cuvette is overflowed; check if reagent is
overflowed; or insufficient reagent is sufficient, without air bubbles;
dispensed. check if chemistry parameters are
reasonable; if previous problems do
not exist, replace reagent and
rerun the test.
C03004 Result Warning Substrate depletion BOE The sample concentration is too high, Check the reaction curve and the
calculation and substrate depletion occurs during substrate depletion limit. Rerun
fixed-time measurements. the test with diluted sample.
C03005 Result Warning No calculation interval ENC The sample concentration is too high, Check the reaction curve and the
calculation and substrate depletion occurs within substrate depletion limit. Rerun
the lag time of rate check the test with diluted sample.
measurements.
C03006 Result Warning Non-linear LIN The measuring points for result Check the reaction curve and the
calculation calculation are nonlinear, because the substrate depletion limit. Rerun
sample concentration is too high, or the the test with diluted sample.
substrate depletion limit is not specified
or unreasonable.
C03007 Result Warning Prozone check error PRO Antigen excess occurs due to too high Check the reaction curve and the
calculation sample concentration. prozone check parameters. Rerun
the test with diluted sample.
C03008 Result Warning Response greater than RRN The sample concentration exceeds the Rerun the test with diluted sample.
calculation that of the high limit of the calibrator
maximum-concentration concentration.
calibrator
10-38
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
C03009 Result Warning Mixed blank absorbance MBK The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is Check if the cuvette is clear and
calculation out of range not clear; the reaction cuvette is not overflowed, the reagent is
overflowed; or insufficient reagent is sufficient without air bubbles, and
dispensed. the chemistry parameters are
reasonable. If yes, replace the
reagent and then rerun the test.
C03010 Result Warning Blank response out of BLK The reagent goes wrong; insufficient Check if the cuvette is not
calculation range reagent is dispensed; the cuvette overflowed, the reagent is
contains air bubbles; the light drifts; or sufficient without air bubbles, the
the cuvette is overflowed. light does not drift and the
chemistry parameters are
reasonable. If yes, replace the
reagent and then rerun the test.
C03011 Result Warning Calibration repeatability DUP The difference between the maximum Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation error. and minimum response of the calibrator reasonable, troubleshoot the error,
exceeds the specified limit. and then recalibrate.
C03012 Result Warning Calibration sensitivity SEN The difference of final response of the Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation error. maximum and minimum concentration reasonable and the reagent and
calibrators exceeds the specified limit. calibrator are normal, and then
recalibrate.
C03013 Result Warning Calibration curve standard CSD The calculated standard deviation of Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation deviation out of range. the calibration curve exceeds the reasonable and the reagent and
specified limit. calibrator are normal, and then
recalibrate.
C03014 Result Warning Calibration determination DET The calculated fit of the calibration Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation coefficient out of range curve exceeds the specified limit. reasonable and the reagent and
calibrator are normal, and then
recalibrate.
C03015 Result Warning Calibration coefficient FAC The slope difference is applicable to Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation differential limit exceeds linear calibration only and refers to the reasonable and the reagent and
limit. K factor (slope) difference between two calibrator are normal, and then
adjacent calibrations. It exceeds the recalibrate.
specified limit.
C03016 Result Warning Calibration curve not MON The calibration data and calibration Check if the calibrator is defined
calculation monotonic. curve are not monotonic. and placed correctly, and then
10-39
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
recalibrate.
C03017 Result Warning Calibration curve is not COV For nonlinear calibration, a satisfying Check that the reagent and
calculation convergent. base cannot be calculated and no calibrator are normal, and then
calibration curve is drawn. recalibrate. If troubleshooting
fails, choose other calibration rules
and recalibrate.
C03018 Result Warning 12S 12S The current QC result is between ±2 and No actions are required.
calculation ±3 standard deviations from the
assigned mean concentration.
C03019 Result Warning 13s 13s The current QC result is greater than ±3 Check if the reagent is qualified,
calculation standard deviations from the assigned control sample is normal, and the
mean concentration. instrument is working correctly.
C03020 Result Warning 22s 22s Results of two controls or two results of Check if the reagent is qualified,
calculation one control within a run are control sample is normal, and the
simultaneously greater than +2 or -2 instrument is working correctly.
standard deviations from the assigned
mean.
C03021 Result Warning R4S R4S One result of a run is greater than +2 Check if the reagent is qualified,
calculation standard deviations (SD) from the control sample is normal, and the
assigned mean and the other greater instrument is working correctly.
than -2SD.
C03022 Result Warning 41s 41s Results of two runs (4 results), or 4 Check if the reagent is qualified,
calculation continuous results of a control are on control sample is normal, and the
the same side and greater than ±1 instrument is working correctly.
standard deviation from the assigned
mean concentration.
C03023 Result Warning 10x 10x Results of five runs (10 results), or 10 Check if the reagent is qualified,
calculation continuous results of a control are on control sample is normal, and the
the same side. instrument is working correctly.
C03024 Result Error CC test period time out. / Software error Rerun the tests; check the serial
calculation Cannot continue Operating system error cable connection of the main unit;
restart the software; switch on the
analyzing unit power again; check
the Task Manager for abnormal
processes; or contact the R&D
10-40
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
department of Mindray.
C03026 Result Warning Photoelectric data is lost / Communication error. If the error persists, contact our
calculation R&D department.
C03027 Result Warning 1.0-2.7 out of control 2.7s The cumsum of control is greater than Check if the reagent is qualified,
calculation ±2.7 standard deviations from the control sample is normal, and the
average. instrument is working correctly.
C03030 Result Error Photoelectric / Software error 1. Rerun the operating software.
calculation measurement period is out 2. Restart the analyzing unit.
of range If problem remains, contact our
R&D department.
C03031 Result Error Multiple photoelectric / Software error 1. Rerun the operating software.
calculation measurements are time 2. Restart the analyzing unit.
out If problem remains, contact our
R&D department.
C04001 Sample bar Warning Duplicate sample bar / Duplicate bar code is used on the Replace the duplicate sample bar
code code. current day. code label.
C04002 Sample bar Warning Bar code has no / The sample of the bar code has not been Program the sample of the bar
code corresponding programmed. code.
programming.
C04006 Sample bar Warning Sample is expired. / The sample is loaded after its shelf life The sample is expired. Replace the
code is exceeded. sample and program it again.
Reject the expired sample. If the
sample shelf life is too short,
change it to a reasonable one.
C04008 Sample bar Warning Sample bar code too long. / The bar code length is greater than the Redefine the bar code with no more
code maximum value of 27 digits. than 27 digits.
C40009 Sample bar Warning Sample bar code is less / The bar code length is less than the Redefine the bar code with no less
10-41
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
code than 3 digits. minimum value of 3 digits. than 3 digits.
C04012 Sample bar Warning Sample bar code analyzing / Bar code data does not accord with the Reset the bar code format, or
code failed during sample defined format. reprint and scan the bar code.
programming.
C05001 Reagent bar Warning Reagent of this bar code / Incorrect reagent or reagent bar code is Reprint the reagent bar code, or
code has already been loaded. being used, or an invalid reagent bar replace the reagent bottle with an
code is being used in a closed-reagent invalid bar code.
system. Closed-reagent bar code is
aligned with closed reagents, and
cannot be used again for new reagent
when a reagent is exhausted.
C05002 Reagent bar Warning Reagent bar code / Incorrect reagent bar code is being Print the new reagent bar code
code information error. used, or reagent bar code is not with correct settings and check the
configured reasonably. The reagent bar bar code against the settings. In
code contains incomplete or incorrect the case of a closed-reagent
reagent information, such as expiration system, replace the reagent bottle,
date, reagent volume, etc. or contact the reagent supplier.
The reagent is placed in a wrong Check if the reagent bottle type
position, for example, a 40ml square and the position match.
bottle on the inner ring and a 40ml long
bottle on the outer ring.
C05003 Reagent bar Warning Reagent bar code is / Incorrect reagent bar code is being Check the reagent bar code
code incorrect and does not used, or reagent bar code settings are settings, or reprint the reagent bar
meet the requirements. incorrect. Non-closed reagent bar code code against the settings. In the
is being used in a closed-reagent case of a closed-reagent system,
system. The system fails to extract contact the reagent supplier.
reagent information from the bar code.
C05006 Reagent bar Error Other reagents are placed / Reagent rather than wash solution is Reposition the reagent, or remove
code in the fixed reagent placed in the fixed wash solution it from the fixed wash solution
position. position on reagent carousel 1. position.
C05008 Reagent bar Error Other reagents are placed / Reagent rather than physiological saline Reposition the reagent, or remove
code in the fixed reagent is placed in the fixed physiological it from the fixed wash solution
position. saline position on reagent carousel 1. position.
C06001 Host Error LIS initialization error / Host file is damaged or does not exist. Reboot operating software;
communication initialize LIS module
10-42
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
C06002 Host Error LIS communication / Host parameters error Check system configuration
communication parameter error parameters; re-connect LIS
C06003 Host Error LIS communication error / Communication failure If the error occurs accidentally,
communication send or receive the instruction
again. If the error occurs for
several times, contact LIS vendor.
If problem remain, contact our R&D
department.
C06004 Host Error LIS host cannot be / Abnormal network connection, or the Check if LIS host and LIS station is
communication connected LIS host is not started. started normally.
C06005 Host Warning Sending sample results / Communication failure If the error occurs accidentally,
communication failed. send or receive the instruction
department.
C06006 Host Warning Sending sample / Communication failure If the error occurs accidentally,
communication information failed. send or receive the instruction
department.
C06007 Host Warning Inquiring sample / LIS host failure. If the error occurs accidentally,
communication information failed neglect it. Neglect the error. If the
error occurs for several times,
contact LIS vendor. If the problem
remains, contact our customer
distributor.
C06008 Host Warning Downloading sample / Incorrect channel settings; or Check and re-set the chemistry
communication failed. insufficient or redundant chemistries on correspondence between the
the LIS host. operating software and the LIS
host.
C07003 Light Source Error Light intensity is too weak. / 1. The lamp is not installed correctly. 1. Open the lamp replacement door
2. The cuvette is contaminated. and check if the lamp is installed
10-43
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
3. The lamp is aging. correctly.
4. The wash station dispenses liquid 2. Perform the special wash
incorrectly. procedure and then the lamp check
5. The AD collection board goes wrong. procedure.
3. Replace the lamp.
4. Check if the wash station
dispenses liquid with correct
volume to reaction cuvettes.
5. Check if the cables on the AD
collection board are installed
correctly.
6. Replace the AD collection board.
7. If the problem remains, contact
the R&D department of Mindray.
C07004 Light Source Warning Cuvette blank out of range / 1. The cuvette is contaminated. 1. Replace or clean the failed
2. The lamp is aging. cuvette.
3. The lamp is not installed correctly. 2. Open the lamp replacement door
4. The wash station dispenses liquid and check if the lamp is installed
incorrectly. correctly.
5. The photoelectric collection board 3. Perform the diluted wash
goes wrong. procedure and then the cuvette
check procedure.
5. Replace the lamp.
6. Check if the wash station
dispenses liquid with correct
volume to reaction cuvettes.
correctly.
C07005 Light Source Error Lamp is not turned on / 1. The lamp is damaged. 1. Open the reaction carousel and
2. The lamp cable is not connected check if the lamp is turned on. If it
properly. is not, rerun the operating
10-44
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
3. The power board of the lamp is not software.
connected properly. 2. Check if the lamp cable is
4. The power supply of the analyzing tightened.
unit is disconnected. 3. Replace the lamp.
5. The photoelectric collection board 4. Check if the connect of the lamp
goes wrong. power board is loose, and if
necessary, reinsert the connector.
correctly.
C07006 Light Source Error Light intensity is too / 1. A cuvette position has no cuvette 1. Check if all cuvette positions
strong. installed. have cuvettes installed.
2. The circuit gain is too high and 2. Readjust the gain or(/and) lamp
beyond the measurement range. voltage.
C07007 Light Source Error Dark current is high. / 1. The circuit gain is too high and 1. Perform dark current fluctuation
beyond the measurement range. test to identify failure.
2. The power board of the lamp is not 2. Check if the abnormal channel
connected properly. has something to do with the
3. The photoelectric collection board channel gain. If it does, adjust the
goes wrong. channel gain.
correctly.
4. Unplug the cables from the AD
collection board and
pre-amplification board and
perform the dark current
fluctuation test again. Check if the
failure is related to the
pre-amplification board. If yes,
replace the optical measurement
10-45
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
assembly.
C07008 Light Source Warning The lamp has been used / 1. The lamp has been used for over 1. Replace the lamp.
over its lift span. 2,000 hours. 2. Perform the Replace Lamp
2. The lamp has been replaced maintenance procedure.
incorrectly.
C07009 Light Source Error Water blank out of range / 1. Overflow. 1. Check if the cuvette is
(10X). 2. The lamp has been replaced overflowing.
incorrectly. 2. Check if the Replace Lamp
3. Cuvette Check is not performed after command is executed during lamp
cuvette maintenance. replacement.
4. Wash solution inside the cuvette is 3. Check if the Cuvette Check
little. command is executed after cuvette
5. The cable connector or retaining maintenance.
screw of the lamp are not tightened. 4. Check if the cleaning liquid
6. The lamp is aging. inside the cuvette is no less than
half of the cuvette.
7. The photometer goes wrong.
5. Check if the cable connectors
and retaining screw of the lamp
have been tightened.
6. Check if the reaction curve
fluctuates irregularly. If yes,
replace the lamp.
C07010 Light Source Warning Reagent blank is abnormal RG! 1. Overflow or water intrusion on 1. If the alarm only occurs on
10X. reaction carousel is not processed. certain cuvette, it may be caused
2. Bubbles are dispensed together with by foreign matters or bubbles.
reagent. Check the cuvette for foreign
3. Foreign matters exist in cuvette. matters. If there are surely no
bubbles in cuvette, ignore it.
4. Reagent volume is insufficient.
2. If overflow or water intrusion
happens, remove the reaction
10-46
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
carousel and clear it and the
temperature bath.
3. Check the height and vertical
extreme position of the reagent
probe.
C07012 Other failure in Warning Storage device error; / No floppy disk or U disk is inserted. No Check if a USB drive or floppy disk
the operating Cannot import data file is found in the floppy disk or U disk, is inserted or full. Check if the
unit or file error, or file is damaged. The storage device is damaged.
floppy disk or U disk is locked or
damaged.
C07013 Other failure in Warning Storage device error. / No floppy disk or U disk is inserted. Check if a USB drive or floppy disk
the operating Cannot export data Insufficient disk space. The floppy disk is inserted or full. Check if the
unit or U disk is locked or damaged. storage device is damaged.
C07014 Other failure in Warning Biochemistry reagent / All reagents of the reagent type for the Refill or replace the reagent.
the operating exhausted chemistry are less than the minimum
unit limit. All reagents of the type are too
little to be detected.
C07016 Other failure in Warning Insufficient reagent probe / Insufficient wash solution on the Refill the wash solution on the
the operating wash solution. reagent carousel. reagent carousel.
unit
C07017 Other failure in Warning Reagent probe wash / The wash solution on the reagent Refill the wash solution on the
the operating solution is exhausted. carousel is exhausted. reagent carousel.
unit
C07022 Other failure in Warning Less than %s tests are left / All reagents of the reagent type for the Refill or replace the reagent.
the operating in biochemistry reagent chemistry are less than the minimum
unit Chemistry: %s limit. All reagents of the type are too
Position: %s little to be detected.
C07023 Other failure in Warning Calibration factors of one / The calibration factors are about to be Recalibrate the chemistry.
the operating or more chemistries are to expired.
unit be expired.
C07027 Other failure in Warning Calibrator %s has been / The calibrator is expired. Replace the calibrator.
the operating expired
unit
C07028 Other failure in Warning Chemistry: %s, lot / Expired reagent Replace the reagent.
the operating number: %s, position: %s,
10-47
10 Troubleshooting
Code Class
unit has been expired
C07029 Other failure in Warning Chemistry: %s, lot / The uncapping time of the reagent pack Replace the reagent.
the operating number: %s, position: %s, is too long.
unit has exceeded the
uncapping time
C07034 Other failure in Warning Insufficient physiological / Insufficient physiological saline on Refill the physiological saline on
the operating saline on reagent carousel reagent carousel the reagent carousel.
unit
C07035 Other failure in Warning Physiological saline on / Physiological saline is exhausted Refill the physiological saline on
the operating reagent carousel is the reagent carousel.
unit exhausted
C07036 Other failure in Warning Chemistry: %s. Calibration / The calibration factors have been Recalibrate the chemistry.
the operating factors are expired expired.
unit
C07037 Other failure in Warning Reagent bottle number / Serial number of the reagent is Reagent serial number of the
the operating of %s chemistry is changed. chemistry is changed. Please
unit changed. Please recalibrate
recalibrate
C07038 Other failure in Warning Reagent lot number of %s / Lot number of the reagent is changed. Reagent lot number of the
the operating chemistry is changed. chemistry is changed. Please
unit Please recalibrate recalibrate
C07039 Other failure in Warning The calibration factors are / The calibration factors are expired. The calibration factors are expired.
the operating expired.
unit
C07040 Other failure in Warning Biochemistry reagent / Reagent is exhausted. Refill or replace the reagent.
the operating exhausted Reagent level cannot be detected.
unit
C07041 Other failure in Error Less than X% tests are left / Inventory of the ISE reagent is lower Check the inventory, and refill ISE
the operating in ISE chemistry reagent. than the alarm limit. reagent if necessary.
unit (X can be defined)
C07042 Other failure in Warning Solutions are expired. / The non-reagent solution or the reagent Replace the expired solution or the
the operating (special reagents) is expired. reagent.
unit
10-48
P/N:046-019214-00(1.0)

BS-430 Service Manual V1.0 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-430 Service Manual V1.0 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-430 Service Manual V1.0 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-430

Intellectual Property Statement

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

BA43 Service Manual 1

Customer service department

2 BA43 Service Manual

Symbol and Meaning

BA43 Service Manual 3

Symbol Text Description

Electric shock hazards

4 BA43 Service Manual

Moving Parts Hazards

Photometer lamp hazards

Laser beam hazards

Sample, calibrator and control hazards

Reagent and wash solution hazards

BA43 Service Manual 5

System disposal hazards

Fire and explosion hazards

Removal of analyzer from use for repair or disposal

Cleaning and Decontamination

6 BA43 Service Manual

Electromagnetic noise precautions

BA43 Service Manual 7

Chemistry parameter configuration precautions

8 BA43 Service Manual

ISE module precautions

Reagent, calibrator and control precautions

ISE calibration precautions

BA43 Service Manual 9

ISE wash solution biohazards

Data archiving precautions

External equipment precautions

Tube and liquid container precautions

Maintenance and Servicing Precautions

10 BA43 Service Manual

BA43 Service Manual 11

Labels and silkscreen

Non-warning labels and silkscreen

In vitro diagnostic equipment

European community representative

12 BA43 Service Manual

Main power switch: ON

Main power switch: OFF

Analyzer power switch

BA43 Service Manual 13

Interfaces for fluid connection

Moving parts warning

14 BA43 Service Manual

Photometer lamp warning

Probe collision warning

Risk of Electrical Shock

Risk of Chemical Hazards

BA43 Service Manual 15

Liquid level floater

16 BA43 Service Manual

BA43 Service Manual 17

3.2.3 Water Supply and Drainage ...................................................................................................................... 3-2

II BA43 Service Manual